7KE85 V07.00 Manual

Preface
Open Source Software
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5 Introduction 1
Fault Recorder Basic Structure of the Function 2
7KE85
System Functions 3
V07.00 Applications 4
Power-System Data 5
Manual
Function-Group Types 6
Fault Recorder 7
Supervision Functions 8
Measured and Energy Values 9
Functional Tests 10
Technical Data 11
Appendix A
Glossary
Index
C53000-G5040-C018-4
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

This document has been subjected to rigorous technical Copyright © Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved.
review before being published. It is revised at regular inter- The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
vals, and any modifications and amendments are included document, or utilization and communication of the content
in the subsequent issues. The content of this document are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
has been compiled for information purposes only. Although including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
Siemens AG has made best efforts to keep the document utility model or a design, are reserved.
as precise and up-to-date as possible, Siemens AG shall Registered Trademarks
not assume any liability for defects and damage which
SIPROTEC®, DIGSI®, SIGUARD®, SIMEAS®, and SICAM®
result through use of the information contained herein.
are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any unauthor-
This content does not form part of a contract or of business
ized use is illegal. All other designations in this document
relations; nor does it change these. All obligations of
can be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own
Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agree-
purposes can infringe the rights of the owner.
ments.
Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this document
from time to time.
Document version: C53000-G5040-C018-4.04
Edition: 11.2015
Version of the product described: V07.00
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

This document describes a single protection, automation, control, or supervision function of the SIPROTEC 5
device functions. The document shall thus be considered as part of the main device manual.
This manual describes the functions of the fault recorder 7KE85.
Target Audience
System configurers, commissioning engineers, and persons entrusted with the setting, testing and mainte-
nance of fault recorder equipment, and operational crew in electrical installations and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Further Documentation
[dwprefdm-221012-01.tif, 3, en_US]
• Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The
printed manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.
• Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the
SIPROTEC 5 device family.
• Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.
SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 3

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Preface
• Communication protocol manual

The Communication protocol manual contains a description of the protocols for communication within
the SIPROTEC 5 device family and to higher-level network control centers.
• Product information
The Product information includes general information about device installation, technical data, limiting
values for input and output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation. This document is
provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the
Engineering Guide shows you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and update
the functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
• DIGSI 5 online help

The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5 and CFC.
The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the basic operation of software, the DIGSI princi-
ples and editors. The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC programming, basic exam-
ples of working with CFC, and a reference chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the SIPROTEC 5
range.
• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about important product features, more detailed infor-
mation about the individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with tasks based on prac-
tical operation and a brief explanation.
• SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5.
• Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of the Siemens protection devices, and a
device selection table.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communi-
ties on harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC – valid until April, 19th of 2016,
EMC Council Directive 2014/30/EU – valid from April, 20th of 2016) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EG – valid until April, 19th of 2016, Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU –
valid from April, 20th of 2016).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council Direc-
tive in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive) and
with the product standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens AG.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environ-
ment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
Other Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.
For more information about the UL database, see www.ul.com
Select Online Certifications Directory and enter E194016 as UL File Number.
4 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Preface
IND. CONT. EQ.

69CA
[ul_listed_c_us, 1, --_--]
Additional Support
For questions about the system, please contact your Siemens sales partner.
Support
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Phone: +49 (180) 524-7000
Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471
E-Mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD
Humboldtstraße 59
90459 Nürnberg
Germany
Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415

Fax: +49 (911) 433-7929
E-Mail: poweracademy@siemens.com
Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment
(module or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as
well as to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree
of danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Preface
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation which
must be given particular attention.
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this manual are people
who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Proper operation and maintenance

When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Open Source Software
Among other things, this product contains Open Source Software that was developed by third parties. The
Open Source Software included with this product and the relevant Open Source Software license agreement
can be found in Readme_OSS. The Open Source Software program is protected by copyright. You are
permitted to use the Open Source Software according to the Open Source Software license agreement.
Should contradictions occur between the Open Source Software license conditions and the Siemens license
conditions applicable to the product, the Open Source Software license agreement with respect to the Open
Source Software shall prevail. The Open Source Software is provided free of charge. If stipulated by the
Open Source Software license agreement, the source text of the software is available until the end of the third
year after purchasing the product. Shipping charges will apply separately. We are liable for the product
including the Open Source Software according to the license agreement for the product. Any liability arising
from the use of the Open Source Software that exceeds the intended program flow of the product, as well as
liability for defects that were caused by changes made to the Open Source Software, is excluded. If the
product was modified, we cannot provide technical support.
When using DIGSI 5 in online mode, you are provided with the option to go to the main menu Show Open
source information and read and display the Readme_OSS file containing the original license text and copy-
right information.
To do this, the following steps are necessary:
• Switch to online mode.
• Select the device.
• Select online in the menu bar.
• Click Show Open source information.
NOTE
i To read the Readme_OSS file, a PDF viewer must be installed on the computer.
In order to operate SIPROTEC 5 devices, a valid DIGSI 5 license is required.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
Preface................................................................................................................................................................3
Open Source Software........................................................................................................................................7
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 19
1.1 General.................................................................................................................................20
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 21
1.3 Properties of the Fault Recorder...........................................................................................23
1.4 Parameterization and Analysis Software.............................................................................. 25
1.4.1 DIGSI 5 .......................................................................................................................... 25
1.4.2 SICAM PQS/SICAM PQ Analyzer.................................................................................. 25
1.5 Scope of Functions...............................................................................................................28
2 Basic Structure of the Function.........................................................................................................................31

2.1 Function Embedding in the Device....................................................................................... 32
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope.......................................................35
2.3 Function Control .................................................................................................................. 37
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Parameter and Indications ................................39
3 System Functions............................................................................................................................................. 41
3.1 Indications.............................................................................................................................42
3.1.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 42
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel .................................................... 42
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5............................................................... 44
3.1.4 Display of Indications ..................................................................................................... 45
3.1.5 Logs................................................................................................................................ 46
3.1.5.1 General .....................................................................................................................46
3.1.5.2 Operational Log ........................................................................................................47
3.1.5.3 User-Defined Log ..................................................................................................... 49
3.1.5.4 Sequence of Events Log........................................................................................... 52
3.1.6 Setting-History Log ........................................................................................................ 54
3.1.7 Communication Log........................................................................................................ 56
3.1.8 Security Log ................................................................................................................... 57
3.1.9 Device-Diagnosis Log .................................................................................................... 59
3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log ..........................................................................................60
3.1.11 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device .............................................................. 62
3.1.12 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology ........... 64
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ................................................................................................ 65
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes............................................................................................67
3.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 67
3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values......................... 69

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts.................................................70

3.3.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions........................... 74
3.4 Date and Time Synchronization............................................................................................78
3.4.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................... 78
3.4.2 Structure of the Function.................................................................................................78
3.4.3 Function Description....................................................................................................... 78
3.4.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 81
3.4.5 Information List............................................................................................................... 82
3.5 User-Defined Objects........................................................................................................... 83
3.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 83
3.5.2 Basic Data Types............................................................................................................84
3.5.3 Energy Metered Values ................................................................................................. 86
3.5.4 Additional Data Types.....................................................................................................86
3.6 Other Functions.................................................................................................................... 87
3.6.1 Indication Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals ............................................ 87
3.7 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Trigger Functions................................... 90
3.7.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 90
3.7.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5 ................................................................ 90
3.7.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device ........................97
4 Applications.......................................................................................................................................................99
4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................100
4.2 Application Template and Functional Scope for the Fault Recorder ................................. 101
5 Power-System Data........................................................................................................................................ 105

5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................106
5.2 Structure of the Power-System Data.................................................................................. 107
5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings ............................................................. 108
5.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph)................... 109
5.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)..................... 113
5.6 Settings...............................................................................................................................116
5.7 Information List................................................................................................................... 123
6 Function-Group Types.................................................................................................................................... 127

6.1 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase.............................................................................. 128
6.1.1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 128
6.1.2 Structure of the Function Group....................................................................................128
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.......................................................................................130
6.1.4 Settings ........................................................................................................................ 130
6.1.5 Information List............................................................................................................. 131
6.2 Function-Group Type Voltage-Current 3-Phase................................................................. 132
6.2.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 132
6.2.2 Structure of the Function Group ...................................................................................133
6.2.3 Application and Setting Notes ......................................................................................136
6.2.4 Settings......................................................................................................................... 137

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.3 Function-Group Type Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)....................................................139

6.3.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................. 139
6.3.3 Function Description..................................................................................................... 139
6.3.4 Transmitted Data ......................................................................................................... 144
6.3.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)..........................................................................144
6.3.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI.............................................................................145
6.3.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device........................................................................152
6.3.8 Application and Setting Notes.......................................................................................154
6.3.9 Settings......................................................................................................................... 155
6.4 Function-Group Type Analog Units.................................................................................... 156
6.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 156
6.4.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet..................................................................................................... 158
6.4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 158
6.4.3.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 158
6.4.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet ............................................................. 159
6.4.3.4 Application and Setting Notes................................................................................. 160
6.4.3.5 20-mA Channel....................................................................................................... 160
6.4.3.6 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................ 163
6.4.3.7 Settings................................................................................................................... 164
6.4.3.8 Information List........................................................................................................165
6.4.4 20-mA Unit Serial..........................................................................................................165
6.4.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 165
6.4.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 167
6.4.5 Communication with the 20-mA Unit.............................................................................168
6.4.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit .......................................................................... 168
6.4.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet ......................................................................171
6.4.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs...........................................................173
6.4.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 173
6.4.6.2 Structure of the Function......................................................................................... 174
6.4.6.3 Function Description................................................................................................174
6.4.6.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 179
6.4.7 RTD Unit Ethernet.........................................................................................................181
6.4.7.1 Overview................................................................................................................. 181
6.4.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit .......................................................................... 182
6.4.7.5 Temperature Sensor .............................................................................................. 184
6.4.7.7 Settings................................................................................................................... 185
6.4.8 RTD Unit, Serial............................................................................................................ 188
6.4.8.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 188
6.4.8.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 188

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.4.9 Communication with the RTD Unit................................................................................191

6.4.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200) .................................................... 191
6.4.9.2 Integration of an RTD-Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP) .................................................. 193
6.4.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors .............................................................. 196
7 Fault Recorder................................................................................................................................................ 197

7.1 Introduction to DIGSI 5....................................................................................................... 198
7.1.1 General......................................................................................................................... 198
7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device ......................................... 198
7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in DIGSI 5 ..............................................201
7.1.4 Step 3: Evaluating Recordings .....................................................................................209
7.1.5 Working with IEC 61850............................................................................................... 212
7.2 Function-Group Type Recorder.......................................................................................... 215
7.2.1 Overview of Functions ................................................................................................. 215
7.2.3 Function Description..................................................................................................... 216
7.2.4 Memory Splitting........................................................................................................... 218
7.2.5 Time Jumps.................................................................................................................. 219
7.2.6 Fast-Scan Recorder......................................................................................................220
7.2.6.1 Overview of Functions.............................................................................................220
7.2.6.3 Function Description ...............................................................................................220
7.2.6.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 224
7.2.7 Slow-Scan Recorder..................................................................................................... 225
7.2.7.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................225
7.2.7.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 230
7.2.8 Continuous Recorder.................................................................................................... 231
7.2.8.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 233
7.2.9 Trend Recorder.............................................................................................................234
7.2.9.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 236
7.2.10 Sequence of Events......................................................................................................237
7.2.11 Flow Control of Fault Records (Fast-Scan and Slow-Scan Recorder)..........................237
7.2.11.1 Function Description of the Retrigger Blocking Time ............................................. 237
7.2.11.2 Triggering Without the Retrigger Blocking Time .....................................................238
7.2.11.3 Triggering With the Retrigger Blocking Time...........................................................239

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
7.3 Function Description of the Analog and Binary Triggers.................................................... 246

7.3.1 Overview of Functions ................................................................................................. 246
7.3.2 Function Description - Analog Trigger.......................................................................... 246
7.3.2.1 Structure of the Analog Trigger .............................................................................. 246
7.3.2.2 Trigger Functions of the Analog Trigger .................................................................247
7.3.2.3 Level Trigger .......................................................................................................... 247
7.3.2.4 Gradient Trigger (dM/dt) .........................................................................................248
7.3.3 Function Description - Binary Trigger........................................................................... 249
7.3.3.1 Manual Trigger Start................................................................................................249
7.3.3.2 External Trigger Start ............................................................................................. 252
7.3.3.3 GOOSE Trigger ......................................................................................................252
7.3.3.4 Trigger Start Using Logic Block Chart..................................................................... 253
7.3.3.5 Triggers on Indications ........................................................................................... 253
7.4 Trigger Functions................................................................................................................255
7.4.1 Voltage Trigger............................................................................................................. 255
7.4.1.4 Application and Setting Notes Trig V Fund (Fundamental Component)................. 258
7.4.1.5 Application and Setting Notes V RMS Trig (RMS Value)........................................ 260
7.4.1.6 Application and Setting Notes - V0 Trigger (Zero-Sequence System).................... 261
7.4.1.7 Application and Setting Notes - V1 Trigger (Positive-Sequence System)...............262
7.4.1.8 Application and Setting Notes - V2 Trigger (Negative-Sequence System)............. 264
7.4.1.9 Settings................................................................................................................... 265
7.4.2 Current Trigger..............................................................................................................268
7.4.2.4 Application and Setting Notes I Ground. Trig.......................................................... 271
7.4.2.5 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Qsum.......................................................... 273
7.4.2.6 Application and Setting Notes - I0 Trigger (Zero-Sequence System)..................... 274
7.4.2.7 Application and Setting Notes I1 Trigger (Positive-Sequence System).................. 275
7.4.2.8 Application and Setting Notes - I2 Trigger (Negative-Sequence System)...............276
7.4.2.9 Settings................................................................................................................... 277
7.4.3 Frequency Trigger.........................................................................................................282
7.4.3.4 Application and Setting Notes - Frequency Trigger.................................................284
7.4.3.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 286
7.4.4 Power Trigger............................................................................................................... 287
7.4.4.4 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Psum...........................................................289
7.4.4.5 Application and Setting Notes Qsum Trig............................................................... 291
7.4.4.6 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Ssum...........................................................293
7.4.4.7 Settings................................................................................................................... 294
7.5 Measurands and Recorder Routing Functions................................................................... 297
7.5.1 Measurands.................................................................................................................. 297
7.5.1.1 Properties of Measurands ...................................................................................... 297
7.5.1.2 Using Measurands ................................................................................................. 297

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents

7.5.2 Recorder Routing V...................................................................................................... 303
7.5.2.3 Indications .............................................................................................................. 303
7.5.2.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 304
7.5.3 Recorder Routing VI..................................................................................................... 306
7.5.3.4 Settings................................................................................................................... 306
7.5.4 V/I Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs...........................................................309
8 Supervision Functions.....................................................................................................................................311
8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................312
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision.................................................................................. 313
8.2.1 Load Model................................................................................................................... 313
8.2.2 Function Points............................................................................................................. 314
8.2.3 CFC Resources............................................................................................................ 315
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System................................................................................317
8.3.1 Signaling-Voltage Supervision...................................................................................... 317
8.3.1.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 320
8.3.2 Voltage-Balance Supervision........................................................................................322
8.3.2.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 324
8.3.3 Voltage-Sum Supervision............................................................................................. 325
8.3.3.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 327
8.3.4 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision............................................................................ 327
8.3.4.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 329
8.3.5 Broken-Wire Detection..................................................................................................329

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents

8.3.5.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 332
8.3.6 Current-Balance Supervision........................................................................................ 333
8.3.6.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 335
8.3.7 Current-Sum Supervision..............................................................................................336
8.3.7.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 338
8.3.8 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision............................................................................ 339
8.3.8.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 341
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware.................................................................................. 342
8.4.1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 342
8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum..................................................... 343
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware......................................................................................... 347
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration.............................................................................. 348
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections...................................................................... 349
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures........................................................................350
8.8.1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 350
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 ..........................................................................................................351
8.8.3 Defect Severity 2...........................................................................................................353
8.8.4 Defect Severity 3...........................................................................................................354
8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)...................................................................................355
8.9 Group Indications and Predefined CFC Charts.................................................................. 357
9 Measured and Energy Values.........................................................................................................................359

9.1 Overview of Functions........................................................................................................ 360
9.2 Structure of the Function.................................................................................................... 361
9.3 Operational Measured Values ........................................................................................... 362
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components .....................................................................364
9.5 Average Values.................................................................................................................. 365
9.5.1 Function Description of Average Values.......................................................................365
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values....................................................... 365

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values.................................................................................................368

9.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values..................................................... 368
9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values..................................... 369
10 Functional Tests..............................................................................................................................................371
10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................372
10.2 Directional Test ..................................................................................................................373
11 Technical Data................................................................................................................................................ 375

11.1 General Device Data.......................................................................................................... 376
11.1.1 Supply Voltage..............................................................................................................376
11.1.2 Binary Inputs................................................................................................................. 377
11.1.3 Relay Outputs............................................................................................................... 377
11.1.4 Design Data.................................................................................................................. 379
11.1.5 Influencing Variables for Measured Values ................................................................. 382
11.1.6 SDHC Memory Card .................................................................................................... 382
11.2 Date and Time Synchronization .........................................................................................383
11.3 Phasor Measurement Unit ................................................................................................. 384
11.4 Recorder Functions............................................................................................................ 385
11.4.1 Fast-Scan Recorder......................................................................................................385
11.4.2 Slow-Scan Recorder..................................................................................................... 385
11.4.3 Continuous Recorder.................................................................................................... 386
11.4.4 Trend Recorder.............................................................................................................386
11.4.5 Measured Values and Binary Inputs ............................................................................ 386
11.5 Supervision Functions........................................................................................................ 388
11.5.1 Voltage-Balance Supervision .......................................................................................388
11.5.2 Voltage-Sum Supervision ............................................................................................ 388
11.5.3 Voltage Phase-Rotation Reversal ................................................................................388
11.5.4 Broken-Wire Detection .................................................................................................389
11.5.5 Current-Balance Supervision........................................................................................ 389
11.5.6 Current-Sum Supervision..............................................................................................389
11.5.7 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision ........................................................................... 390
11.5.8 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum .....................................................390
11.6 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values.........................................................391
11.7 CFC.................................................................................................................................... 395
A Appendix......................................................................................................................................................... 399
A.1 Order Options and Accessories..........................................................................................400
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions............................................................................... 402
A.3 Standard Variants for 7KE85..............................................................................................405
A.4 Connection Examples for Current Transformers ............................................................... 409
A.5 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers................................................................ 412
A.6 Application Examples of the Fault Recorder ......................................................................415
A.7 Shielding Concept ..............................................................................................................418
A.8 SDHC Memory Card ..........................................................................................................419
A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card ............................................................................... 421
Glossary..........................................................................................................................................................423

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
Index............................................................................................................................................................... 435

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
1 Introduction
1.1 General 20
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 21
1.3 Properties of the Fault Recorder 23
1.4 Parameterization and Analysis Software 25
1.5 Scope of Functions 28

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
1.1 General
1.1 General
The protection of power distribution equipment is crucial in assuring a reliable electricity supply. The user
expects full availability of electrical energy at a consistently high standard of quality. Thus, for power-system
protection, for example, it is becoming increasingly difficult to distinguish between critical load cases and
short-circuits with minimum fault currents. The demands on optimum use and the corresponding parameteri-
zation of protection devices are rising. Intensive evaluation of available information from secondary equip-
ment (using fault recorders) is therefore essential. This is the only way to ensure today's currently high levels
of reliability and availability in electricity transmission and distribution systems for the future as well.
A new era has begun for fault recording with the introduction of the SIPROTEC 5 series. The 7KE85 fault
recorder was developed especially for the requirements of the changing energy market, both current and
future. Powerful, reliable monitoring, combined with the flexible engineering and communication options,
offers the basis for maximum reliability of supply.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5

The SIPROTEC 5 devices at the bay level are compact and can be installed directly in medium- and high-
voltage switchgear. They are characterized by seamless integration of fault recorder, protection, and control
functions.
General Properties
• Powerful microprocessor
• Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker
• Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing switches from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters
• Easy operation via an integrated operation and display panel, or via a connected personal computer with
user interface
• Continuous calculation and presentation of measured values on the front display
• Storage of min/max measured values and storage of long-term average values
• Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording
• Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software
• Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface
• Battery-buffered, synchronizable clock
Microcomputer System
All device functions are processed in the microcomputer system.
This includes, for example:
• Filtering and preparation of the measurands
• Constant monitoring of the measurands
• Monitoring of the trigger conditions for the individual functions
• Querying of limiting values and time-outs
• Controlling of signals for the logic functions
• Storage of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis
• Administration of the operating system and its functions, such as data storage, real-time clock, communi-
cation, interfaces, etc.
• External distribution of information
Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the
entire device series. Significant features here include:
• Modular system design in hardware, software, and communication
• The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the SIPROTEC 5 family
• Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety
• The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices
• Ability to upgrade with innovations possible at all times through libraries

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
• Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions
• Multi-layered security mechanisms in all links of the security chain
• Self-monitoring routines for reliable localization and indication of device faults
• Automatic logging of access attempts and safety-critical operations on the devices and systems
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages coming from the instrument transformers and
adapt them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5 device has current and/or voltage
transmitters. The current inputs are therefore intended for the detection of phase currents and ground current.
The ground current can be detected sensitively using a core balance current transformer. In addition, phase
currents can be detected very sensitively for a particularly precise measurement.
The voltage inputs detect the measuring voltage of device functions requiring current and voltage measured
values.
The analog values are digitized in the internal microcomputer for data processing.
Binary Inputs and Outputs

The device receives information from the system or from other devices via the binary inputs and outputs. Indi-
cations are generated for the remote signaling of important events and states.
Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or detached operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide
information on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC
display, the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting
parameters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters
changed.
USB Interface and Serial Interfaces

The USB interface in the front cover enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI
5 operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
back are used to realize various communication protocols.
Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5 devices maintain complete communication redundancy:
• Multiple redundant communication interfaces
• Redundant and independent protocols for control centers possible (such as IEC 61850, either single or
redundant)
• Redundant time synchronization (such as IRIG-B and SNTP)
Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in the
supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply, are bridged by
capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
1.3 Properties of the Fault Recorder

The 7KE85 fault recorder is built on the flexible and powerful SIPROTEC 5 modular system and can thus also
be used universally in the scope of system solutions. The 7KE85 fault recorder is able to acquire extensive
data, such as measured values and sampled values (SAV), with high precision. It features a large number of
analog and binary inputs and a high sampling frequency. All data are recorded either by way of continuous
criteria or by way of different trigger criteria. Besides storing the data on internal mass storage, they can also
transmit it to central analysis systems. Consequently, you are able to monitor systems for typical characteris-
tics.
The fault recorder continuously records on the one side via the trend recorder and the continuous recorder.
On the other side, the fault recorder records analog and binary data during a fault, for example, a change in
voltage, short circuits or ground faults, using the triggered fast-scan or slow-scan recorders. The 7KE85 fault
recorder captures this high-precision, time-stamped record, including calculated measurands (such as, for
example, power or frequency), for later evaluation. The evaluation is done after reading out from the device
through DIGSI 5 via SIGRA or via the powerful fault record and PQ data analysis system SICAM PQS/SICAM
PQ Analyzer. Recorded data is archived on internal mass storage to prevent data loss in case of a loss of
supply voltage. Recording of faults ensures long recordings with outstanding accuracy. The 7KE fault
recorder captures and processes the measurands and events according to the IEC 61000-4-30 and IEC
61000-4-15 standards.
Poor power quality can lead to a power failure. Effects on power quality consist of and are created chiefly by
large loads (for example, industrial processes), changes in the current network status (switching operations)
and by external effects (for example, lightning). Power quality standards (for example, EN 50160) are used to
specify limits for electric measurands within which connected devices operate properly without large power
losses. The fault recorder is used as a power quality recorder and evaluation device to show the power
quality of an electricity-supply system.
The fault recorder has the following properties:
• Embedding in the SIPROTEC 5 family with:
- A consistent hardware concept
- Numerous expansion modules
- DIGSI 5 as configuration tool
- A broad selection of functionalities on the basis of function points
• Fault recording and continuous recording for use in medium-, high-, and ultra high-voltage systems
(substations) and in power plants
1 x Fast-scan recorder
2 x Slow-scan recorder
5 x Continuous recorder
2 x Trend recorder
• Event recorder for binary signals for monitoring of diverse components, such as circuit breakers, discon-
nectors, etc.
• PMU communication acc. to IEEE C37.118 standard
• IEC 61850 communication
• Sampling frequencies can be set from 1 kHz to 16 kHz
• Time synchronization via IRIG-B, DCF77, and SNTP
• External mass storage (Siemens SDHC memory card only) with 16 GB
• Flexible routing:
- Any desired routing of the measured values on each recorder
- Free combination of the measuring groups for the power calculation
• Recorded quality code:

- Quality characteristic for each recorded value as well as display of this characteristic in SIGRA/SICAM
PQ Analyzer

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
• Recording GOOSE signals
• Triggering on GOOSE signals via Continuous Function Chart
• Creation of flexible trigger conditions through use of logic block charts (Continuous Function Chart)
• Specifying the limits for electrical measurands
• Monitoring power network quality (Power Quality Monitoring) according to EN 50160
• Measuring flicker according to IEC 61000-4-15
• Additional functions for simple tests and for commissioning

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
1.4 Parameterization and Analysis Software
1.4.1 DIGSI 5
Description
DIGSI 5 is the versatile engineering tool for parameterization, commissioning, and operating all SIPROTEC 5
devices. Its innovative user interface includes context-sensitive user instructions. Simple connection to the
device via USB and Ethernet IF enables you to work with a device easily and efficiently. The full capabilities
of DIGSI 5 are revealed when you connect it to a network of protection devices: Then you can work with all of
the devices in a substation in one project.
DIGSI 5 offers superior usability and is optimized for your work processes. Only the information you actually
need to carry out your tasks is shown. These can be reduced further via expanded filter mechanisms. Consis-
tent use of sophisticated and standardized mechanisms in the user interfaces requires less training. DIGSI 5
is tailored to specific requirements. The free software variant DIGSI 5 Compact offers everything that is
required for a single device. The DIGSI 5 Standard Version is suitable for complex scenarios with several
devices. DIGSI 5 Premium contains the full functionality you need to raise your productivity to a new level.
1.4.2 SICAM PQS/SICAM PQ Analyzer
Description
Siemens SICAM PQS allows all fault records and network quality data (PQ data) to be analyzed in one
system. The protection of power distribution equipment is crucial in assuring a reliable electricity supply. The
user expects full availability of electrical energy at a consistently high standard of quality. Thus, for power-
system protection, for example, it is becoming increasingly difficult to distinguish between critical load cases
and short-circuits with minimum fault currents. The demands on optimum use and the corresponding parame-
terization of protection devices are rising. Intensive evaluation of available information from secondary equip-
ment using fault recorders is therefore essential. This is the only way to ensure today's currently high levels of
reliability and availability in electricity transmission and distribution systems for the future as well. Additionally,
the growing use of power electronics often has a noticeable impact on power quality. The result is poor power
quality, which can cause interruptions, production outages, and high follow-up costs.
Compliance with the generally valid quality criteria for electricity-supply systems as defined in standards (for
example, EN 50160) is therefore vital. The basis must be reliable recording and assessment of all quality
parameters. Weak points and potential fault sources can be identified early on and systematically eliminated.
With the software solution SICAM PQS, Siemens is setting new standards: For the first time, it is possible to
evaluate and archive centrally all network quality data from the bay level with one integrated software solution
in a vendor-neutral manner. This gives you a quick and uncomplicated overview of the quality of your system.
With SICAM PQS, you can keep an eye on all relevant data: Fault records as well as all network quality
measured data. For combined applications, SICAM PQS is also easy to expand to a substation automation
system.
User Benefit
• Secured power quality for the supply of your plant
• Fast, transparent analysis of the cause and development of a system incident
• Efficient personnel deployment for troubleshooting
• Intuitive usability
• Evidence of compliance with generally accepted standards in utilities
• Online comparison of sampled PQ data with standard and customer-specific transmission code
templates
• Immediate information on violations of the power-quality criteria
• Automatic determination of the fault point

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
• Automatic analysis and report creation for violations of the power-quality criteria
• Structured representation and structured access to archive data
• Cumulative summary of all PQ data in a state criterion (PQ index)
• Spatially distributed options for the monitoring and evaluation of PQ measured data
• Archiving of PQ data (measured values, fault records, PDR records)
• Different communication standards and interfaces for device connection and for the acquisition of
process data (Ethernet TCP/IP, serial interfaces)
• Automatic import from third-party devices in PQDIF and COMTRADE format
• Ethernet network monitoring, for example, based on SNMP
• Data exchange via OPC for the connection to office desktop computers
• Secured data access via a user management
• Redundant structure of the system on different levels
• Test and diagnostic functions
• Export of fault records via COMTRADE
• Export of PQ data via PQDIF
• Notification via e-mail and SMS
[dw7keebe-161012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 1-1 Overview of the Advantages of SICAM PQS
Architecture
SICAM PQS is suitable for varied use in energy supply or industrial facilities due to its modular system struc-
ture.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
Thus, SICAM PQS can be set up in different variants:

• Full Server with (source) archive and SICAM PQ Analyzer
• System with
– Full servers with (Source) archive
– SICAM PQ Analyzer Clients
• System with
– Full servers
– Archive computers with (Collector) archive
– SICAM PQ Analyzer Clients
The number of components which can be used in a system depends on the individual license.
(Source) Archive
The Full Server collects PQ measured data and fault records from connected devices and stores them in its
local (source) archive. This archive data can be directly evaluated by one or several SICAM PQ Analyzer(s).
(Collector) Archive
In distributed systems with one or several Full Servers, the data in the (source) archives is collected by the
SICAM PQ Analyzer Collector and stored in a central (Collector) archive on an archive computer. This
archive data is evaluated by one or more SICAM PQ Analyzer(s).
[dwcollec-151012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 1-2 Configuration Options with SICAM PQS System with Full Servers, SICAM PQ Analyzer
Clients and (Collector) Archive

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
1.5 Scope of Functions

Registration Systems in Power Plants
In power plants, it is essential that the following problems be analyzed and evaluated and, if necessary,
counter measures implemented:
• There is a short circuit on the generator during the startup phase, before the generator has reached the
rated frequency of the power-system voltage. During this time range, the generator frequency passes
through a range of 0 Hz to the rated value frated. Use of the Fast-scan recorder is necessary in this
phase.
• The circuit breaker of the generator closes. In this time range, possible errors, such as incorrect phase
sequence or insufficient synchronization, must be registered. Use of the Fast-scan recorder is necessary
in this case, too.
• There is a short circuit on the generator or in the transmission system, after the generator was coupled
with the electrical power system and ran without interruption. Use of the function Fast-scan recorder is
helpful in this case, too. The cause of the short circuit on the generator can be analyzed with the record-
ings.
• Local or entire system power swings occur. These oscillations can severely stress the generator shaft, if,
for example, the use of electronic restraint measures (Power System Stabilizer (PSS)) is not provided or
the calibration of the electronics is faulty. These failures can be recorded precisely with the functions
Slow-scan recorder and Continuous recorder. The process quantities (power, frequency, RMS values of
the fundamental component of currents and voltages and of symmetric components) form a special
characteristic with which the electronic signals of the PSS and other important quantities, such as the
excitation current of the generator, the steam pressure etc., can be recorded. Finally, these signals can
be compared and evaluated with the history of the RMS value of the voltage and the current.
• Power swing cycles between the power plant and transmission system can lead to severe damage to
the generator if they are not detected in time and shut down. This job is performed by the distance
protection equipment. With the use of the Slow-scan recorder function, the network status can be
precisely recorded before, during and after the power swing cycle. If, in parallel to this, the function is
activated, it is possible to clarify, for example, whether a closer or more distant short circuit in the
network was the cause for the trip of this power swing, or load or generator shedding which put the
network in this state.
• The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) function is used for monitoring large transmission systems. With
this, the phasors of the power-system voltage, the line current and the power frequency are calculated
precisely and provided with a time stamp. The calculated data are sent continuously to a computer via a
communication channel, the Phasor-Data Concentrator (PDC). The data of several PMUs are processed
and evaluated in the PDC so that bottlenecks in the transmission system, line overloads, etc., can be
determined.
• The Continuous recorder function is used to examine the long-term stability of power-system voltage
and power frequency. With these registration functions, the long-term history of the currents and
voltages, the active and reactive power, the power frequency and other important network variables can
be recorded. With the use of the Continuous recorder registration function, it is possible to adapt the
recordings to be more comprehensive and informative.
As described previously, through the use of a modern fault recorder and proper use of the corresponding
functions, the electrical events in and around the power plant can be recorded precisely and then analyzed.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
Registration Systems in the Transmission Systems

Most fault recorders are installed in the switchgears for transmission systems. Even though the main applica-
tion area is still post-mortem analysis and thus the use of the Fast-scan recorder function, the use of other
functions to understand stability problems in the energy network and take the appropriate counter measures
is growing.
• Capacitor voltage dividers are used in several transmission systems. In the case of a short circuit in the
line, high-frequency fault signals can occur in the voltage map, which then lead to over or under function
of protection devices. With the use of the function Fast-scan recorder, these transient processes, as well
as the behavior of the protection devices can be extensively analyzed.
• Common-mode reactors at the beginning and end of transmission lines form a resonant circuit with the
line capacity and /or with a longitudinal condenser. If a line is shut off, then resonant oscillations can
exist, which last several network periods. For 1-pole short interruptions, these oscillations of the meas-
ured values of protection devices can be significantly corrupted and thus cause unwanted tripping. For
this reason the resonant oscillations must be recorded and analyzed after switching off the lines with the
function Fast-scan recorder.
• Inductance of voltage transformers and scatter capacities in switchgears (busbars, lines) can lead to
ferroresonance effects. These problems are not registered under normal conditions of protection
devices. If these problems are not detected and counter measures implemented in a timely manner,
significant damage can result in the switchgear, such as the explosion of voltage transformers. For regis-
tration of these processes, the function Fast-scan recorder is necessary.
• Measurements over large areas of the transmission system (Wide Area Monitoring) can be performed
with the functions Slow-scan recorder and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). The objective of the meas-
urements is the detection of power fluctuations and power swing cycles as well as voltage and frequency
stability problems.
• Increasingly, the use of continuous recorders is growing. With these functions, the long-term stability
problems can be analyzed in detail. These measurements form a solid foundation for expensive invest-
ments such as the procurement of compensation systems (SVC).
• The availability and quality of the power supply is very important for power distribution utilities. To
monitor the voltage quality (also known as Power Quality (PQ)) over a long period of time, the Trend
recorder function must be used. With this function, the long-term behavior of voltages (fluctuations in
frequency, voltage, short-term voltage changes, transients, signal distortions, etc.) can be precisely
recorded. Using the Trend recorder function contributes to a high-quality and reliable energy supply. An
analysis according to EN 50160 can be mapped using the averaged values (frequency: 10 s; short-term
flicker strength over 10 minutes and long-term flicker strength over 2 hours).
Registration Systems in HVDC Switchgear

The use of modern registration systems in high-voltage DC transmission systems (HVDC) is significantly
different than the use in transmission systems or power plants.
The use of the classic function Fast-scan recorder is thus very important in connection with the process signal
inputs. With this constellation, it is possible to register alternating and direct-voltage variables together. In
some cases, it is additionally desired to register gate trigger pulses for thyristors via binary channels. Areas of
use are, for example, Flexible Alternating-Current Transmission Systems (FACTS) and thyristor-driven reac-
tive-power compensation systems.
In the future, it can be expected that, in HVDC and FACTS systems, the use of the functions Slow-scan
recorder, Continuous recorder and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) will increase to monitor the function
groups of the system for stability control of the network and to register faults.
Registration Systems in Distribution Systems and Industrial Complexes

Modern registration systems are used in important transformer stations where the transition from transmis-
sion to distribution takes place. Such transformer stations are present both in the power utility area as well as
in industrial complexes. The most important function is here the Fast-scan recorder for registering short
circuits.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
Identifying the Measuring Points

The measuring points can be assigned and established for example as in the Figure 1-3 . The fault record or
PQ data acquisition requires, in addition to the selection of the measuring point, also a definition and estab-
lishment of the evaluation criteria at the individual measuring points. There the monitoring of the Network
Quality is a combination of data acquisition techniques, which are classified according to purpose or use.
[dwnetzve-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 1-3 General Display of the Measuring Points
Table 1-1 Assignment of measuring points
No. Measuring Points Location

1 Infeed (line or transformer) Possible busbars
2 Power generation/decentral power Busbars, transformers or generator connection
generation
3 Forwarding, distribution system Busbars (for example, if the busbar belongs to the transmis-
sion company and is run by it.)
4 Forwarding, infeed (line or trans- Decentral line connection (for example, if the line belongs to
former) the transmission company and is run by it.)
5 Forwarding, distribution system Transformer secondary circuit or cable for adjacent trans-
former station
6 Distribution, infeed (line or trans- Distribution transformer
former)
7 Power distribution, consumers Distribution transformers (for example, if the transformer
belongs to the transmission company and is run by it.)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
2 Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device 32

2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope 35
2.3 Function Control 37
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Parameter and Indications 39

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

General
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer great flexibility in the handling of functions. Functions can be individually loaded
into the device. Additionally, it is possible to copy functions within a device or between devices. The neces-
sary integration of functions in the device is illustrated by the following example.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.
Application Template
When creating the device in DIGSI 5, you must specify the hardware configuration of the device. DIGSI 5
then automatically offers the appropriate 7KE85 application template for the selected hardware configuration.
Select one of the offered application templates.
See also Chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope.
Function Groups (FG)

Functions are arranged in function groups. This simplifies handling of functions (adding and creating). The
function groups are assigned primary objects, such as feeders with current and voltage transformers. Further-
more, special function group functionalities, such as all recorders (found in DIGSI 5 under Recording), can be
summarized.
The function groups bundle functions with regard to the following basic tasks:
• Assignment of functions to current and/or voltage transformers (assignment of functions to the meas-
uring points and thus to the fault recorder)
• Exchange of information between function groups

When a function is copied into a function group, it automatically works with the measuring points assigned to
the function group. Their output signals are also automatically included in the configured interfaces of the
function group.
The selected application template Fault recorder contains 4 function groups:
• Function group Voltage
• Function group Voltage/current
• Function group Recorder
• Function group PMU

The following tables show the structure of the function groups.
Table 2-1 Function Group Voltage
Function Group (FG) Function (FN) Function Block (FB)

FG 3-phase voltage Frequency trigger Frq. Trigger
Voltage trigger V Fund. Trig
V RMS Trig
V0 Trigger
V1 Trigger
V2 Trigger

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

Recorder routing V Routing f
Routing V
Table 2-2 Function Group Voltage/Current

FG 3-phase voltage/current Frequency trigger Frq. Trigger
Voltage trigger V Fund. Trig
V RMS Trig
V0 Trigger
V1 Trigger
V2 Trigger
Current trigger I Fund. Trig
I RMS Trig
I0 Trigger
I1 Trigger
I2 Trigger
Power trigger P Sum Trig
Q Sum Trig
S Sum Trig
Recorder routing VI Routing f
Routing I
Routing power
Routing V
Table 2-3 Function Group Recorder

FG Recorder Fast-Scan Fast-Scan Recorder
Slow-Scan Slow-Scan
Continuous Continuous
Trend Trend
Table 2-4 Function Group PMU

FG Phasor Measurement Unit – –
– – –
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the appli-
cation. You can add, create, or even delete user-specific function groups. You can also adapt the functional
scope within a function group according to the use case. Detailed information on this can be found under
DIGSI 5 online help.
Interface Between Function Group and Measuring Point

The function groups receive the measurands of the current and voltage transformers from measuring points.
For this, the function groups are connected to one or more measuring points.
The number of measuring points and the assignment of function groups to the measuring points are preset by
the selected application template in accordance with the specific application. Therefore, this specifies which

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
measuring point(s) and the corresponding measurands have to be used by which function within the function
group.
The user can change the assignment as needed, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
A detailed description of the assignment of the measuring points on the function groups are in chapter
7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in DIGSI 5 .
Trigger Routing – Interface between Function Group and Recorders

You can assign the trigger building blocks, which were configured in the feeder function groups flexibly to the
configured fault recorders. Each function group for feeders contains an overview of the successful assign-
ments for this purpose. In this overview this assignment can be adapted.
A detailed description of the trigger assignment is in chapter 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and
Routing in DIGSI 5 under the keyword Trigger-routing.
Functions, Function Blocks

Functions can be assigned to function groups. An assignment of a function to a feeder function group defines
that, for example, this function uses the measuring points of this feeder.
Functions can be further subdivided.
Functions consist, for example, of one or more function blocks:
• Example of a function with one function block: The function Fast-scan recorder consists of the only func-
tion block Fst-scan rec.
• Example of a function with several function blocks: The Voltage trigger function consists of the function
blocks V Fund. Trig, Trig. V RMS, V0 Trigger, V1 Trigger and V2 Trigger
Each function block and each function (without function blocks) can be individually switched into specific
operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed function control and is explained in chapter
2.3 Function Control .
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions and function blocks can be added, created,
and deleted (see Chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope

The application template defines the preconfigured functional scope of the device for a specific use case. A
certain number of application templates is predefined for each device type. DIGSI 5 automatically offers the
application templates for selection when a new device is installed.
The available application templates with the respective functional scope are described in more detail in Appli-
cation template 4.1 Overview.
The selection of the application template first predefines which function groups and functions are available in
the device (see also in chapter2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.
You can adjust the functional scope to your specific application.
NOTE
i The routing of the signals in the application templates is a recommendation. The routing can be changed
or expanded at any time.
Adjusting the Functional Scope

Adjust the functional scope based on the selected application template. You can add, create, or delete func-
tions, stages, function blocks, or complete function groups.
In the DIGSI 5 project tree, this can be done via the following Editors:
• Single-line configuration
• Information routing
• Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added
functionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are
also copied when you copy functionalities.
NOTE
i If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or function block from the device, all settings and
routings will be lost. The function group, function, or function block can be added again, but then, the
default settings are active.
In most cases, the adjustment of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, tripping
stages, and function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks auto-
matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
In a few cases, it may be necessary to add a feeder function group. You must still connect the voltage and
the current/voltage function groups to one or more measuring points (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in
the Device).
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.
Function Points
Function points (FP) are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. Further information can be
found in the description of application templates, in the chapter Application templates 4.1 Overview.
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
The current function point consumption can be queried in DIGSI 5 using the menu item Device information
diagram in the tab Resource consumption. The number of function points which functions or function blocks
require is found in Table 4-1.
Extending the Function-Point Credit

You can reorder function points if the function-point credit for the device is not enough.
Proceed as follows:
• Determine the function point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator (http://www.energy.siemens.com/hq/de/automatisierung/stromuebertragung-
verteilung/schutz/siprotec5/bestellkonfigurator.htm).
• Order the additional function points from your local distributor or at http://www.energy.siemens.com.
• Siemens will provide you with a signed license file for your device, either via e-mail or for downloading.
• Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file into your device. The procedure is described in the Online
Help of DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
2.3 Function Control

Function control is used for:
• Functions, which do not contain function blocks
• Function blocks within functions
NOTE
i Simplifying Functions and Function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies
to tripping stage control and function block control.
Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter Mode to define whether you
want a function to run (On) or not Off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function or switch it into test
mode (parameter Mode = test) for the purpose of commissioning. In test mode the fault records are marked
with a test flag.
The function shows the current status – such as an Alarm – via the status signal.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in the following figure. It is standardized for all fault recorder func-
tions. Therefore, this control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.
[losteuer-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-1 General Control of a Recorder Function
State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode and the input superordinate state.
You set the specified operating state of the function via the parameter Mode. The function mode can be set to
On, Off , and Test. The operating state is described in Table 2-5. You can set the parameter Mode via:
• DIGSI 5
• On-site operation at the device
• Certain systems control protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103)

The possibility to adjust the superordinate state is limited. For test purposes, the complete device can set into
test mode.
The following table shows the possible function states:

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table 2-5 Possible Function States
Function State Explanation

On The function is activated and operates as defined. The prerequisite is that status of the function is OK.
Off The function is turned off. It does not create any information. The status of a selected function always
has the value OK.
Test The function is set into test mode. This state supports the commissioning. All outgoing information of
the function (indication and, if available, measured values) is provided with a test bit. This test bit
significantly influences the further processing of the information, depending on the target.
NOTE: The Test mode is not available for the continuous recorder.
Target of the Information Processing
Buffer The indications are provided with the identification Test in the buffer.
Contact An indication routed to contact is not triggering the contact.
Light-emitting diode (LED) An indication routed to the LED triggers the LED (normal processing)
CFC Here, the behavior depends on the state of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is not in test state:
The chart is not triggered by a status change of an information
with set test bit. The initial state of the information (state before
test bit was set) is not processed during execution of the chart.
• CFC chart itself is in test state:
The chart continues to process the information (indication or
measured value) normally. The CFC outgoing information is
provided with a test bit. The definitions in this table apply to its
continued processing.
A CFC chart can be set to the test state only by switching the entire
device to test mode.
Protocol Indication and measured value are transmitted with set test bit,
provided that the protocol supports this functionality.
If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE indication, the test bit is set
spontaneously and the GOOSE indication is transmitted immediately.
The receiver of the GOOSE indication is automatically notified of trans-
mitter test mode.
Status (Health)
The status indicates whether a selected function is capable of its designated functionality. If so, the status is
OK. If, due to the device's state or problems within the device, the functionality is possible only to a limited
extent or not at all, the status will indicate Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).
Internal self-supervision can cause the functions to assume the Alarm status (see chapter Supervision
Functions). If a function assumes the Alarm status, it is no longer active (indication inactive is gener-
ated).
Only a few functions can signal the Warning status. The Warning status results from function-specific moni-
toring and is - if available - described in the function description. If a function assumes the Warning status, it
will remain active, that is, the function can continue to work in a conditional manner and trip in the case of a
protection function.
Inactive
The indication Inactive signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Inactive is gener-
ated in the following cases:
• Function is switched off
• Status of the function is in Alarm state
• Function is blocked by an input signal (see Figure 2-1)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Parameter and Indications
Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The
reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of the
device and the corresponding description in the manual. You can find the reference numbers in this docu-
ment, for example, in the application and setting notes, in the logic diagrams, and in the parameter and infor-
mation lists.
In order to form unique test and reference numbers, every function group, function, function block, and indica-
tion or parameter has a text and a number. This means that structured overall texts and numbers are created.
The structure of the text and reference number is in accordance with the hierarchy, already shown in chapter
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device .
• Function group:Function:Function Block:Indication
• Function group:Function:Function Block:Parameter
The colon serves as a structure element to separate the hierarchy levels. Depending on the functionality, not
all hierarchy levels are always available. Function Group and Function block are optional. Since the same
type of function groups, functions as well as function blocks can be created several times, a so-called
instance number is added to these elements
EXAMPLE
The structure of the text and reference number is shown for the parameter dM/dt rise active and the
indication Health of the function Voltage trigger in the VI 3-phase function group. Function and function
group are only present once in the device (in the DIGSI 5 library). The representation is very simplified.
[dwlofbem-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-2 Function Voltage Trigger in the Fault Recorder Function Group
The following table shows the text and numbers of involved hierarchy elements:
Name Number of the type Instance number
Function group VI 3-phase 2 1
Function Voltage trigger 155 1
Function block V Fund. Trig. 1 957 1
Parameter dM/dt rise active 103 –
Indication Health 53 –
The instance numbers result from the following:

• Function group: VI 3-phase 1
1 Instance, because only one function group VI 3-phase exists in the device
• Function: Voltage trigger 1

1 Instance, because only one function Voltage trigger exists in the VI 3-phase function group.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
• Function Block: Trig. V Fund. 1

1 Instance, because 1 Trig. V Fund. 1 exist in the function Voltage trigger
This results in the following texts and numbers (including the instance numbers):
Parameter: Number
VI 3-phase: Voltage trigger: V Fund. Trig: dM/dt rise active 21:_1551:_9571:_103
Indication: Number
VI 3-phase: Voltage trigger: V Fund. Trig: Health 21:_1551:_9571:_53
The structure is simplified accordingly for parameter and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
3 System Functions
3.1 Indications 42
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 65
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes 67
3.4 Date and Time Synchronization 78
3.5 User-Defined Objects 83
3.6 Other Functions 87
3.7 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Trigger Functions 90

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1 Indications
3.1.1 General
During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
• Measured data
• Power-system data
• Device supervisions
• Device functions
• Function executions during testing and commissioning of the device

In addition, indications give an overview of important fault events after a failure in the network. All indications
are furnished with a time stamp at the time of their occurrence.
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. The following number of
indications are saved at least in the respective buffer (depending on the scope of the indications):
• User-defined log 200 indications
• Operational log 2000 indications
• Sequence of events 2000 entries

If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted, the oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. During
a supply voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or storage in the flash
memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device display and navigation
using keys allow you to read and analyze the logs on site.
Indications can be generated spontaneously via the communication interfaces of the device and through an
external request in the form of a general interrogation. In DIGSI 5 indications can be tracked spontaneously in
online operation in a special indication window. Indications can be made accessible to higher-level control
systems through mapping on various communication protocols.
NOTE
i All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You will find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.
Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or
a PC on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel
Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the forward slash signifies the total number of indications available. The number before the forward
slash indicates the position the selected or displayed indications has in the list. The end of the indication list is
closed with the entry ***END***.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc7kevor-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-1 On-site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)
Menu Path Log

Main menu → Indications → Operational indications
Settings change
User indications 1
User indications 2
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Security indications
Device diagnosis
Communication indications
² To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
² Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
² Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 informa-
tion routing matrix or is pre-defined.
You will find information about this in the chapter 3.1.5.1 General .
² Every indication contains date, time and its state as additional information.
² In some logs you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display.
To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log .
NOTE
i No password entry is necessary to read indications from the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5
Procedure
Menu Path (Project) Log

Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Operational log
Setting-history log
User log 1
User log 2
Sequence of events
Project → Device → Device information → Logs → Security log
Device-diagnosis log
² To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-
site operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. A direct connection to your PC can be
established via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices
via a data network from your DIGSI 5 PC.
² To reach the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. If you have not set
up the device within a project, you can also attain this via Online access.
² After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To
update, it is necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
² To execute a synchronization with the logs, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see
the following figure).
[sc7kemel-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-2 DIGSI 5 Display of an Indication List
You will find additional information about the deletion and saving of logs in chapter 3.1.10 Saving and
Deleting the Log .
² To determine a relative time for all other indications, you can reference the display of log entries, if
needed, to the real time of a certain entry. The real-time stamps of events remain unaffected.
² For this purpose, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see Figure 3-2).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Setting Relative Time Reference

² Which indications in the selected log can be displayed depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 infor-
mation routing matrix or is predefined.
You will find information about this in the chapter 3.1.5.1 General .
3.1.4 Display of Indications
Displayed indications in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel are supplemented with the following infor-
mation:
Table 3-1 Overview of additional information
Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information

Log for operational indications Time stamp (Date and time), Time stamp (Date and time),
and log for user-defined indica- Relative time, Value
tions Increasing entry number,
Value,
Message number,
Quality,
Cause
DIGSI 5: Quality Indication Column
Quality Meaning
good Indication is valid
invalid Indication is invalid
DIGSI 5: Additional Information Indication Column

The entries in the column for additional information are in the format Cause/Originator/Additional Cause:
• Cause → What was the cause?
• Originator → Who was the originator?
• Additional cause → Supplementary notes
Cause Meaning
Data change Value change in an indication
Data update Update of indication value
General interrogation General interrogation
Cyclic Cyclical general inquiry
Quality change Change of the indication quality
Initiator Meaning
Maintenance Maintenance
Process Device operation (normal)
Additional cause Meaning

Selection failed Selection failed
invalid position invalid position
Position attained Position attained
Parameter change running Parameter change running
Final position attained Final position attained
Impermissible mode Impermissible mode

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Additional cause Meaning

Command cancellation Command cancellation
Monitoring time expired Monitoring time expired
Object not selected Object not selected
No access right. No access right
Final position exceeded Final position exceeded
Target value not attained Target value not attained
Loss of connection Loss of connection
unknown unknown
Object already selected Object already selected
inconsistent parameter(s) inconsistent parameter(s)
blocked by foreign access blocked by foreign access
Select time-out Select time-out
Communication is interrupted Communication is interrupted
Fault occurred Fault occurred
3.1.5 Logs
3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow cate-
gorization of indication logging based on operating states (e.g. operational and fault logs) and based on fields
of application.
Table 3-2 Log Overview
Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Setting-history log Parameter changes
User-defined log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits
Communication Log Status of communication interfaces
Administering Logs
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted,
the oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. During a supply voltage failure, recorded data are
securely held by means of battery buffering or storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log
from the device with DIGSI 5. The device display and the navigation allow you to read and analyze the logs
on site using keys.
Configurability of the Logs

The indication capacity that may be recorded in configurable logs (for example, ground-fault log) is laid down
in columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.
Procedure
• To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window. Access is
only through the project:
Project → Device → Information Routing
• Select the associated routing column in the matrix from:

Target → Logs → Frequency Trigger Column

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• The routing of the selected indication is done via right click. Select one of the options in the list box
shown:
– Routed (X)
– Unrouted
[sc7kekon-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-3 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5
For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).
3.1.5.2 Operational Log

Operational indications are information that the device generates during operation. This includes information
about:
• State of device functions
• Measured data
• System Data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values generates as an operational indication. Up to 2000 indications
can be stored in the operational log.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Logs → Operational log
• The operational log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device. To update (synchronization
with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list (see the following
figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc7kebet-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-4 Reading the Operational Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Operational indications
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[schmibet-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-5 Reading the Operational Log on the On-site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device.
Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Operational Log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.
3.1.5.3 User-Defined Log

With the user-defined log (up to 2), you have the possibility of individual indication logging parallel to the
operational log. This is helpful, for example, in special monitoring tasks but also in the classification into
different areas of responsibility of the logs. Up to 200 indications can be stored in the user-defined log.
• To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → User logon 1/2
The user-defined log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scanw7ke-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-6 Reading the User-Specific Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → User log 1/2
You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the displayed
indication list.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scanwhmi-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-7 Reading the User-Specific Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted.
Read about it in the chapter 3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log .
Configuration of a User-Defined Log

The indication scope of a created user-specific log can be configured freely in the associated column of the
information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → V1 or V2

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scanwinf-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-8 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: User-Defined Log V1/2)
3.1.5.4 Sequence of Events Log

The change of the status of binary signals (SPS) is stored in chronological sequence in the Sequence of
events log.
Violation of an upper or lower limiting value is also recorded as an event. Up to 2000 entries can be stored in
the list. Upon reaching the maximum number of entries, the oldest entries will be overwritten.
• Use the project tree window to access the sequence of events for your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Project → Device → Process Data → Logs → Sequence of events
• The sequence of events log is shown to you in the last loaded state from the device. To update the
device (synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indica-
tion list (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scsoedig-040713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-9 Reading the Sequence of Events with DIGSI 5
• To access the sequence of events from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Logs → Sequence of events
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
[scsoehmi-040713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-10 Reading the Sequence of Events on the On-site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The sequence of events for your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configurability
The indication capacity of the log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Column Sequence of events
The indication General > Behavior is pre-routed in the selected application templates and functions from the
library.
3.1.6 Setting-History Log
All individual parameter changes and the downloaded files of entire parameter sets are recorded in the log for
parameter changes. This clarifies whether completed parameter changes are connected to logged events
(e.g. faults). On the other hand, it is possible to prove with fault analyses, for example, that the current status
of all settings actually corresponds to that of the time of the fault. Up to 200 indications can be stored in the
setting-history log.
• To reach the log for parameter changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Setting-history log
The setting-history log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (see the following figure).
[scparmel-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-11 Reading the Setting-history Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Menu → Indications → Setting-history log

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scparhmi-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-12 Reading the Setting-history Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Indication Categories in the Setting-History Log

For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful param-
eter changes. The following list gives you an overview of this information.
Table 3-3 Overview of indication types
Displayed Information Explanation

Selection editing+ Selection of settings group to be edited
Reject+ Rejection of all changes successful
PG activation+ PG activation through command successful
PG activation- PG activation through command failed
set+ Parameter value was changed
Acceptance+ Acceptance of change successful
Acceptance- Acceptance of change failed
DCF loaded DCF loaded into device
PG 1 Settings group 1
For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful param-
eter changes.
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information from the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
• In the setting-history log you cannot route additional indication objects.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.7 Communication Log
The logging of the respective status such as ensuing faults, test and diagnosis operation, and communication
capacity utilizations is done for all hardware-based configured communication interfaces. Up to 500 indica-
tions can be stored in the communication log. Logging occurs separately for each communication port of the
configured communication modules.
• Use the project tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access → USB → Device → Test suite → Communication module
• Then click J:Onboard Ethernet → Communication log.
• The communication indications are displayed when you click the arrow under Time stamp.
The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Update in the headline of the indication list.
[sccompuf-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-13 Reading the Communication Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Communication log
operation panel.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sckomhmi-230213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-14 Reading the Communication Log on the On-site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in the chapter
3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log .
Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.
3.1.8 Security Log
Access to areas of the device with restricted access rights is recorded in the security log. Unsuccessful and
unauthorized access attempts are also recorded. Up to 500 indications can be stored in the security log.
• To reach the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Device Information → Logs → Security log
The security log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scsecuri-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Reading the Security Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Security Indication
[scsechmi-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-16 Reading the Security Log on the On-site Operation Panel of the Device

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer. cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information from the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
3.1.9 Device-Diagnosis Log
The logging and the display of concrete instructions are done in the device-diagnosis log during
• required maintenance (e.g. battery supervision)
• identified hardware defects
• compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is suffi-
cient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is assumed
by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect or
compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 in Normal Operation
• To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Device Information → Logs → Device-diagnosis log
The device-diagnosis log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
[scgerdia-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-17 Reading the Device-diagnosis Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation
• To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Device diagnosis

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scgerhmi-230213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-18 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
i • The device-diagnosis log cannot be deleted!
• The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log
Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order for
the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after an inspection of the
system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.
NOTE
i Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.
NOTE
i Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with
relevance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i If the user changes the device configuration (for example, from V04.00 to V06.00) after a firmware update
and loads it into the device, the following logs are deleted automatically after restarting the device:
• Operational log
• User log
• Setting-history log
• Sequence of events log

Back up the deletable logs beforehand using DIGSI 5.
Deleting Logs on the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main Menu → Indications → Operational Indications
[scloebet-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel
operation panel.
• The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.
• After being prompted, enter the password and confirm with Enter.
• After being prompted, confirm the Deletion of all entries with OK.
Deleting Logs from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (for example opera-
tional log).
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational Log

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.11 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device
In your SIPROTEC 5 device you can also configure indications as stored. This type of configuration can be
used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is
acknowledged. Confirmation occurs via:
• On-site operation panel
• DIGSI 5
• Binary Input
• Log of substation automation technology
Configuration of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5
• In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals, among others,
to LEDs and output contacts. For this, go to the project tree.
• Click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the routing
range of the targets by clicking the right mouse button.
You are offered the following options:
Table 3-4 Overview of Routing Options
Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description

H (active) X The signal is routed as active with voltage.
L (active) X The signal is routed as active without voltage.
U (unlatched) X X The signal is routed as unsaved. Activation and reset of
the output (LED, BO) occurs automatically via the
binary-signal value.
L (latched) X X The binary signal is latched when the output (LED) is
activated. To reset, a targeted confirmation must occur.
Confirmation of Stored Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel

Confirmation via LED Reset
Operating the button first brings about the activation of all LEDs (LED test) when pressed and when released
the resetting of all stored indications. Stored LEDs, output contacts and spontaneous fault messages
(display) are reset.
Confirmation via the operating menu
Use the navigation buttons of the on-site operation panel, in order to reach the reset functions from the main
menu.
• Select: Main menu → Device functions → Reset functions
You are offered different reset options.
• Open the corresponding submenu.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scresetu-230213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-20 Reset Functions on the On-Site Operation Panel
• Use Res. binary outputs to reset stored output contacts.
• Actuate the softkey Start in the base bar.
• As needed, enter the confirmation ID when requested and then confirm with the softkey Enter.
• Use Reset LEDs to reset stored LEDs that are not assigned to a special Function group.
Depending on device configuration, the function group(s) are displayed to you as submenus for which sepa-
rately corresponding, stored LEDs can be reset.
• Go to the submenu of the selected function group.
• Use Reset LEDs to reset stored LEDs in the selected function group.
Confirmation of Stored Indications via Binary Inputs

Confirmation via entry >LED Reset
Confirmation via binary input >LED-Reset brings about the activation of all LEDs (LED test) and, in case of
dropout of signal, the resetting of all stored indications. Stored LEDs, output contacts and spontaneous fault
messages (display) are reset.
Confirmation of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5

You can confirm stored indications via DIGSI 5 in online operation. For this, go to the project tree.
• Select Online access → Interface → Device → Device information.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scquitti-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-21 LED Reset via DIGSI 5
• Click the Log tab.
• Click the LED reset button (see the yellow line in the figure).
• Enter the confirmation ID.
• Confirm the process with OK.

Stored LEDs, output contacts and spontaneous fault messages are reset on the assigned device.
Confirmation of Stored Indications via a Protocol

Initiation of acknowledgment of stored indications can also occur through communication via a connected
substation automation technology. This can occur in conformance to standards (IEC 61850, IEC
60870-5-103) or via configuration (mapping) of the LED reset input signal for any protocol. Stored LEDs,
output contacts, and spontaneous fault displays (display) are reset.
NOTE
i The confirmation of stored indications then leads to the resetting of configured LEDs and output contacts,
as long as these active unstored indications are present in parallel. I.e., indications configured as unstored
are not affected by the confirmation process.
3.1.12 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology
If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks indica-
tions sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This test bit
makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test. Necessary reactions in normal opera-
tion on the basis of an indication can thus be suppressed.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition

Basic Principle
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with a powerful measured-value acquisition function. In addition to a high
sampling frequency, they have a high measurand resolution. This ensures a high degree of measuring accu-
racy across a wide dynamic range. The 24-bit sigma/delta analog-digital converter represents the core of
measured-value acquisition. In addition, the oversampling function supports the high measurand resolution.
Depending on the requirements of the individual method of measurement, the sampling frequency is reduced
(Downsampling).
In digital systems, deviations from the rated frequency lead to additional errors. In order to avoid this, 2 algo-
rithm-dependent processes are used in all SIPROTEC 5 devices:
• Sampling-frequency tracking:
The analog input channels are scanned for valid signals in cycles. The current power frequency is deter-
mined and the required sampling frequency is defined by using a resampling algorithm. The tracking is
effective in the frequency range between 10 Hz and 80 Hz.
• Fixed sampling frequency – correction of the filter coefficients:

This method operates in a limited frequency range (frated +/- 5 Hz). The power frequency is determined
and, depending on the degree of the frequency deviation, the filter coefficients are corrected.
The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values (SAV) in the measured-value acquisi-
tion chain. Figure 3-22 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit
the bandwidth of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem) is
installed downstream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. This means the magnitude,
phase, as well as the transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that
the current transformer terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.
[dwmes7ke-210213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Measured-Value Acquisition Chain
The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50-Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. After the correction of magnitude, phase and
transformer time constant, the 16-kHz sampled values (SAV) are sent to the fast-scan recorder. For RMS-
value calculations, the values are reduced to 8 kHz. For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window
is adjusted on the basis of the power frequency. For numerous Measurement applications, 20 samplings per
cycle are sufficient (if frated = 50 Hz: sampling every 1 ms, at frated = 60 Hz: sampling every 0.833 ms). This
sampling rate is an adequate compromise between accuracy and the parallel processing of the functions
(multi-functionality).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups, in 2
variants:
• Fixed (not resampled)
• Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 80 Hz)
Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher
sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement. Detailed information can be found in the
corresponding function description.
NOTE
i The measuring points for current and voltage are in the Power-system data (starting in chapter 5 Power-
System Data). Each measuring point has its own parameters.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
3.3.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to satisfy different
applications, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects depending on
these quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following
figure also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure
are described in more detail in the following.
[loquali1-090212-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-23 Data Flow within a SIPROTEC 5 Device
Supported Quality Attributes

The following quality attributes are automatically processed within the SIPROTEC 5 system.
• Validity using the values good or invalid
The Validity quality attribute shows if an object transferred via a GOOSE message is received (valid,
invalid) or not received (invalid). The invalid state can be suppressed in the receiver device by setting
a substitute value also for the object that is not received (see Figure 3-24). The substitute value is
forwarded to the functions.
If the device receives one of these values, it is replaced by the invalid value and thus processed
further as invalid.
If one of the detailed quality attributes (detailQual) has the value TRUE, then Validity is set to the
invalid value, unless this was already done at the sender end.
• Test using the values TRUE, FALSE
The Test quality attribute indicates to the receiving device that the object received via a GOOSE
message was created under test conditions and not operating conditions.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
• OperatorBlocked using the values TRUE, FALSE

The OperatorBlocked quality attribute indicates whether an object transferred via GOOSE message orig-
inates from a device that is in a functional logoff state. If the sending device is switched off, the
object is no longer being received and assumes the invalid state. However, since the Operator-
Blocked quality was previously identified on the receiving device, the object can be treated differently at
the receiving end (see chapter 3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE
Values). At the receiving end, the object may be treated like a dropped signal.
Influencing Quality by the Operating Modes

In addition to the normal operation, the equipment also supports further operating modes that influence
quality:
• Test mode of the device
You can switch the entire device to test mode. In this case, all data objects generated in the device
(state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
The CFC charts are also in test mode and all output data receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
• Test mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into test mode. In this case, all data
objects generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive
the quality attribute Test = True.
• Functional logoff of the device

If you take the device out of service and want to isolate it from the supply voltage, you can functionally
log off the device ahead of time. Once you functionally log off the device, all data objects generated in
the device (state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked = TRUE.
This also applies to the output from CFC charts.
If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message, the receiver devices can assess the quality. The
receiver device detects a functional logoff of the sending device. After shutting down the sending device,
the receiver device identifies that the sending device has been logged off operationally and did not fail.
Now the receiving objects can automatically be set to defined states (see chapter 3.3.2 Quality
Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
• Off mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks
You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into off mode. In this case, all data objects
generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive the
quality attribute Validity = invalid.
Influencing the Quality through Hardware Supervision

Supervision functions monitor the device hardware (see chapter 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware). If
the supervision functions identify failures in the data acquisition of the device, then all recorded data will
receive the quality attribute Validity = invalid.
Influencing the Quality by the User

You can influence the processing of data and their quality differently. In DIGSI 5, this possible at the following
3 locations:
• In the Information routing Editor for external signals for GOOSE connections
• In the CFC chart
• In the Information routing Editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options of this influence as well as the automatic quality
processing.
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device-internal function, you can influ-
ence the quality processing at 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and at the function input signal. This is
based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device to several functions.
The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different functions require
customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values
In the Information Routing editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The following
figure shows the possible influence using the example of an DPC data type.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select the desired signal in the External Signals group.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.
[sc_GOOSE values, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-24 Influence Option When Linking an DPC Type Data Object
The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid
value.
• Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
• Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good without change.
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid is • The validity attribute is set to good and
set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). • The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked (opBlk)

• Check box is not set. The OperatorBlocked attribute and data value are
• Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked forwarded without change.
= FALSE
Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked = • The OperatorBlocked attribute is set to FALSE
TRUE and processed further using this value.
• The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Interaction of the Quality Attribute Validity and OperatorBlocked

OperatorBlocked check box is set and receipt of Regardless of whether the validity check box is set or
OperatorBlocked = TRUE not, and regardless of the current validity, the validity
attribute is set to good and the substitute value of the
OperatorBlocked data object is set. That is, the Oper-
atorBlocked settings overwrite the Validity settings.
OperatorBlocked check box is not set and receipt of The OperatorBlocked attribute remains set and is
OperatorBlocked = TRUE forwarded.
If the Validity check box is set and the receipt of
validity = invalid is set, the respective data object
substitute value is used.
For continued signal processing and influence, it
must be taken into account that in this configuration
the data object substitute value for validity =
invalid is set, but the quality attribute Operator-
Blocked is not yet set.
Data Substitute Values

Depending on the data type, different data substitute values must be used.
Data Type Possible Data Substitute Values
ACD, ACT general, phsA, phsB, 0 (False), 1 (True)
pshC, neut
only ACD dirGen 0, 1, 2, 3 (Unknown, Forward, Backward, Both)
dirPhsA, dirPhsB, 0, 1, 2 (Forward, Backward, Both)
dirPhsC, dirNeut
BAC, APC mxVal 1.401298 · 10-45 to 7.922 · 1028
stSeld 0 (False), 1 (True)
ctlNum 1 to 255
BCR actVal, frVal, frTm 0 to 1 073 741 824
CMV mag, ang 1.401298 · 10-45 to 7.922 · 1028
DPC, DPS stVal 0, 1, 2, 3 (intermediate-state, off, on, bad-state)
ENUM types (for SPS output 0 (False), 1 (True)
example, ENS, EN, ENC) INS output The qualities of the object of the sending device are
taken on.
INC stVal 0 to 1 073 741 824
stSeld 0 (False), 1 (True)
ING setVal 0 to 1 073 741 824
INS stVal 0 to 1 073 741 824
ISC, BSC vWTpos -64 to 64
vWTInd 0 (False), 1 (True)
SEC cnt 0 to 1 073 741 824
SPC, SPS stVal 0 (False), 1 (True)
SPG setVal 0 (False), 1 (True)
MV mag 1.401298 · 10-45 to 7.922 · 1028
3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
In DIGSI 5, you can control quality processing of CFC charts. In the project tree, you can find the CFC block
(see the following figure) under Device name → Settings → Device settings in the editor:

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[sc quali cfc, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-25 Influencing CFC Quality Processing in DIGSI 5
With the CFC quality handling parameter, you control whether you want to influence the quality of CFC
charts in a Manual or Automatic (default setting) manner.
If you select Manual, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of indi-
vidual signals (Validity = good)!
Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed. If the device is in test mode or the input TEST of
the CHART_STATE CFC block is set, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is set to Test.
If you select Automatic, the quality processing of the CFC charts is influenced as follows:
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general quality processing and certain
CFC blocks that are specifically designed for quality processing.
General Processing
Most of the CFC blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these blocks, the following general
mechanisms shall apply.
If one invalid signal is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be set to
invalid if they originate from building blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words, the quality
is not processed sequentially from building block to building block but the output data are set globally.
This does not apply to CFC output data that originate from building blocks with explicit quality processing
(see next section).
Quality Attribute: Test

CFC chart is in normal state. CFC input data with the Test = TRUE attribute are ignored.
When the CFC chart is executed, then the data value that was
used before the Test = TRUE attribute is used. The quality of this
old value is also processed.
This means that on the output side, the attribute Test = FALSE.
CFC chart is in Test1) state. If the CFC chart is executed, then the attribute Test = TRUE is
set for all data leaving the CFC chart. This does not depend on
whether the data are formed via CFC blocks with or without
quality processing.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
1)A CFC chart can be switched to the test state by switching the entire device to test mode or the input TEST
of the CHART_STATE CFC chart is set.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked
CFC chart is in normal state. In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
is ignored.
CFC chart is in functionally logged off1) In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
state . is ignored. All CFC output data are labeled as functionally
logged off.
1)This state only occurs if the device is functionally logged off. In this case, the quality attributes of all CFC
outputs are labeled as functionally logged off.
Quality Processing Building Blocks (Condition Processing)

The first 3 blocks (x_SPS) process the quality automatically according to the stated logic. The other blocks
are used to isolate the quality from a data object and add them back after separate logical processing.
Building Blocks Description
OR_SPS The blocks also process the supported quality attributes according to their logic. The
AND_SPS following tables describe the logic using the input values in connection with the quality
NEG_SPS attribute Validity. The input values are 0 or 1, the quality attribute Validity can have the
value good (=g) or invalid (=i).
x = placeholder for the input value and the quality attribute Validity
OR_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 0, x 0, i
0, g 0, g 0, g
1, g x, x 1, g
1, i 0, x 1, i
1, i 1, i 1, i
The output thus has the logical value 1 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 1 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
OR operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
AND_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, g x, x 0, g
0, i 1, x 0, i
1, i 1, x 1, i
1, g 1, g 1, g
The output thus has the logical value 0 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 0 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
AND operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
NEG_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 1, i
0, g 1, g
1, i 0, i
1, g 0, g
SPLIT_SPS The blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object.
SPLIT_DPS The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end. This is the case if the
SPLI_XMV block is interconnected with CFC input data, or is connected downstream with a quality
processing building block (x_SPS). In other cases, the CFC editor does not allow a
connection.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

SPLIT_Q The block performs binary separation of the quality into good, bad (= invalid), test,
off and OperatorBlocked.
These 5 attributes can then be processed individually in a binary operation. The block
must be connected downstream to a SPLIT_(DO) block.
BUILD_Q The building block enters a binary value for good and bad (= invalid) in each quality
structure. Thus, with this building block the quality attributes good and bad (=invalid)
can be set explicitly, for example, as the result of a monitoring logic.
All other quality attributes are set to the default state, for instance, Test = FALSE. If, for
example, the entire CFC chart is in the test state (see Quality Attribute: Test Under
General Processing), this default status can again be overwritten on the CFC output side.
The building block is normally connected downstream to a BUILD_(DO) building block.
BUILD_ACD These blocks merge data value and quality. The block output is generally used as a CFC
BUILD_ACT output.
BUILD_BSC Generally, the BUILD_Q block is connected upstream from these building blocks.
BUILD_DPS
BUILD_ENS
BUILD_SPS
BUILD_XMV
CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of signals. If an input signal of the CFC chart has the
quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This standard behavior is
not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing, the quality attributes
of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.
EXAMPLE: Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE

The following conditions apply to the example:
• The interlocking condition for switchgear interlocking protection is stored in the device as a CFC chart.
• The removed device sends the release signal for the interlocking condition via a GOOSE telegram.
If the communication connection has been interrupted, the release signal (GOOSEStr) incoming via the
GOOSE telegram gets the quality invalid. If the CFC chart obtains an invalid input signal, there are the
following possibilities: The last signal valid before the communication interruption is used (quality = good) or
a substitute data value with the quality good is used (True, False).
To do this, you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear
interlocking. Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart. With the SPLIT_SPS
building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. You can then
continue to process these signals separately in the CFC chart. Use the quality information as an input signal
for a BUILD_SPS building block and assign the quality good to the signal. You obtain an SPS signal as a
result, with the quality good. You can use this to process release messages correctly. You can process the
release messages with the quality good in the CFC chart of the actual interlocking. Therefore, the release
signal for a switch illustrated in the interlocking logic is available as a valid result with the quality good. The
following figure shows an example of the CFC chart with the building blocks for quality processing:

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[sccfcran-220415-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-26 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)
If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information.
Link the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate).
This way, you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of
the CFC chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
3.3.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions
Figure 3-27 provides an overview for processing the quality of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.
Figure 3-27 Overview for Processing Quality within an Internal Function

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Internal Input Data

The quality processing is automatic for internal input data.
Supported Quality Attributes Description
Validity • At the receiving end, internal values can only be invalid
or good.
• If invalid, the function health is set to Alarm and the
function is reset.
Causes for invalid internal data are, for example:
• The frequency operating range of the device was left.
• The device is not calibrated.
• The A/D converter monitoring identified an error.
Routable Binary Input Signals (SPS Data Type)
The next figure shows the possible sources for connecting a binary input signal. Depending on the source,
different quality attributes can be set:
• CFC chart: See description in chapter 3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
• GOOSE connection: See description in chapter 3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for
Received GOOSE Values
• Device hardware: No quality attributes are set and supported.
Figure 3-28 Sources for Connecting a Binary Input Signal
For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-27 .
The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a recorder.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information routing.
• In the operating range, select the desired binary input signal.
• In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the item Processing quality attrib-
utes.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[sc7kequa-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-29 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)

The Validity attribute can have the values good or invalid (reserved and questionable were already
replaced at the input end of the device by the value invalid).
The input signal source is invalid. The current data value of the source signal is ignored. You can
select between the following options:
• Further process last valid data value of the source signal
(this is the default setting with only a few exceptions)
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 0.
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different
applications.
The function health switches to Warning.
The input signal source is good. The source signal data value is processed further.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Quality Attribute: Test

• The input signal source and The source signal data value is processed further.
processed function are in test state.
• The input signal source is not in test
state and the function to be
processed is in test state.
The input signal source is in a test state The data value of the source signal is ignored. You can select
and the function to be processed is in between the following options:
normal state. • Further processing of the last valid source signal data
value, before the source switches to the test state (that is
the default setting)
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 0.
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different appli-
cations.
Quality Attribute OperatorBlocked

The quality cannot be influenced at this position and does not lead to a response within the logic
Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays the
conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to the To the IEC 61850
SIPROTEC 5 interface, in buffer
system, for
example, in the
direction of a CFC
chart)
Functional state = Test Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
(thus, result of device operating
mode = Test or function mode
= Test)
Functional state = Off Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus, result of device operating sponding to the definition for
mode = Off) switched off
Function health = Alarm Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(for example, result of invalid sponding to the definition for
receive data) reset
Device operating mode = func- Unchanged Validity = good Validity = good
tionally logged off OperatorBlocked = detailQual =
TRUE oldData
OperatorBlocked =
TRUE

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.4 Date and Time Synchronization
3.4.1 Overview of Functions
Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology . A clock module internal to the device and having battery backup is synchronized cyclically with the
current device time so that the right device time is available and used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure.
At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring of the device time.
3.4.2 Structure of the Function
The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
• DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
• Device: Main menu → Device functions → Date & Time
Parameter:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Parameter -> Time Settings
Indications:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.
3.4.3 Function Description
Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on
the device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually
necessary to record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices.
For SIPROTEC 5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.
Adjustable Synchronization Options
• None (default setting)

The device functions without any external time synchronization. The internal time synchronization
continues to work with the help of the back-up battery even when the auxiliary voltage is shut down
temporarily. The time can be adjusted manually.
• Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.
• Connection to a GPS time synchronization unit

The time synchronization takes place with the set time telegram from an external IRIG-B or DCF77
receiver via the time synchronization interface of the device.
• Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations. If you enable both services during configuration of Ethernet interfaces,
these protocols are available as an option for the time synchronization.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Configurable Time Sources:
• 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.
• Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective
for the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is avail-
able and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is
indicated.
• For every time source it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or Time
zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings corre-
spond to the local time zone of the device.
NOTE
i Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick
up.
Configurable Date Format

Regardless of a feed time-synchronization source, a uniform format is maintained internally within the device.
The following options are available for the customary local representation of the date format:
• Day.Month.Year: 24.12.2009
• Month/Day/Year: 12/24/2009
• Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24
Taking Local Time Zones into Account

The internal device time is maintained in universal time (UTC). To display time stamps in DIGSI and on the
device display, you can define the local time zone of the device (parameter Offset time zone for GMT),
including the applicable daylight saving times (start, end, and offset of daylight saving time) using parameters.
This allows the display of the local time.
NOTE
i • For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account automatically when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time
of the daylight saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into
consideration. However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the
daylight saving times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.
• For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5. An excep-
tion is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG-B.
Status, Supervision, and Indications of Time Management

Your SIPROTEC 5 device generates status and monitoring indications that provide important information
regarding the correct configuration of the time source and the status of the internal time management during
start-up and device operation.
Internal time synchronization is monitored cyclically. Important synchronization processes, the status of the
time sources and errors detected are reported. A device time that has become invalid will be marked accord-
ingly so that affected functions can go to a safe state.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Indication Description
Device: This indication signals a high difference between the
Clock fail internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The triggering of the
indication can point to a defect in the clock module or
to an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication signals whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication signals that the device time has been
Clock set manually set manually via the on-site operation panel or via
DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications signal whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications get trig-
gered, it can also be an indication that an incorrect
configuration of the port or channel numbers was
done at the on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication signals after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
Time synchronization: This indication signals that the device is synchronized
High accuracy with an accuracy better than 1 μs. The indication is
only of significance when the PMU function is used.
NOTE
i In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).
For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in
the project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
[sctimedg-220415, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-30 Time Information in DIGSI
For every time source, you see the following:

• Last received time (with date)
• Receipt time of the last received time telegram

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
• Configured type of timer
• Indication of timer outage or failure
• Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.
NOTE
i All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).
3.4.4 Settings
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting

Time sync.
_:102 Time sync.:Time source • none none
1 • PPM
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• Syncbox
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104
_:103 Time sync.:Time source • port J
1 port • port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:104 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
1 channel • Ch2
_:105 Time sync.:Time source • none none
2 • PPM
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• Syncbox
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

_:106 Time sync.:Time source • port J
2 port • port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:107 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
2 channel • Ch2
_:108 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 1 • local
_:109 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 2 • local
_:101 Time sync.:Fault indica- 0 s to 3600 s 600 s
tion after
3.4.5 Information List
No. Information Data Class Type

(Type)
Time managem.
_:300 Time managem.:Daylight saving time SPS O
_:301 Time managem.:Clock set manually SPS O

(Type)
Time sync.
_:303 Time sync.:Status time source 1 SPS O
_:304 Time sync.:Status time source 2 SPS O
_:305 Time sync.:Time sync. error SPS O
_:306 Time sync.:Leap second SPS O
_:307 Time sync.:High accuracy SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.5 User-Defined Objects
3.5.1 Overview
Within a User-defined function group, you can use the User-defined function block and the User-defined func-
tion block [Control] to group user-defined objects that you find in the DIGSI 5 library under User-defined func-
tions.
With user-defined function groups and user-defined functions, a grouping of user-defined objects, for
example, user-defined function blocks, can be performed. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see
following figure).
[scudef_lib, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-31 User-Defined Objects in the DIGSI 5 Library
You can insert single-point indications, pickup and operate indications (ACD, ACT), single or double
commands, commands with a controllable whole number as well as measured values in the User-defined
function block (see following figure). You can assign a superordinate name to the grouping (for example,
Process indications, for a group of single-point indications that are read in via binary inputs). This function can
be deactivated via the mode. Readiness is also evaluated and represented.
The user-defined function can be instantiated both at the highest level (in parallel to other function groups)
and within the function groups and functions.
A User-defined function block [control] is also available. In addition to the mentioned option of a general User-
defined function block, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals, for example, SPC or
DP.
[scbenutz-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-32 Information Routing Through Use of Added User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications
and Single-Point Indications

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.5.2 Basic Data Types
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS: Single-Point Status)

The status of a binary input can be registered in the form of a single-point indication or forwarded as the
binary result from a CFC chart.
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS unsaved: Single-Point Status Unsaved)

In contrast to SPS single-point indications, the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the
device restarts.
For this purpose, go to Properties > Details > Initialization > Restart and set the Value.
[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-33 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status)

When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and
mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed
position).
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
Marker Command (Type SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable
(marker).
State of a Whole Number (Type INS)

The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result.
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can
be shown on the display of the device.
State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS)

The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.
Controllable Single-Point Indication (SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a single feedback.
Command with Double-Point Feedback (DPC, Double Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via double-point indication as feedback.
Command with a Whole Number (INC, Controllable Integer Status)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a whole number as feedback.
Measured Values (MV)

This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for instance.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Metered values
Sampled Values (SAV)

In DIGSI, the current and voltage sampled values are identified as an SAV type according to IEC 61850.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Protection Activation Information (ACT)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Tripping. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information, which could also indicate Tripping.
Protection Activation Information with Direction (ACD)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Pickup. It is available in the library for receiving protec-
tion information, which could also indicate Pickup. In addition, both ACD and ACT can be generated and
processed by CFC charts.
3.5.3 Energy Metered Values
Energy Metered Values

Energy metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power for reference and delivery direction in each Voltage/current 3-phase function group. The calcu-
lation is based on the current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
3.5.4 Additional Data Types
The following data types are also used in the system, but they are not contained in the information catalog for
general use:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)
The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
• WYE (phase-to-ground related measured values of a 3-phase system)
• DEL (phase-to-phase related measured values of a 3-phase system)
• SEQ (Sequence)
• CMV (Complex Measured Value)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.6 Other Functions
3.6 Other Functions
3.6.1 Indication Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals
Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used to
prevent continuously changing indications from forming a jam in the event list. In addition, an overload situa-
tion is avoided using chatter blocking. After an adjustable number of changes, the indication is blocked for a
certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the parame-
ters using the example of an input signal.
[sc7keson-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-34 Parameters of the Indication Filtering
The setting range for the Software filtering time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 86 400 000 ms (1
day) in ms increments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether the software filter should
be restarted by a change from 1 to 0 and back. When activated, the Indication timestamp before filtering
check box back dates the time stamp by the set software filtering time and the fixed hardware filtering time. In
this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.6 Other Functions
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as a parameter of the position in the General function block.
The parameters for the chatter blocking are set centrally the same for the entire device in DIGSI. in the
Device settings (see the next figure for this).
[scfla7ke-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-35 Setting Chatter Blocking
The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see Figure 3-36):
• Number of permissible status changes
This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the
chatter-checking time. If this number is exceeded, the signal will be or remains blocked.
Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field. If the entry is 0, chatter blocking is essentially inactive.
• Chatter test time

During this time, the number of times a signal changes its state is checked. This time is started if chatter
blocking is configured for at least one signal and this signal changes its state. When the set time has
expired, the timer restarts automatically (cycle time).
Enter a number between 1 and 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in
seconds.
• Number of chatter tests

This number specifies the maximum number of test cycles to be run before the signal is finally blocked.
In this case the indications Group warning (Alarm handling group) and Chatter blocking (Device group)
are set. Restarting the devices removes this block again.
Enter a number from 0 to 32767 in this field. The value Infinite (∞) is permissible here.
Enter this value as character string oo.
• Chatter dead time

If the number of permissible status changes for a signal is exceeded during the first chatter-test time or
the second chatter-test time, the chatter dead time starts. This signal is blocked within this time.
minutes. An entry is possible here only if the number of chatter checks does not equal 0.
Example: If, for instance, you enter 1 min. here and chatter blocking starts for a signal, the actual dead
time may lie between 1 min., and 1 min. and 59 s.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.6 Other Functions
• Chatter test time

During this second test time, the number of times a signal changes its state is checked once again. The
time begins when the chatter dead time expires. If the number of status changes is within the
permissible limits, the signal is released. Otherwise, an additional dead time begins, unless the
maximum number of chatter checks has been reached.
seconds. An entry is possible here only if the number of chatter checks does not equal 0.
As soon as chatter blocking is set, the corresponding signal is assigned the oscillatory quality, and a corre-
sponding indication is entered in the operational log.
The following image shows an example of the usage of chatter blocking on a single-point indication (type
SPS). The number of permitted status changes is set to 5. After 5 status changes occur, the signal is set to
the original state and it is given the quality oscillatory.
[dwflatsp-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-36 Signal Change During Chatter Blocking

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.7 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Trigger Functions
3.7.1 Overview
You can set the threshold values of trigger functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
• Primary
• Secondary
• Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the back-
ground. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.
Edit Mode: Primary

The parameters are set as primary values and thus refer directly to the primary system. The manual conver-
sion on the secondary circuit omitted.
Edit Mode: Secondary

The settings refer to the secondary circuit of the transformer. This means that the settings must be converted.
Edit Mode: Percent

The setting values can be standardized. The reference values for the percentage setting are always the
nominal variables (phase-to-phase variables) of the function groups such as FG 3-phase voltage or FG 3-
phase current / voltage. The setting values are, thus, related exclusively to the primary settings.
NOTE
i If other reference values are used, then this is documented for the respective function in the chapter Appli-
cation and Setting Notes.
Recommendation for Setting Sequence

When setting the trigger functions, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
• First set the transformation ratios of the transformers. You can find these under Power-system data.
• In addition, set the reference parameters for the percent setting. These parameters are located, for
example, in the function group 3-phase voltage/current in the General function block. .
• Next, set the parameter of the trigger functions.

If the transformer data have changed after completing the setting, remain in the setting sheet (for
example, primary setting) and change the transformer data. In the background, DIGSI 5 obtains the new
settings in the inactive setting views (for example, new secondary values).
The following section explains, by way of an example, how to modify the transformer ratios in DIGSI 5 using
the corresponding alternatives.
3.7.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5
Threshold-Value Setting in an Example of the Voltage Transformer

In the Default Setting, DIGSI is Set to the Secondary Edit Mode.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The setting is seen in the example of the
3-phase voltage/current function.
The following output data are assumed:
Voltage transformer: 400 kV/100 V
Threshold value dM/dt falling: 20 V
The following figure shows the setting of the trigger function Trig. V Fund. in the secondary view. The
threshold value of the stage is set to 20 V.
[sc7kemod-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-37 Trigger Setting, Display of the Active Setting Sheet
When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching over
to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.
[sc7keger-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-38 Switchover to the Desired Setting View

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
The following figures show the setting sequence in the Primary edit mode. Set the transformer data in the
Power-system data in the Measuring point V 3ph tab. In the example, the current transformer has a transfor-
mation ratio of 400 kV/100 V.
[scwanspa-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-39 Setting Sheet: Transformer data
You set the rated current and rated voltage in the 3-phase voltage/current function group, in the General func-
tion block (see the following figure). Rated current and rated voltage are the reference parameters for the
percent setting.
[sc7kepro-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-40 Reference Data for Percentage Settings
The following figures shows the threshold value of the trigger function V fund. in the primary view with a
filtering time of 80 kV.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scugrpri-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-41 Example for the Threshold Value of the Voltage Trigger Tripping Stage (Edit Mode: Primary)
The following value results when switching to the percentage view:

80 kV/400 kV x 100 % = 20 %
[scugrpr0-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-42 Example for the Threshold Value of the Voltage Trigger Tripping Stage (Edit Mode: Percent)
When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value:
80 kV/(400 kV/100 V) = 20 V

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scugrsek-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-43 Example for the Threshold Value of the Voltage Trigger Tripping Stage (Edit Mode: Secon-
dary)
Threshold-Value Setting in an Example of the Current Transformer

If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during
the project phase.
In the example the following parameters are set according to the current transformer ratio of 1000 A/1 A . The
parameter dM/dt drop (/Filter time) has a setting value of 0.300 A (see the following image).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[sc5amper-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-44 Secondary Values at a Transformer Rated Current of 1 A
Change the secondary rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data
from 1 A to 5 A in the Power-system data in the Measuring point I-3ph (Edit mode: Secondary).
[scabfrag-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-45 Switchover to the Desired Setting View
If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that will ask you for the
action desired.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scabf7ke-130912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-46 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)
If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the filtering time (threshold values) in the
active secondary view. For the new secondary transformer current 5 A, the new secondary threshold value
obtained is 1.50 A (0.300 A x· 5 A = 1.50 A ). The primary and percent values remain unchanged.
The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[sc1amper-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-47 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Current Transformer Data
If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then you answer the question with No. In this case all the settings in the secon-
dary view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary view. In the
example, the primary filtering time is then 300 A (1.5 A 1000 A/5 A = 300 A).
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. The following table
summarizes the pickup values that DIGSI 5 will recalculate in the setting view. The new values (in bold)
depend on your answer of the query (see Figure 3-46).
Reply to the Question
Yes No
Threshold value, secondary (active setting view) 1.5 A 0.30 A
Threshold value, primary (covered setting view) 300 A 60 A
3.7.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device
The secondary value is the default setting for the device. You may directly set only secondary values on the
device.
If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI (see
Figure 3-46). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.
NOTE
i If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, you change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and not
directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850 configura-
tion of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
4 Applications
4.1 Overview 100

4.2 Application Template and Functional Scope for the Fault Recorder 101

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Applications
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
The function library in DIGSI 5 provides application templates for the applications of the fault recorders. The
application template
• Contains the basic configuration for a specific use case
• Contains functions and default settings for a specific use case
Chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope describes am example for the structure of
an application template.
When using an application template, please note the following:
• Adapt the signal routings by adding and removing routings to specific recorders.
• Adapt the application template to your specific use (check/adapt default settings, delete/add functions).
You can find more detailed information in the 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional
Scope.
• Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.
• Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Applications
4.2 Application Template and Functional Scope for the Fault Recorder
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of the fault recorder. The application
template contains the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Template 1 Fault Recorder N1: 1/3, 11 BIs, 9 BOs, 4I, 4V
Template 4 Fault Recorder N2: 1/3, 11 BIs, 3 BOs, 8V
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates for the fault recorders:
Table 4-1 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for the Fault Recorder
Function Default Setting in the Application Template

Function Points
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Hardware quantity structure expandable (I/O) – 1 1 1 1
FG Voltage (FG V) – 0 0 0 2
FG Voltage/Current (FG VI) – 1 2 5 0
FG ComModule – 1 1 1 1
FG Recording – 1 1 1 1
FG Simulation – 1 1 1 1
FG Analog units – 0 0 0 0
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 40 0 0 0 0
Power-system data (power system) – 1 1 1 1
Fast-scan recorder – 1 1 1 1
Slow-scan recorder* 40 1 1 1 1
Continuous recorder* 25 1 1 1 1
Trend recorder* 25 0 0 0 0
Measured values, extended: Min, max, – 0 0 0 0
average
Voltage trigger – 1 2 5 2
Current trigger – 1 2 5 0
Frequency trigger – 1 2 5 2
Power trigger – 1 2 5 0
Recorder routing VI – 1 2 5 0
Recorder routing V – 0 0 0 2
PQ 10/12cyc 25 0 0 0 0
PQ trend 25 0 0 0 0
PQ flicker 25 0 0 0 0
Measuring inputs,1-phase voltage – 0 0 0 0
Measuring inputs, 3-phase voltage – 1 2 5 2
Measuring inputs, 1-phase current – 0 0 0 0
Measuring inputs, 3-phase current – 1 2 5 0

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Applications
Function Default Setting in the Application Template
Function Points
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Binary input – 1 1 1 1
Binary output – 1 1 1 1
Communication channel – 1 1 1 1
Process monitor1 – 1 1 1 1
Function key – 1 1 1 1
GOOSE input – 0 0 0 0
LED, multicolor – 1 1 1 1
Measuring Transducers – 0 0 0 0
CFC standard – 0 0 0 0
CFC arithmetic 40 0 0 0 0
CFC logic – 1 1 1 1
CFC timer – 0 0 0 0
CFC switching sequences – 0 0 0 0
The following table shows the maximum quantity structure of the fault recorder.
Table 4-2 Maximum Possible Quantity Structures
Function Significant Feature

8 Channels
16 Channels
24 Channels
32 Channels
40 Channels
Hardware quantity structure expandable 1 1 1 1 1
(I/O)
FG Voltage (FG V) 2 4 6 8 10
FG Voltage/Current (FG VI) 2 4 6 8 10
FG ComModule 5 5 5 5 5
FG Recording 1 1 1 1 1
FG Simulation 1 1 1 1 1
FG Analog units 1 1 1 1 1
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 2 2 2 2 2
Power-system data (power system) 1 1 1 1 1
Fast-scan recorder 1 1 1 1 1
Slow-scan recorder 2 2 2 2 2
Continuous recorder 5 5 5 5 5
Trend recorder 2 2 2 2 2
Measured values, extended: Min, max, 9 9 9 9 9
average
Voltage trigger 2 4 6 8 10
Current trigger 2 4 6 8 10
Frequency trigger 2 4 6 8 10
Power trigger 1 2 5 7 9
1 The process monitor provides background information such as current-flow criterion and closure detection. The user can neither set
parameters for, nor delete, this function.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Applications
Function Significant Feature
8 Channels
16 Channels
24 Channels
32 Channels
40 Channels
Recorder routing VI 2 4 6 8 10
Recorder routing V 2 4 6 8 10
PQ 10/12cyc 2 4 6 8 10
PQ trend 2 4 6 8 10
PQ flicker 2 4 6 8 10
Measuring inputs,1-phase voltage 2 4 6 8 10
Measuring inputs, 3-phase voltage 2 4 6 8 10
Measuring inputs, 1-phase current 2 4 6 8 10
Measuring inputs, 3-phase current 2 4 6 8 10
Binary input 1 1 1 1 1
Binary output 1 1 1 1 1
Communication channel 9 9 9 9 9
Process monitor 9 9 9 9 9
Function key 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSE input 1 1 1 1 1
LED, multicolor 1 1 1 1 1
Measuring transducers 5 5 5 5 5
Measuring transducers, fast 5 3 5 5 5
CFC standard 1 1 1 1 1
CFC arithmetic 1 1 1 1 1
CFC logic 1 1 1 1 1
CFC timer 1 1 1 1 1
CFC switching sequences 1 1 1 1 1
NOTE
i A maximum of 40 sampled-value channels (SAV) are supported in the 7KE85 fault recorder, depending on
the significant feature selected. If you configure more than 40 channels, the message The number of
configured sampled-value channels (SAV) exceeds the maximum allowed appears in DIGSI 5.
If more than 40 sampled-value channels (SAV) are physically present in the device (for example, 6x
IO202), the device enters Fallback mode even if only 40 or fewer channels are configured.
A description of the function-point principle is provided in chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/
Functional Scope .
The following tables show the default settings of the signals in the application templates for the fast-scan and
slow-scan recorders:
Table 4-3 Default Settings of the User-Defined Signals in the Fast-Scan Recorder
Signal Routed in the Tab Routed as

UserSPS Binary input 1 H (active without voltage)
>Manual start Function key 1 P (trigger pulse)
Recording started LED 1 U (unbuffered)
Record made LED 2 U (unbuffered)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Applications
Table 4-4 Default Settings of the User-Defined Signals in the Slow-Scan Recorder
Signal Routed in the Tab Routed as

UserSPS Binary input 1 H (active without voltage)
>Manual start Function key 2 P (trigger pulse)
Recording started LED 3 U (unbuffered)
Record made LED 4 U (unbuffered)
The change to the function key names is described in chapter 7.3.3.1 Manual Trigger Start .

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
5 Power-System Data
5.1 Overview 106

5.2 Structure of the Power-System Data 107
5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings 108
5.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph) 109
5.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph) 113
5.6 Settings 116
5.7 Information List 123

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.1 Overview
5.1 Overview
The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You will find
them in DIGSI under Settings → Power-system data.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.2 Structure of the Power-System Data
5.2 Structure of the Power-System Data

The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following
figure shows the structure of the Power-system data:
[dwpow7ke-130213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-1 Structure of the Power-System Data
In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the Power-system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.
Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application. Possible measuring points are:
• Voltage 3-phase (measuring point V 3-ph)
• Current 3-phase (measuring point I 3-ph)
The measuring points have interfaces to the following function groups:
• VI 3-phase
• V 3-phase
• Phasor Measurement Unit

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings
5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings

Parameter: Phase sequence
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Phase sequence= ABC

The parameter Phase sequence is used to set the phase sequence (ABC) or (ACB). The setting value
applies to the entire SIPROTEC 5 device.
Use the General function to set the settings in the power-system data.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph)
5.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Voltage 3-Phase

(V-3ph)
The following example describes the settings of the voltage measuring point Measuring point V-3ph (voltage
3-phase). Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. The descrip-
tion of these settings can be found in chapter Supervision Functions .
Parameter: Rated primary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:101) Rated primary voltage = 400 kV

The Rated primary voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
If you change configuration of the setting Rated primary voltage, for example, from 400 kV to 300 kV
using the operation panel, restart the device to ensure that the change of the voltage transformer ratios was
accepted.
Parameter: Rated secondary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V

The Rated secondary voltage parameter is used to set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage
transformer.
Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN
• Default setting (_:8911:103) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73

With this parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measurement input. The different trans-
mission ratio of the voltage transformers is the cause for the deviation (see Figure 5-2).
The Matching ratio Vph / VN is equal to the ratio 3 V0 sec/VN sec
with
V0 sec Calculated zero-sequence voltage
VN sec Measured residual voltage
The zero voltage is calculated as phase-to-ground voltages. The residual voltage is measured on the open
delta winding of the voltage transformer. For single-phase voltage transformers, the residual voltage is meas-
ured in the generator or the transformer neutral point.
NOTE
i The measurement residual voltage VN sec is converted to a zero-sequence voltage in the device as follows:

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
EXAMPLE 1:
[dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-2 3-Phase Voltage Transformer: Connection = 3-Phase-to-Ground Voltage + VN
If the connection type of the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT connec-
tion) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the open delta winding of the voltage transformer (da/dn), the
Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows:
When changing the neutral point according to Figure 5-2 , this results in the following values:
• The calculated secondary zero-sequence voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase-to-ground
voltage. Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage, then Vrated sec/√3.
• The measured residual voltage on the open delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the 3 sides.
Expressed with the side ratio, the result is VN, sec = 3 Vrated,sec /3.
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:
[fo_bsp1, 1, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73.
In example 1 Vrated sec, the phase-to-ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the open delta winding
were identical. If these voltages are different, use the actual numerical values in the calculation.
EXAMPLE 2:
Phase-to-ground voltage Vrated sec = 100 V

Open delta winding (for Vrated sec = 500 V
example, grounding trans- The voltage input of the device is designed for a continuous operation,
former in generator protection) using 230 V max. Therefore, the voltage on the open delta winding (500 V)
is reduced to a 5:2 ratio, using an Ohmic divider. In order to calculate the
matching factor, the secondary voltage of 200 V will be applied.
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
[fo_bsp2, 1, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 0.866.

Interpretation of the result:
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltage is 57.73 V (= 100V/√3). The meas-
ured residual voltage is 200 V. The calculated adaptation factor is 0.866. The measured residual voltage is
converted to a zero-sequence voltage inside the device:
[fo_umrechnung2, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i During the ground-fault test, the set adaptation factor can be checked by comparing the operational meas-
ured values. The operational measured values contain the calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 sec and the
measured residual voltage VN sec. Proceed with the compilation as follows:
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is significant for the following functions of the device.
• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• Measured-value supervision
• Scaling of the faulty and measured values
Parameter: VT connection
• Default setting (_:8911:104) VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN

The parameter VT connection shows the connection type of the voltage transformer for the 3-phase
voltage measuring point. The parameter can be found in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Name of the device
→ Parameter → Power-system data → Measuring point V 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of
the voltage transformer in the Power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the voltage transformer only under measuring point routing in
DIGSI 5. Under Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Voltage measuring points, select the desired
connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
• 2 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in chapter A.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers . The connection examples provide assistance when
selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: Inverted phases
• Default setting (_:8911:106) Inverted phases = none

The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-reservoir
plants (see chapter Phase-rotation reversal). This default setting may be retained for power-system protection
applications.
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:8911:111) Tracking = active

The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point
shall be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage metering
channel. This validity of the signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to this channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
Parameter Value Description
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point will
be included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the 3-
phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the determined
sampling frequency is applicable to all functions in the device that do not use
fixed sampling rates.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for determining
the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive .
Parameter: Magnitude correction
• Default setting (_:3811:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000

When using the Magnitude correction parameter, the magnitude (magnitude correction) is adjusted for
the voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selec-
tively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison meas-
urement to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a
primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)
5.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3-Phase
(I-3ph)
The following example describes the settings for the current Measuring point I 3-ph (Current 3-phase). The
supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point. The description of these settings
can be found in chapter Supervision Functions.
Parameter: CT connection
• Default setting (_:8881:115) CT connection = 3-phase + IN-separate

The parameter CT connection shows the connection type of the current transformer for the 3-phase
current measuring point. The parameter can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Settings → Power-system data → Measuring point I 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of the
current transformer in the Power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the current transformer only under measuring point routing in
DIGSI 5. Under Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Current measuring points, select the desired
connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
• 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep

Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
current measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for current transformers in chapter A.
4 Connection Examples for Current Transformers . The connection examples provide assistance when
selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:8881:127) Tracking = active

With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point will
be included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the 3-
phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active , the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling rates.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for determining
the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive.
Parameter: Rated primary current
• Default setting (_:8881:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A

With the Rated primary current parameter, the active rated primary current of the current transformer is
set.
If you change configuration of the setting Rated primary current, for example, from 1000 A to 500 A
using the operation panel, restart the device to ensure that the change of the current transformer ratios was
accepted.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
Parameter: Rated secondary current
• Default setting (_:8881:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A

With the Rated secondary current parameter, you set the current rated secondary current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Current range
• Default setting (_:8881:117) Current range = 100 x IR

The Current range parameter allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input. Please retain the
default setting for power-system protection applications. The current measuring range 1.6 x Irated applies for
the connection type 3-phase + IN-separate and the sensitive current input or for the measuring inputs.
Parameter: Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj
• Default setting (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj = yes

The Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter is used to set the direction of the neutral point of the
current transformer (see following figure). Often, the neutral point of the current transformer is determined by
the direction of the protected object (for example, in the direction of the line, cable, transformer). For this
reason, the default setting of the parameter was defined as yes.
When switching the parameter, the direction of the phase currents and of the ground current IN or IN-sepa-
rate is rotated device-internally.
[dwpolstromwdl-251013, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-3 Polarity of Current Transformers
Parameter: Inverted phases
• Default setting (_:8881:114) Inverted phases = none

The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-reservoir plants
(see Chapter Phase-rotation reversal). This default setting may be retained for power-system protection appli-
cations.
Parameter: Magnitude correction
• Default setting (_:3841:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000

When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you adjust the amplitude (amplitude correction) for
the current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selec-
tively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison meas-

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
urement to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a
primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.6 Settings
5.6 Settings
General

General
_:2311:101 General:Phase • ABC ABC
sequence • ACB
Measuring Point I-1ph

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 1.0 A to 100000.0 A 1000.0 A
current
_:2311:102 General:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current • 5A
_:2311:103 General:Current range • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
• 8 x IR
• 20 x IR
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
_:2311:104 General:Internal CT type • CT protection CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:2311:116 General:Term. 1,3,5,7 in • no yes
dir. of obj. • yes
_:2311:105 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to100 0
ID
CT 1
_:3841:103 CT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix

General
_:8881:115 CT 3-phase:CT connec- • not assigned 3-phase + IN
tion • 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
_:8881:127 CT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8881:130 CT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.6 Settings

CT phases
_:8881:101 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:102 CT 3-phase:Rated • 1A 1A
secondary current • 5A
_:8881:117 CT 3-phase:Current • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range • 8 x IR
• 20 x IR
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
_:8881:118 CT 3-phase:Internal CT • CT protection CT protection
type • CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:8881:116 CT 3-phase:Neutr.point • no yes
in dir.of ref.obj • yes
_:8881:114 CT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases • AC
• BC
• AB
_:8881:107 CT 3-phase:CT error 1.00 to 10.00 1.00
changeover
_:8881:108 CT 3-phase:CT error A 0.5 % to 50.0 % 5.0 %
_:8881:109 CT 3-phase:CT error B 0.5 % to 50.0 % 15.0 %
CT IN
primary current
_:8881:105 CT 3-phase:Rated • 1A 1A
secondary current • 5A
_:8881:119 CT 3-phase:Current • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range • 8 x IR
• 20 x IR
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
• CT Process bus
CT IN2
primary current
_:8881:113 CT 3-phase:Rated 1 A to 5 A 1A
secondary current
_:8881:121 CT 3-phase:Current • 1.6 x IR 1.6 x IR
range • 8 x IR
• 20 x IR
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
• CT Process bus
CT 1
tion

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.6 Settings

_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
CT 2
tion
_:3842:117 CT 2:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
CT 3
tion
_:3843:117 CT 3:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
CT 4
tion
_:3844:117 CT 4:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5581:101 Brk.wire det.:Mode of • blocking blocking
blocking • auto blocking
• not blocking
_:5581:102 Brk.wire det.:Delta value 0.004 to 5.000 1.000
for autoblock
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2491:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.6 Settings

_:2491:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:2491:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2551:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv. sum I
_:2431:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2431:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2431:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:2431:6 Supv. sum I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:1 Supv.ADC sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
Measuring Point V-1ph

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
_:2311:102 General:Rated secon- 80 V to 340 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:2311:103 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
_:2311:108 General:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
VT 1
_:3811:103 VT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.6 Settings

_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
• VN broken-delta
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time

General
_:8911:101 VT 3-phase:Rated 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
primary voltage
_:8911:102 VT 3-phase:Rated 80 V to 340 V 100 V
secondary voltage
_:8911:103 VT 3-phase:Matching 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
ratio Vph / VN
_:8911:104 VT 3-phase:VT connec- • not assigned 3 ph-to-gnd volt.
tion • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN + VN
_:8911:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases • AC
• BC
• AB
_:8911:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8911:130 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
VT 1
tion
_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 2
tion

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.6 Settings

_:3812:108 VT 2:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 3
tion
_:3813:108 VT 3:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 4
tion
_:3814:108 VT 4:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2521:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:2521:102 Supv. balan. 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
V:Threshold min/max
_:2521:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2581:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv. sum V
_:2461:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.6 Settings

_:2461:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 25.000 V
_:2461:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data
5.7 Information List

General

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:2311:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:2311:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:2311:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:2311:322 General:f sys MV O
_:2311:323 General:f track MV O

(Type)
CT 1
_:3841:300 CT 1:Sampled val. current SAV O

(Type)
General
_:8881:319 CT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8881:320 CT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8881:321 CT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
CT 1
CT 2
CT 3
CT 4
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:5581:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:5581:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:5581:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:5581:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:5581:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:5581:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:5581:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data

(Type)
_:5581:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:2491:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:2491:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:2491:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:2491:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:2551:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:2551:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:2551:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:2551:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum I
_:2431:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2431:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2431:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2431:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:2431:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:82 Supv.ADC sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2401:54 Supv.ADC sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2401:52 Supv.ADC sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2401:53 Supv.ADC sum I:Health ENS O
_:2401:71 Supv.ADC sum I:Failure SPS O

(Type)
VT 1
_:3811:300 VT 1:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I

(Type)
General
_:8911:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8911:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8911:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
VT 1
VT 2

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Power-System Data

(Type)
VT 3
VT 4
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:2521:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:2521:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:2521:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:2521:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:2581:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:2581:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:2581:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:2581:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum V
_:2461:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:2461:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:2461:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:2461:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:2461:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6 Function-Group Types
6.1 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase 128

6.2 Function-Group Type Voltage-Current 3-Phase 132
6.3 Function-Group Type Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 139
6.4 Function-Group Type Analog Units 156

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Function-Group Types
6.1 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
6.1.1 Overview
The function group Voltage 3-phase determines the operational measured values of the connected voltage
channels.
The General function block and the Voltage trigger, Frequency trigger, and Recorder routing V functions
operate in the Voltage 3-phase function group. These functions use a 3-phase voltage measuring point as the
input.
The following function block operates in the function Frequency trigger (also see chapter 7.4.3.2 Structure of
the Function ):
• Frq. Trigger
The following function blocks operate in the function Voltage trigger (also see chapter 7.4.1.2 Structure of the
Function ):
• V base, Trig
• V RMS Trig
• V0 Trigger
• V1 Trigger
• V2 Trigger
The following function blocks work in the Recorder routing V function:
• PQ 10/12cyc fV
• PQ trend fV
• PQ flicker
• Routing f
• Routing V
The recorder routings enable the routing of the individual measured values to the various recorders.
6.1.2 Structure of the Function Group
The function group Voltage 3-phase always contains the function block General that cannot be deleted.
You can load the trigger functions required for your application in the function group. These trigger functions
are available from the function library in DIGSI 5.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage 3-phase:

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[dwfgspan-240812-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-1 Structure of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
The recorder routings enable the routing of the individual measured values to the various recorders. The
following figure shows the structure of the Recorder routing V function group.
[dwrecrou-060912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-2 Structure/Embedding of the Recorder Routing V Function
More information on the Recorder routing V function is found in the chapters 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Param-
eters and Routing in DIGSI 5 and 7.5.1.2 Using Measurands .
Interface with Measuring Points

The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 3-ph interface. Depending on the
type of transformer connections, these are, for example, VA, VB, VC, Vgnd. All values that can be calculated
from the measurands are also provided via this interface.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scfgucon-230812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-3 Assigning Measuring Points
If you add functions to the Voltage 3-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring point auto-
matically.
You connect the Voltage 3-phase function group to the voltage measuring points via the interface to the
measuring points. This assignment can only be made in DIGSI 5 via Project tree → Function group connec-
tions.
To connect the interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the desired row and column in the matrix
(refer to Figure 6-3).
Operational Measured Values

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage 3-phase function group and cannot be
deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage 3-phase function group:
Table 6-1 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/√3
voltage
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:9421:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary rated voltage. The Rated voltage set here is
the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
6.1.4 Settings

Rated values
_:9421:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
General
_:9421:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:9421:53 General:Health ENS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
RDT
_:4741:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:4741:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.2 Function-Group Type Voltage-Current 3-Phase
6.2.1 Overview
The Voltage-current 3-phase function group determines the operational measured values from the connected
current and voltage channels.
The current, power, voltage and frequency triggers operate in the function group Voltage-current 3-phase.
These trigger functions use one 3-phase current and voltage measuring point as the input.
The following function blocks operate in the function Current trigger (also see chapter 7.4.2.2 Structure of the
Function ):
• I fund. Trig
• I RMS Trig
• I0 Trigger
• I1 Trigger
• I2 Trigger
The following function block operates in the function Frequency trigger (also see chapter 7.4.3.2 Structure of
the Function ):
• Frq. Trigger
The following function blocks operate in the function Power trigger (also see chapter 7.4.4.2 Structure of the
Function ):
• P Sum Trig
• Q Sum Trig
• S Sum Trig
The following function blocks operate in the function Voltage trigger (also see chapter 7.4.1.2 Structure of the
Function ):
• V Fund. Trig
• V RMS Trig
• V0 Trigger
• V1 Trigger
• V2 Trigger
The following function blocks work in the Recorder routing VI function:
• PQ 10/12cyc fV
• PQ trend fV
• PQ flicker
• Routing f
• Routing I
• Routing power
• Routing V
NOTE
i The Voltage-current 3-phase function group also works without an assigned current measuring point. In
this case the current, frequency and power functions (measured value, trigger and recorder routing func-
tions) are not available.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, please refer to chapter 2.1 Function
Embedding in the Device .
The entire function scope of the application templates can be found in chapter 4.2 Application Template and
Functional Scope for the Fault Recorder .
The function group Voltage-current 3-phase always contains the function block General that cannot be
deleted.
You can load the trigger functions required for your application in the function group. These trigger functions
are available from the Global DIGSI 5 library. Trigger functions that are not needed can be deleted again from
the function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage-current 3-phase:
[dwfgspst-240812-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-4 Structure of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
The function group has interfaces to the voltage and current measuring points.
The recorder routings enable the routing of the individual measured values to the various recorders. The
following figure shows the structure of the Recorder routing VI function group.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[dwroutui-060912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-5 Structure/Embedding of the Recorder Routing VI Function
More information on the Recorder routing VI function is found in the chapters 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Param-
eters and Routing in DIGSI 5 and 7.5.1.2 Using Measurands .
Interface with Measuring Points

The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points. If you
are using an application template, the function group is already connected to the necessary measuring points.
If you add functions to the function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the
respective voltage or current measuring points. If you add functions to the function group but the measuring
point necessary for this is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the Function group connections editor. You can find more
detailed information in chapter 7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device .
The function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase voltage
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. There are various
types of transformer connections possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are
also provided via this interface. The function group must always be linked to the V-3ph measuring point.
If you want to test or change the connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point,
double-click in the DIGSI 5 project tree → (Name of the device) on Measuring point routing (Connection
type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage.
• 3-phase current (optional)

The measurands from the 3-phase power system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are, for example, IA, IB, IC, IN or 3I0. All values that can be
calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The function group must always be
connected to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current interface to a maximum of four 3-phase current measuring points.
If 2 current measuring points have been connected with the 3-phase current interface, the total current is
also determined from measured values from both measuring points in the function group. All functions in
the function group have access to these values.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scmeaspon-020215-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-6 Assigning Measuring Points
NOTE
i The current measuring points are optional within the Voltage-current 3-phase function group. If you do not
interconnect the current and power values, the current measuring points are not available.
[scfguive-130912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-7 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
Equipment Data
The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the object or the equipment are
defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Resetting the LED Group

Using the Reset the LED group function, you can reset the stored LEDs of the functions in one specific func-
tion group while the activated, stored LEDs of other functions in other function groups remain activated.
Operational Measured Values

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and
cannot be removed.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
Table 6-2 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary values
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/√3
voltage
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary values
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary values
λ Power factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to λ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW W Active power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the phase
The operational measured values are explained in more detail in chapter 9.3 Operational Measured Values .
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:9451:101) Rated current = 1000 A

The Rated current parameter is used to set the primary rated current. The Rated current specified
here is the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:9451:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV

The Rated voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage. The Rated voltage set here is
the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
Parameter: Rated apparent power
• Default setting (_:91:103) Rated apparent power = 692.82 MVA

The parameter Rated apparent power is calculated depending on other parameters and cannot be
directly changed.
Parameter: Power-sys. neutral point
• Default setting (_:9451:149) Power-sys. neutral point = grounded

With the Power-sys. neutral point setting, you specify whether the system neutral is grounded ,
isolated , or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil). Currently, the param-
eter does not affect any protection function; only if the Automatic reclosing function uses the voltage meas-
urement.
6.2.4 Settings

Rated values
_:9451:101 General:Rated current 1 A to 100000 A 1000 A
_:9451:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Power-system data
_:9451:149 General:Power-sys. neutral • grounded grounded
point • suppress. coil grounded
• isolated
_:9451:210 General:MI3ph1 uses- 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
MeasP with ID
MeasP with ID
MeasP with ID
_:9451:214 General:M I-1ph uses 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
_:9451:126 General:Number of 0 to 11 0
Meas.point. 3ph
_:9451:127 General:Number of 0 to 11 0
Meas.point. 1ph
Measurements
_:9451:158 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Reset LED Group
_:7381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:7381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O
Closure detec.
_:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.3 Function-Group Type Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) measures the phasor values of current and voltage. These values get a
high precision time stamp and together with the values of power frequency, power frequency change rate and
optional binary data that are also time stamped are transmitted to a central analysis station. The standardized
transmission protocol IEEEC 37.118 is used to do this.
The PMU function group is activated by selecting the protocol IEEE C37.118PMU on an Ethernet module
(electrical or optical). The PMU obtains the measured values from the measuring points and the precise time
from time synchronization. The time-stamped synchrophasors for current and voltage are formed from this
and transferred together with additional values via the communication module to a server (PDC, Phasor Data
Concentrator).
[dwstrpmu-250613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-8 Structure/Embedding of the Function
The synchrophasors, sent from the PMU in a continuous data stream to a PDC, are provided with time
stamps and thus are comparable with the measured values of other PMUs. The power frequency, the power
frequency change rate and optional binary information are also transmitted as time-stamped measured
values. Therefore, you receive an overview of the transient processes in a distributed energy transfer system,
for example network fluctuations and compensating processes.
The following table shows the differences between the PMU measured values and the remaining measured
values of the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Table 6-3 Comparison of Synchrophasors and Conventional Measured Values
Synchrophasors of the PMU Measured Values from the Measuring Points

Continuous updating (measured value of current) Slow updating (typically every 5 seconds)
with, for example, 10 values per second (reporting
rate)
Every measured value has a time stamp No time stamp for the measured values
Phasor values of current and voltage (amplitude and RMS values without phase angle
phase angle)
The following figure shows the structure of such a Wide Area Monitoring System. The data delivered from the
PMUs on the PDC are transmitted via the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol (ICCP) according to
DIN EN 60870-6 to the network control center.
[dwstrwam-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-9 Structure of a Wide-Area Monitoring System with Phasor-Measurement Units
The phasor-measurement units each have 2 communication interfaces: an Ethernet module for synchro-
phasor communication via IEEE C37.118 and another module for communication with the substation automa-
tion technology, for example, through the IEC 61850 protocol.
The central evaluation system, e.g. SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor, receives the data, files, archives
them and graphically displays them on a User Interface. In this system, a self-checking function may also be
performed, for example, on undamped power swings. The further distribution of information to other PDCs or
to a control station is done here.
To maintain the required maximum errors (TVE) required in the standard IEEE C37.118, the time tolerance
relative to the UTC time reference (UTC = Universal Time Coordinated) may be maximum 10 μs. Therefore,
the device must be directly synchronized with a GPS precise time signal for the correct function of the PMU.
Phasors
A phasor u(t) = Uejωt can be displayed as a phasor that moves counterclockwise in the complex plane at the
angular frequency ω. Therefore, the voltage function u(t) = Re{u(t)} is obtained as a projection of the phasor
u(t) on the real axis.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[dwgeopdc-061011-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-10 Geometric Representation of a Phasor
Reference Point for Determining the Angle

The phase angle of a measuring signal Xm is determined relative to a cosine function having a rated
frequency, which is synchronized with the UTC time reference (see Figure 6-11).
[dwutcphi-260112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-11 Determination of Phase Angle ρ of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
The number of phasors that are transmitted per second is configurable. The transmission rate is defined
according to IEEE C37.118 as the reporting rate. The reporting rate defines the number of phasors that are
transmitted per second. Extremely precise time synchronization is essential so that phasor measurement can
be carried out to enable phasors from different sites to be compared.
Reporting Rate
You use the configurable reporting rate (parameter (_:10621:102) Reporting rate) to specify the
number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to the PDC per second. It is adjustable, depending on the
rated frequency, and applies to all currents and voltages of the relevant PMU function group. If several PMU
function groups are created on the device, these can work with different reporting rates.
Total Vector Error (TVE)

The TVE describes the error between the actual and the measured values of the input signal. The Synchro-
phasor Standard IEEE 37.118 defines upper limiting values of 120 % VN and 200 % IN, among other things.
Up to these limiting values, the TVE of 1 % must not be exceeded for stationary signals. The standard defines
the 2 performance classes, Class P and Class M, as ranges within which influencing variables are acceptable
and the TVE of ≤1 % must be maintained. The SIPROTEC 5 devices support Class P and Class M, which
specify the following influencing variables for a TVE of 1 %:
• Signal frequency (relative to fN)
• Signal magnitude (relative to 100 % nominal magnitude) for voltage and current
• Phase angle (relative to 0°)
• Harmonic distortions (relative to < 0.2 % (THD) up to the 50th harmonic

The following figure graphically represents the total vector error. As well as the amplitude, the TVE also
enters into the angle error.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[dwklatve-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-12 Representation of the Total Vector Error
The TVE is defined as follows:
[fo_utcphi-111011-01.tif, 1, --_--]
where:
• Xr(n) = Real part of measured signal
• Xi(n) = Imaginary part of measured signal
• Xr = Real part of input signal
• Xi = Imaginary part of input signal
Variables that influence the TVE are:

• Amplitude errors
• Phase errors
• Synchronization accuracy (deviation from the UTC)

Synchronization accuracy is affected by a GPS timer and the precise correction of the time delay within the
GPS receiver module, as well as by the optimal setup of the GPS antenna.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.3.4 Transmitted Data
The following data is transmitted from the PMU to the PDC:

• Current and voltage phasors
• Frequency
• Frequency rate of change
• Binary information
The current and voltage channels transferred from a PMU function group are selected through the Function
group connections editor in DIGSI 5. The frequency and frequency change rate are determined once per
PMU. In this case, only the current and voltage channels selected via the Function group connections editor
for this PMU are taken into consideration. You may route the binary information in the information routing
matrix of DIGSI 5.
The channel used for specifying the frequency is selected dynamically during the device runtime. Each
channel is checked for the presence of a signal in the following order:
1. 3-phase voltage measuring points
2. 1-phase voltage measuring points
3. 3-phase current measuring points
4. 1-phase current measuring points
The 1st measuring point found with a valid signal is used for specifying the frequency in the PMU function
group.
In the case of 3-phase measuring points, the positive-sequence system can also be transmitted instead of 3
individual sychrophasors. This setting can be made via the parameter (_:10621:103) Only positive
sequence.
6.3.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)
PMU communication according to standard IEEE C37.118 is a client-server communication format in which
the PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator) functions as both the client and the server.
Once the PDC has been successfully connected to the device PMU and the PMU configuration data has
been queried, the PDC initiates transmission of the synchrophasor data by sending a close command to the
PMU. In addition to the phasors, the channel names of the routed measuring points and the binary informa-
tion are transferred. Per default, these are automatically generated by the respective PMU function groups.
Where applicable, you can also edit the channel names of the measuring point and assign a designation of its
own for this purpose. For more information, see chapter 6.3.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI. The
names for the binary information carried out are however, generally automatically generated by the respective
PMU function group and cannot be edited.
As an example, the names (generated) for measuring points or binary information may be as follows:
Table 6-4 Possible Measuring-Point Names
Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point U-3ph 1[ID 1] MP-V3ph VAB ID01
MP-V3ph VBC ID01
MP-V3ph VCA ID01
MP-V3ph VA ID01
MP-V3ph VB ID01
MP-V3ph VC ID01
MP-V3ph V1 ID01

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point I-3ph 1[ID 2] MP-I3ph IA ID02
MP-I3ph IB ID02
MP-I3ph IC ID02
MP-I3ph I1 ID02
Measuring point I-1ph 1[ID 3] MP-I1ph ID03
Measuring point U-1ph 1[ID 4] MP-V1ph ID03
Table 6-5 Possible Binary Information Names
Path Displayed in DIGSI 5 Name Transferred to the PDC

(Can Be Edited) (Cannot be Edited)
PMU 1: BIN-01-INFO-6
Transf.bin.1:
>BinaryInfo.6
Transf.bin.2:
>BinaryInfo.8
Transf.bin.10:
>BinaryInfo.3
Data is transmitted continuously from the PMU to the PDC at the configured reporting rate. The transmission
is terminated by a corresponding switch-off command from the PDC or when the connection between the
PDC and the PMU is interrupted.
Communication between the PMU and the PDC can be passed via TCP or UDP protocols.
The following ports are used for data transmission:
• TCP: Port 4712
• UDP: Port 4713
The ports must be configured on the PDC.
Up to 3 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time. The IP addresses of the
maximum 3 PDCs are set in the PMU function group. If 4 device PMUs are configured, this enables support
for up to 12 PDCs.
6.3.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI
You configure and parameterize the Phasor-Measurement Unit with DIGSI. After a device has been added in
a DIGSI project, one or more communication modules that support synchrophasors can be configured as
PMUs. The device module supports a maximum of 2 communication modules that can be configured as
PMUs. If more than 2 PMUs are needed, the device must be expanded with a CB202 plug-in module
assembly (expansion module), which can accommodate 2 more communication modules.
The following communication modules support synchrophasors:
• ETH-BA-2EL (2 x Ethernet electric, RJ45)
• ETH-BB-2FO ( 2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)
These modules are then freely assignable to ports E, F, N or P of the device, see Figure 6-13. You can view
the selected port in the (_:10621:104) Port. This parameter is automatically managed by DIGSI and
cannot be changed.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[sccommod-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-13 Placement of Communication Modules
NOTE
i Port M of the CB202 plug-in module assembly is used to accommodate measuring-transducer modules
and cannot be used for the installation of communication modules.
Addressing
You must configure the respective Ethernet address (IP address, subnet mask, etc.) for each communication
module in DIGSI. This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module
in item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU.
[scethern-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-14 Ethernet Address Configuration
In the DIGSI properties dialog for channel 1, select the synchrophasor protocol, see the following figure.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scprotoc-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-15 Protocol Selection
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, an advanced settings
dialog for PMU-specific configuration opens, see the following figure.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scwildcard_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-16 PMU-Specific Configuration
You configure the specific settings for the communication protocol in the top section of this settings dialog. In
the bottom section, you specify the corresponding PMU-specific settings.
In order to permit a better configuration of larger wide-area supervision systems, changes have been imple-
mented in the IEEE C37.118 communication configuration that permit a flexible IP configuration without the
loss of safety aspects in the systems administrated.
Configurable placeholders are permitted for each PDC IP address. These placeholders allow you to define a
range of IP addresses where they are accepted within these accesses. The purpose of this is to permit each
individual device or system access within the respective system without limits with regard to their hierarchy
level. Therefore, with regard to security aspects, the limitation to individual IP addresses is eliminated. You
are thus allowed to configure complete sections of IP addresses in each PMU and, as a result, very flexible
when making changes to the configuration of the entire system, for example. The placeholder character must
follow consecutively at the bit level, starting with the bit with the lowest value.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE of Placeholder Characters:

Example 1:
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00101011 is not permitted
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00111111 is permitted

Example 2:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.1
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.127
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.1 to 192.172.16.127.
Example 3:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.100
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.3
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.100 to 192.172.16.103.
If a PDC attempts to establish a connection to the device, the PDC IP addresses and corresponding place-
holders are checked in the same order as they had been configured (IP address PDC1, IP address PDC2,
IP address PDC3). Running through the list is stopped with the first match of the IP address, placeholder and
requested IP address range and the connection is built-up. If there are no matches, the attempt to connect is
rejected.
If you have configured IP address 0.0.0.0 and the placeholder 255.255.255.255, every IP address received is
accepted as valid. This could be of use in the course of commissioning measures.
NOTE
i You must have configured at least 1 IP address in order to establish a connection between the device and
PDC.
Measuring-Point Assignment
After adding measuring points to the device, you can assign these measuring points to each configured PMU.
Figure 6-17 shows as an example expansion of the device configuration by 2 additional input/output modules.
You connect the current and voltage inputs of these I/O modules to measuring points via the DIGSI routing
matrix, see example in Figure 6-18.
[scaddios-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-17 Adding Additional Input/Output Modules

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scroutin-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-18 Assignment of the Current and Voltage Inputs of the Added Input/Output Modules on Meas-
uring Points
The maximum numbers of measuring points that can be routed for one PMU are:
• 2 x 3-phase voltage measuring points
• 2 x 3-phase current measuring points
• 2 x 1-phase voltage measuring points
• 2 x 1-phase current measuring points

You can assign all supported measuring points to any PMU, see the following figure. However, each PMU
must be connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point.
[scfgconn-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-19 Connecting Measuring Points to the Configured PMU Function Groups
When these setting steps have been completed, the PMUs are fully configured. The PMU is a function group
that functions independently of all the other function groups instantiated in the device.
The device load, however, is dependent on:
• Number of PMUs
• Performance class (where Class M generates the greater load)
• Number of assigned channels
• Configured reporting rate of each PMU
• Number of binary signals to be transferred
Changing the Channel Names of Phasors

You can edit the names of the individual phasor channels for voltage and current in DIGSI. The clearly struc-
tured channel designations assist with when testing and commissioning PMU systems. Furthermore, only the
names visible in the IEEE C37.118 interface can be changed. The function block designations themselves
cannot.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
The IEEE C37.118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names in the scope of the
SIPROTEC 5-PMU support. Due to the protocol, the designation length is limited to 16 ASCII characters per
channel. However, when renaming, you have to assign at least 1 character. The renaming of binary channels
is not supported in the current implementation.
You can start the renaming by setting the check mark at Own phasor names with the parameterization in
the PMU function block Functional settings. Once you have activated this check mark, define a separate
name for each phasor. For this purpose, DIGSI shows all routed measuring points on the PMU in the function
group connections (see following figure).
[scPMUnam_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-20 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Phasors
NOTE
i You can only rename each individual phasor when you set the parameter Positive-sequence system
only to No in the functional settings. Otherwise you will only be offered one single phasor for each 3-
phase measuring point for renaming.
Routing Binary Signals

You can connect binary inputs or CFC information with binary channels of the PMU via DIGSI information
routing. You will find, in the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) folder, the Binary information transmission func-
tion block in the DIGSI function library (see the following figure). You can instantiate this function block up to
10 times in one PMU function group. Each of these function blocks contains 8 options for routing binary chan-
nels.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scpmubif-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-21 Information Routing in DIGSI 5
Routing Indications
The routable indication ChannelLive of the PMU log
• raises when the PMU is connected to the PDC
• clears when the connection to the PDC is interrupted.
[scparami-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-22 Log Indication for Display of the PMU/PDC Connection
6.3.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device
You can also change the PMU settings directly on the device. To do this, select the desired PMU instance on
the device display. By selecting menu item Settings you then access the editable setting values (see
Figure 6-23). Note that the parameter Port cannot be changed, because this corresponds to the physical slot
position of the communication module in question.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scdevpmu-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-23 Changing the PMU Setting Values via the Device Display
You can also change the communication settings in the same way. To do this, select the corresponding
communication port in the Communication menu on the device display. From the Channel 1 menu item, you
can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings (see Figure 6-24).
[scdevcom-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-24 Changing the Communication Setting Values Via the Device Display

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Time Synchronization
In order to ensure the time accuracy of the PMU, you must select IRIG-B as protocol for the GPS clock, see
the following figure. With other settings, the PMU function function group indicates that it is not time synchron-
ized.
[sc_setting time source_2014-09-09, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-25 Setting Time Synchronization
To detect a lack of synchronization quickly, also set the waiting time for the failure indication of the loss of
time synchronization to the smallest possible value, thus to 1 s.
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:10621:1) Mode = on

Activate and deactivate the PMU or switch to Test mode via the parameter Mode. The possible setting values
are on, off and test. In Test mode, the PMU data is marked as invalid.
Parameter: Reporting rate
• Default setting (_:10621:102) Reporting rate = 10 frames/s

With the parameter Reporting rate, you specify the number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to
the PDC per second.
NOTE
i Different setting values are shown or hidden, depending on the rated frequency set.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Only positive sequence
• Default setting (_:10621:103) Only positive sequence = no

With the parameter Only positive sequence, you set whether the positive-sequence system is to be
transmitted instead of 3 individual synchrophasors in the case of 3-phase measuring points. The setting you
make here is then valid for all PMUs with 3-phase measuring points.
Parameter: Class
• Default setting (_:10621:101) Class = Class P

With the setting Class, you set which performance class is used for the calculation of the measured values.
Class P is the standard case for PMUs. In this case, filters are used that are suitable for a short response
time and therefore are well suited for recording dynamic processes. Class M is conceived for applications
that are unfavorably affected by alias effects and in which short response times are not relevant.
Parameter: Port
This parameter cannot be set because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding
communication module is inserted.
6.3.9 Settings

Func. settings
_:10621:1 Func. settings:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:10621:101 Func. settings:Class • Class P Class P
• Class M
_:10621:102 Func. settings:Reporting • 1 frame/s 10 frames/s
rate • 5 frames/s
• 6 frames/s
• 10 frames/s
• 12 frames/s
• 15 frames/s
• 20 frames/s
• 25 frames/s
• 30 frames/s
• 50 frames/s
• 60 frames/s
• 100 frames/s
• 120 frames/s
_:10621:103 Func. settings:Only positive • no no
sequence • yes

(Type)
General
_:10621:52 Func. settings:Behavior ENS O
_:10621:53 Func. settings:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.4 Function-Group Type Analog Units
6.4.1 Overview
The Analog units function group is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are
external devices, such as RTD units, or analog plug-in modules, such as measuring-transducer modules.
You will find the Analog units function group for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
[sc20maee-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-26 Analog Unit Function Group in DIGSI

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
If the device has a measuring transducer, it is automatically mapped in the Analog units function group. If one
or more RTD units are connected to the device, you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit
serial functions from the Global DIGSI library in order to map the RTD units.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group.
[dwstrthe-030615-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-27 Structure of the Analog Unit Function Group
The Analog units function group has interfaces to protection function groups. The Analog units function group
provides measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit. These measured temperature
values are available for all protection function groups in which a temperature monitoring function works.
The RTD unit Ether. function is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 20 function instances
can work simultaneously.
The RTD unit serial function is set up structurally exactly in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether. function.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.4.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet
6.4.3.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Ether.:
• Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process tags such as temperature or gas
pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit
6.4.3.2 Structure of the Function

The function 20-mA unit Ether. can work only in the function group Analog units. A maximum of 4 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured channel function blocks.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. contains input and output channels which can be configured independently of
one another.
[dwstrfn2-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.4.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Logic
[lo20mtcp-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-29 Logic of the Function 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Communication with 20-mA Unit

The function is used to communicate with a 20-mA unit connected via an Ethernet connection. When a
connection of the function to an external 20-mA unit via an Ethernet interface has successfully been estab-
lished, the 20-mA unit sends the measured values of all connected channels to the function 20-mA unit.
Ether.. For the connection to be established successfully, specific communication settings must be specified.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter 6.4.3.4 Application and Setting Notes.
The 20-mA measurement unit 7XV5674 is supported.
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
Table 6-6 Error Responses
Error Description Status Health

The function 20-mA unit Ether. cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. sends TCP settings to Alarm
the communication module, which evidently would
like to connect to the 20-mA unit via a serial protocol.
This communication module does not establish a
connection to the 20-mA unit.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the 20-mA unit causes a time-out indication.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the 20-mA unit for 9 sec.
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the channel function blocks reports a failure.
6.4.3.4 Application and Setting Notes
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

Use the Port setting to define the port connecting the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device.
Parameter: IP address
• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the IP address settings, you set the IP address of the 20-mA unit connected to the communication
module via the TCP protocol. You must assign each 20-mA unit an unambiguous IP address. The IP address
to be set depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause
conflicts with other IP addresses in the network. First set an IP address for the 7XV5674 20-mA unit . Then
specify the IP address settings for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the 20-mA Unit

The 7XV5674 20-mA unit is set with a web browser on the laptop computer via the latter's Ethernet interface.
Detailed notes on the settings can be found in the 7XV5674 manual that accompanies the 20-mA unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.siprotec.de).
6.4.3.5 20-mA Channel
Logic
[lo20mcha-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-30 Logic Diagram of the Function 20-mA Channel

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
(1) If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not
displayed.
(2) If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation
ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed.
Measured-Value Calculation
The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the corre-
sponding channel. The 20-mA current measured value is converted into the correct physical quantities such
as temperature or pressure. In each 20-mA functional unit (Ether. and serial) there are always 12 of the 20-
mA channel function blocks, even if fewer channels are connected with the 20-mA unit. The calculated values
are available for further processing via CFC, GOOSE, protocols, and the display image.
Measured-Value Processing
The 20-mA unit typically transmits a value which represents a physical quantity, such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the 20-
mA value. If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range 0 mA to 20 mA. If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the
20-mA unit, the measured value is identified as invalid. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes
from a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
[sckanumw-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-31 Settings for Example 1
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 °C and the measured value 20 mA
means a temperature of 100 °C. So enter as Unit = °C andConversion factor = 100. The resolution
(decimal place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolution = 0.1.
[dwknges3-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-32 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 1)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameters Upper limit and
Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting. The setting of the range for the scaled value corresponds to the useable
range between Lower limit and Upper limit (see following figure).
[sckanumf-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-33 Settings for Example 2
[dwknges2-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-34 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Unit (Example 2)
In this example, the Range active setting is selected. The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA, the setting
Lower limit is at 4 mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit -
Sensor is at -33. If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA, the quality of the scaled
measured value in this example is invalid.
Each 20-mA channel makes available the scaled measured value in the information routing (these are the
temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The 20-mA values can be displayed in the display page and processed with CFC charts.
Error Responses
If the current input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output value is set to
invalid That status for Health and the defect status assume the states displayed in the table.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Error Description Status Health Error Status

The input value lies outside the OK Yes
given limits
Channel not connected OK No
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = °C

You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of measurement the measured values represent. The
possible setting values are listed in the settings table.
Parameter: Conversion factor
• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

The Conversion factor setting allows you to set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Resolution
• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

The Resolution setting is used to specify the measured value resolution.
Parameter: Range active
• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range -24 mA to +24 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA.
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
• Default setting(_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20000 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting(_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4000 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper
limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of the
12 channels do not differ.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.4.3.7 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh
_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 10000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor
6.4.3.8 Information List

(Type)
General
_:2311:53 General:Health O
_:2311:56 General:Failure O
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw O
6.4.4 20-mA Unit Serial
6.4.4.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Serial:
• Provides serial communications with a 20-mA unit via the Modbus protocol and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or
gas pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit

The function 20-mA unit Serial is structured in the same way as the function 20-mA Unit Ether.. The mode of
operation is also identical. The only difference is that the measured values are transferred to the communica-
tion module via a serial connection instead of an Ethernet connection.
You can find more information in Chapter 6.4.3.2 Structure of the Function .
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = Port J

With the Port setting, you specify the slot for the communication module that will be used for the connection
with an external 20-mA unit.
Parameter: Channel number
• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number setting, you specify
the channel number (1 or 2) used to connect the 20-mA unit to the device. The communication module inputs
are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

Use theSlave address setting to define the device address of the 20-mA unit. If only one 20-mA unit is
connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. Set the same device address as used with the
20-mA unit. The device address is important for distinguishing several 20-mA units that are connected to a
serial bus. Set an unambiguous device address on every 20-mA unit, for example, 1, 2 and 3 when
connecting 3 of the 20-mA units. On every 20-mA unit, set for the Slave address setting in the 3 functions
20-mA Unit Serial the same device address for each.
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = °C

You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of measurement the measured values represent. The
possible setting values are listed in the settings table.
• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

The Conversion factor setting allows you to set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Resolution
• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

The Resolution setting is used to specify the measured value resolution.
• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range 0 mA to 20 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to 20
mA.
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
• Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper
limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of the
12 channels do not differ.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.4.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 247 1
Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 10000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor

(Type)
General
_:2311:56 General:Failure O
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw O
6.4.5 Communication with the 20-mA Unit
6.4.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 6-35 shows how to connect the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45
plug is connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.
[dwve20au-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-35 Connection of the 20-mA Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module
must be inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the
CB202 expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[sc20ser3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-36 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the 20-mA unit.
[scauser4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-37 Selecting the SUP Protocol
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the 20-mA unit. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the 20-mA unit. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The settings of the
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scauser5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-38 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA unit serial 1 (see following
figure).
[sc20ser6-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-39 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Serial 1
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the 20-
mA unit. This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
For the first use of the 20-mA unit, the following device configuration must be set on the 20-mA unit:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Baud rate: 9600
• Parity: no

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-40 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Device Address
Finally, load the configuration in the device.
6.4.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Device Configuration
In DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus, adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 6-41 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.
[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-41 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scautcp2-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-42 Activation of the protocol
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
[scautcp3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-43 Selection of the Protocol
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the 20-mA unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[sc20tcp4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-44 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Ether. 1
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit.
[scautcp5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-45 Setting the Port and IP Address
6.4.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs
6.4.6.1 Overview
The fast analog measuring-transducer inputs process voltage values (DC -10 V to +10 V) as well as current
values (DC -20 mA to 20 mA).
The function MT fast input:
• Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record (the maximum sampling frequency in 7KE85 is
16 kHz, and 8 kHz for all other SIPROTEC 5 devices). The recorded sampling frequency results from the
setting of the fault-recorder function.
• Calculated measured values from the sampled values. These measured values have been deduced
from the arithmetic mean values. The measuring range for the mean-value calculation is adjustable in
the interval from 10 ms to 100 ms.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
• Converts the measured current or voltage values into process values, for example, temperature, gas
pressure, etc.
• Provides the recorded process variables for further processing by the fault recorder, the CFC, and in
GOOSE-applications for transmission via communication protocols, and for visualization.
The fast measuring-transducer inputs are located on the IO212 module with 8 inputs (optionally current or
voltage inputs), and the IO210 module2 with 4 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs).

The function MT fast input works in the function group Analog units and contains the number of available
measuring-transducer inputs, depending on the hardware configuration. You can configure these channels
independently from one another either as current or voltage inputs.
[dw_mu-structure, 1, en_US]
6.4.6.3 Function Description

Once you have instantiated the MT fast input function, it will be visible in the project tree in the function group
Analog units. You can find the function group Analog units in DIGSI in the Settings folder.
If you open the subdirectory MT fast input, you reach the setting sheet for the respective input (for more
details, see Application and Setting Notes).
The hardware is designed in such a way that either a current or a voltage can be processed at each input.
Use the corresponding terminals (see Hardware manual). Configure the input in accordance with the selected
connection (Parameter (_:101) TD input-signal type). With the parameter (_:142) Measuring
window, you set the measuring range with which the arithmetic mean value is determined. With the param-
eter Measuring window, you also determine measurement speed for the input. For example, a setting of
100 ms means that the measured value is updated every 100 ms.
2 available from V7.10

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scmuio212, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-47 Parameters of the Measuring-Transducer Channels.
The fast measuring-transducer channels can be configured either as current or as voltage inputs. Apart from
this, their function corresponds to the basic function of the 20-mA-channels (see chapter 6.4.3.5 20-mA
Channel ).
Parameter: TD input-signal type
• Default setting (_:101) TD input-signal type = Current input

With the parameter TD input-signal type, you determine whether the measuring-transducer input
channel works as a Current input or as a Voltage input.
Make sure that the selected channel has also been wired correctly (see Hardware manual, Input and Output
Module IO212).
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:103) Unit = A

With the parameter Unit, you set the physical unit of measurement of the measured values. The possible
setting values are listed in the settings table.
Parameter: Measuring window
• Default setting (_:142) Measuring window = 10 ms

With the parameter (_:142) Measuring window, you set the measuring window that is used to determine
the arithmetic mean value from the sampled values. In case of slowly varying signals, Siemens recommends
setting the top value to 100 ms. With this value, a new, current measured value is provided every 100 ms for
further processing.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
• Default setting (_:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the Range active parameter, the function assumes a range of -20 mA to +20 mA or
-10 V to +10 V. The setting of the range for the scaled value then assumes a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA or -10 V to +10 V.
If you activate the Range active parameter, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit
- Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Note that this setting is activated by either placing, or not placing the relevant check mark in DIGSI (see
Figure 6-47 ).
• Default setting (_:104) Conversion factor = 1.00

With the parameter Conversion factor , you set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Upper limit,Lower limit,Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor
With the following parameters, you set the scaling of the measuring variables. By that, you can scale in an
application-specific way:
• Default setting Upper limit = 20.00 mA
• Default setting Upper limit - Sensor = 1.00
• Default setting Lower limit = -20.00 mA
• Default setting Lower limit - Sensor = 1.00

With these setting parameters, you set the operating range of the measuring transducer as well as the
conversion of the values transmitted to the sensor values. Harmonize the operating range of the measuring
transducer with the transmitter of the sensor. Using the free scalability of the system, you can meet different
requirements. The following figure shows the setting parameters in general terms.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[dw_measured-value-scaling, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-48 Scaling Principle
Setting Example 1:
A measuring transducer transmitting a current signal of 4 mA to 20 mA is used as a transmitter. Currents well
below 4 mA indicate a transmitter failure; currents around 0 mA indicate a broken wire. A sensor detecting a
temperature is attached to the transmitter. The upper value corresponds to 200 °C and the lower value to
-100 °C. This results in the following characteristic. In accordance with the set characteristic curve, the func-
tion calculates the sensor value from the measured current. The coefficients of the linear equation (gradient
and foot point) are calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are determined. A supplied
current of 9.333 mA corresponds to a temperature of 0 °C.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[dw_measuring-transducer-characteristic, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-49 Characteristic Curve of Setting Example 1
NOTE
i The hardware of the measuring transducer has been designed in such a way that measured values are
transmitted and analyzed using the setting range ( Upper limit or Lower limit). Therefore, special
applications are possible, if necessary. The limits lie at approximately +16 mA and -16 mA or +32 V and
-32 V. If the measured values are supplied above or below these limits, the quality invalid is assigned.
Setting Example 2:
For special applications, the transmitter sends a maximum of ±12 V. This voltage shall be issued accordingly
as sensor voltage.
Set the parameters as follows:
• Upper limit = 10.00 V
• Upper limit - Sensor = 10.00 V
• Lower limit = -10.00 V
• Lower limit - Sensor = -10.00 V

With this setting, a signal of 12 V is issued as a 12-V measured value (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[dw_measuring-transducer-setting, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-50 Parameter Settings and Representation of an Input Signal Greater Than 10 V
6.4.6.5 Settings

MT fast #
_:101 MT in #:TD input-signal • Voltage input Current input
type • Current input

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

_:103 MT in #:Unit • A
• %
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh
_:142 MT in #:Measuring • 10 ms 10 ms
window • 20 ms
• 40 ms
• 60 ms
• 80 ms
• 100 ms
_:107 MT in #:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion -10000.00 to 10000.00 1.00
factor
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 5.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -10000.00 to 10000.00 1.00
Sensor

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -10000.00 to 10000.00 1.00
Sensor

(Type)
MT in #
_:302 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:306 MT in #:TD scale SAV SAV O
6.4.7 RTD Unit Ethernet
6.4.7.1 Overview
The RTD unit Ether. function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the measured
temperatures from the RTD unit
• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature monitoring function
• Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Ether. function can only work in the Analog units function group. A maximum of 20 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured sensor function blocks.
[dwstrfnc-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.4.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit
Logic
[lortdtcp-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-52 Logic of the RTD Unit Ether. Function
Communication with an RTD Unit

The function is used to communicate with an RTD box connected via an Ethernet connection. If the connec-
tion of the function is successfully established to the external RTD box via the Ethernet interface, the RTD
box transmits the temperatures of all connected sensors to the RTD box Ether. function. For the connection
to be established successfully, specific communication settings must be set, see chapter 6.4.7.4 Application
and Setting Notes .
The RTD box Ziehl TR1200 IP supports only an Ethernet connection of 10 MBit/s. A direct connection to a
100-Mbit communication module is therefore not possible. For this reason, you must connect the RTD box to
the communication module via a 10/100 MBit/s autosensing switch which automatically recognizes the trans-
mission rates and adapts them accordingly. Further information can be found in the Application and setting
notes, see chapter 6.4.7.4 Application and Setting Notes .
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.

The RTD unit Ether. function cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the RTD unit causes a time-out.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the RTD unit for 9 sec.
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

Use the Port parameter to define over which port the external RTD-Unit is connected to the SIPROTEC 5
device.
If you want to connect the external RTD box to the integrated Ethernet interface, set the parameter Port =
Port J. If you want to connect the external RTD box to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port
= Port F , Port E, Port P, or plug-in module position.
You can connect directly the RTD-Unit to the device via the internal 10-Mbit Ethernet port J. If you operate
the RTD-Unit on another port via a 100-Mbit communication module, you need an interconnected 10/100-Mbit
autosensing switch, which adapts transmission rates accordingly.
Parameter: IP address
• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the IP address settings, you set the IP address of the RTD-Unit connected to the communication
module via the SUP protocol. Every RTD-Unit has to be assigned a unique IP address. The IP address to be
set depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts
with other IP addresses in the network. Set an appropriate IP address first at the Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD-Unit.
Then specify the IP address settings for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the RTD Unit

The Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD-Unit is set with the front keys or in a Web browser on a laptop computer via its
Ethernet interface. Set the connection type of the sensors (3-wire connection or resistance value for 2-wire
connection), the idle state of the fault-indication relay, as well as the IP interface setting.
The code lock has to be switched off for parameterization. This is only possible using the front keys of the
RTD-Unit. The code lock is off (switched off) in as-delivered condition and has pin 504.
For detailed information on the settings, refer to the TR1200 IP manual that comes with the RTD-Unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.siprotec.de) under Accessories ->
7XV5662-xAD.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.4.7.5 Temperature Sensor
Logic
[lotmpval-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-53 Logic Diagram of the Temperature Sensor Function Block
Measured Temperature Value

The Temperature sensor function block processes one single measured temperature value delivered from the
RTD box for the assigned sensor. 12 temperature sensor function blocks are always available in each RTD
box function (both via Ethernet and serial), even if fewer sensors are connected to the RTD box.
Various temperature sensor types are supported: Pt100, Ni100, and Ni120 sensors. The function block is
notified regarding the selection of connected type via the Sensor type setting.
The function block delivers a measured temperature value in °C or °F as an output variable. The measured
temperature value is available as an operational measured value and can be monitored by the Temperature
supervision function.
Error Responses
If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output measured temper-
ature value is set to invalid. The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with the
following table:
Table 6-9 Error response
Error Description Health Status Error Status

Sensor or line short circuited Alarm Yes
Sensor or line interrupted Alarm Yes
Measured temperature value Alarm Yes
outside the valid measuring range
specified in the technical data. The
valid measuring range depends on
the sensor type.
Sensor not connected OK No
Parameter: Sensor type
• Default setting (_:11611:102) Sensor type = Pt 100

The Sensor type parameter is used to set the sensor element used. You can select between Pt 100, Ni
100 and Ni 120.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Temperature unit

To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt the DIGSI user
default settings accordingly.
Proceed as follows:
• In DIGSI select the menu item Extras --> Settings.
• In the Settings view select the menu item DIGSI 5 User preferences.
• Under Standard unit system change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to US
units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-54 Change of the Display Between °C and °F
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
6.4.7.7 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port F port J
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port J
Sensor 1
_:11611:102 Sensor 1:Sensor type • Pt 100 Pt 100
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 2
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

Sensor 3
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 4
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 5
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 6
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 7
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 8
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 9
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 10
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 11
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 12
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

(Type)
General
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O
Sensor 1
_:11611:52 Sensor 1:Health ENS O
_:11611:60 Sensor 1:Failure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:11611:80 Sensor 1:TmpOut MV O
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
Sensor 4
Sensor 5
Sensor 6
Sensor 7
Sensor 8
Sensor 9
Sensor 10
Sensor 11
Sensor 12

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.4.8 RTD Unit, Serial
6.4.8.1 Overview
The RTD unit serial function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas-
ured temperatures from the RTD unit
• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature supervision function
• Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Serial function is set up structurally in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether. function. The
mode of operation is also identical (see 6.4.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit ).
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = F

With the Port parameter, you set the slot for the communication module that will be used for the connection
with an external RTD unit.
If you want to connect the external RTD box to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port = Port
F , Port E, Port P, or plug-in module position.
Parameter: Channel number
• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number settings, you set the
channel number (1 or 2) through which the RTD unit is connected to the device. The communication module
inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

Use the Slave address parameter to define the device address of the RTD unit. If only one RTD unit is
connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. The same device address has to be set on the
RTD unit. The device address is important for distinguishing among several RTD units connected to a serial
bus. Set a unique device address (for example 1, 2 and 3 when connecting 3 RTD units) for each RTD unit
and the same device address for the parameter Slave address in the 3 RTD unit serial functions.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
6.4.8.3 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port F port J
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port J
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
Sensor 1
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

Sensor 2
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 3
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 4
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 5
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 6
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 7
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 8
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 9
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 10
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 11
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 12
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

(Type)
General
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
Sensor 4
Sensor 5
Sensor 6
Sensor 7
Sensor 8
Sensor 9
Sensor 10
Sensor 11
Sensor 12

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
6.4.9 Communication with the RTD Unit
6.4.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 6-55 shows how you connect the RTD box to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45
plug is connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.
[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-55 Connection of the RTD Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module
must be inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the
CB202 expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[scauser3-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-56 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the RTD Unit.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scauser4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-57 Selecting the SUP Protocol
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the RTD box. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the RTD box. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The settings of the
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
[scauser5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-58 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD box serial 1 (refer to the
following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-59 Analog-Unit Instance
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the RTD
box. This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box (refer to the following figure).
The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the
first time:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Baud rate: 9600
• Parity: no
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-60 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address
6.4.9.2 Integration of an RTD-Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP)
Device Configuration
In the DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus, adding the module to the device configu-
ration. Figure 6-61 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alter-
natively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-61 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
[scautcp2-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-62 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[scautcp3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-63 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation (base module)
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the RTD unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-64 Analog Unit Instance
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD box (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box.
[scautcp5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-65 Setting the Port and IP Address

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
6.4.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors

Connect a resistor on the sensor terminals of the RTD unit. Using this resistor, simulate a constant tempera-
ture. The resistance value should be around 50 Ω to 200 Ω.
If you want to simulate a changeable temperature, connect an adjustable resistor of maximum 470 Ω instead
of a fixed resistor.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
7 Fault Recorder
7.1 Introduction to DIGSI 5 198

7.2 Function-Group Type Recorder 215
7.3 Function Description of the Analog and Binary Triggers 246
7.4 Trigger Functions 255
7.5 Measurands and Recorder Routing Functions 297

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.1 Introduction to DIGSI 5
7.1.1 General
DIGSI 5 is the project engineering and operation tool for all SIPROTEC 5 devices.
DIGSI 5 offers you the following possibilities:
• Create system topology
• Configuring hardware
• Set fault record parameters
• Configure communication networks
• Other tasks
NOTE
i In the following are the most important steps for setting the parameters for your fault recorder. A detailed
description of DIGSI 5 can be found in the DIGSI Online Help.
7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device
Installing Device Driver, Online Help Driver, and Other Drivers

In order to create projects in DIGSI 5 successfully, you must install the device drivers on your PC (available
on the DIGSI 5 DVD and on the Siemens Homepage3).
² During installation select the device driver (for example, Devices_FaultRec_FW-V07.00_CFG-
V07.00_DDD-V07.00.ddd) as well as the driver of the communication protocol (for example, Proto-
cols_CFG-V07.00_DDD-V07.00.ddd).
² Install the driver for online help (for example, Devices_FaultRec_OnlineHelp_de-DE_DDD-V07.00.ddd)
in the language of your choice.
More detailed information regarding the installation of device drivers, the online help driver as well as other
drivers can be found on the DIGSI 5 Help , Chapter Importing device drivers .
Starting DIGSI 5
Proceed as follows to configure your fault recorder:
² Create a new project by clicking in DIGSI 5 on Project --> New.
² Give your project a project name and then click Create.
3 You can find the drivers on www.energy.siemens.com under the keyword Download Area.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[scproj7k-040412-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-1 Creating a New Project
² Double-click Add new device.
[scger7ke-310812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-2 Add New Device
Step 1: Select a Device Type

² If you want to specify the offline configuration with a valid product code, enter the product code of the
device to be configured in this entry field (on this, see A.1 Order Options and Accessories ).
If you want to configure the project offline, leave the entry field blank.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[scpro7ke-200515, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-3 Entering Product Code
² When you have entered a product code, click Check. If the product code is valid, the Select an applica-
tion template list box is activated.
If the product code is invalid, you receive specific error messages. Correct the product code.
When you click Configure, this closes the current dialog and changes to the manual configuration mode.
The Network view is displayed in the operating range.
More details on the product code and on the Configure button is found in the DIGSI Help, Chapter
Adding a new device .
Step 2: Select Device Characteristics

² If the device characteristics are completely specified by the product code, the check box Step 2: Select
device characteristics is dimmed and can not be edited.
You can find more details on this button in the DIGSI Help, Chapter Adding new device .
Step 3: Select an Application Template

You can carry out this step only if you have selected the device type and the device characteristics, if appli-
cable.
² Select the application template you wish to use as a basis for your project engineering from the list box.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[scapp7ke-200515, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-4 Select the Application Template
Step 4: Select the Communication Versions

The check box Step 4: Select the communication versions is dimmed. This selection is intended for future
activations.
You can find more details on this button in the DIGSI Help, Chapter Adding new device .
² To add your new device to the project, finally click OK.
7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in DIGSI 5
After you have added the fault recorder in DIGSI 5, you can set parameters and route signals, indications,
triggers, etc.
The sequence of the routing in DIGSI 5 corresponds to the signal flow direction.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwflussr-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-5 Signal Flow Direction in the Fault Recorder
In the following are the most important steps for setting the parameters for your fault recorder. A detailed
description of DIGSI 5 options can be found in the DIGSI Help.
Routing Measuring Points

You can use the Measuring-point routing matrix to route the physical inputs of a inputs of the SIPROTEC 5
device to the inputs of current and voltage measuring points.
² Double-click Measuring point routing.
² Finally, click Add. A window for selecting the phase characteristic (3-phase or 1-phase) appears.
² Select both for the current and the voltage measuring points either the 3-phase or 1-phase character-
istic.
² Select the connection type.
² Route the phases on the measuring points.
[scmes7ke-180213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-6 Route Measuring Points
Detailed information on the clamp designations, for example 1A, is in the Hardware Manual and in the hard-
ware configuration.
In addition you can use the Current measuring points and Voltage measuring points window to add other
measuring points to the application.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i An exclamation point appears in the project tree before and during the routing and indicates an inconsis-
tent routing. At the end of an error-free routing, the exclamation point disappears automatically. If the
exclamation point does not automatically disappear, you can remove it by clicking the Check consistency
icon.
[scconsis-310812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-7 Checking Consistency
Instantiate Function Groups, Functions, and Function Blocks from the DIGSI 5 Library
² Using Drag & Drop, move the voltage and current function groups from the DIGSI 5 library into the
project tree.
NOTE
i This procedure also applies for the recorder functions Slow-scan recorder and Continuous recorder and
for the measured values Recorder routing with their associated measured value function blocks Routing f,
Routing I, Routing pwr and Routing V).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[scfganle-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-8 Instantiating Function Groups with the Respective Functions

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[scrouins-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-9 Instantiating Recorder Routing with the Respective Function Blocks
NOTE
i Use a maximum of 57 characters4 for the channel name. Do not use either umlauts or special characters,
because these prevent healthy export to SICAM PQS and into file formats such as COMTRADE and
PQDIF . The channel name is truncated if the permissible length is exceeded.
Connecting Function Groups

You can use the Function-group connections matrix to edit the connections between the function groups and
measuring points.
² Connect each measuring point with the corresponding function group in the Connecting measuring
points with function group window.
If the cells of the measuring point line and the target column is light gray, then the measuring point is
routed to the column.
If the joint cell is dark gray, the measuring point cannot be routed to the relevant column.
If the cell is red, this indicates an inconsistency. You must route the measuring point to the affected
column.
² Click X (Routed) in the context menu in the red markers.
An X is entered into the cell. The measuring point is not connected to the function group.
4 128 initial characters of the US-ASCII/ANSI character set

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
² Repeat the process for all other measuring points to be connected

As soon as the measuring points are correctly routed, the red markers are hidden. If not, perform a
consistency check.
[scfgverb-310812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-10 Connecting Function Groups
NOTE
i You can route the current measuring points using X (transformer neutral point in the direction of the object)
or using I (transformer neutral point in the opposite direction).
Adjusting Parameters
In order to adjust the parameters, proceed as follows:
² Double-click in DIGSI 5 on Function Settings.
You will see the names of all available function groups.
² Open the function group that contains the required function.
You will see the names of all the functions that this function group contains.
² Double-click the name of the required function.
The parameter view will open in the operating range. This shows the parameters and the preset values
of the selected function.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[scfastsc-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-11 Parameter Setting in the Example of the Fast-Scan Recorder
Ensure the parameter Mode is activated.

• Default setting (_:2731:1) Mode = on
When using the overlapping parameter Mode , the recorder is activated.
on The recorder is activated.
off The recorder is deactivated in different ways depending on the recorded type:
• The fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder are deactivated.
• The continuous recorder and the trend recorder are deactivated, but continue to record time
jumps, modes on/off, as well as disconnection and recovery of supply voltage.
PQDif recordings are still generated, even though the continuous recorder and the trend
recorder are set to the mode off. It is recommended to delete the instance in case of long-
term non-use.
test The recorder is activated for test purposes. In the test mode, the record is marked using the test
flag (true) (see the following figure).
NOTE
i The test mode is not available for the continuous recorder and the trend recorder and applies only to the
fast-scan and slow-scan recorders.
[sctestfl-291012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-12 Fault Record with Activated Marking Test Record (Test Flag)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i The Mode of the individual recorder depends on the settings of the parameter Mode in the higher-level
function General.
The status of the function resulting from the parameter Mode and the superordinate state of the recorder is
shown in the following table.
Table 7-1 Resulting State of the Function (from Connection of Parameter Mode and Superordinate
State)
Mode State of the Mode State of the Mode State of the

Recorder Recorder Recorder
General Function On Off Test
(Superordinate State)
Individual recorder On On On Off On Test
Individual recorder Off Off Off Off Off Off
Individual recorder Test Test Test Off Test Test
NOTE
i Every change of a recorder parameter (with the exception of changing the mode and trigger parameters)
results in a restart of the device.
NOTE
i A currently existing trigger violation does not trigger fault records if

• the device is restarted
• the device, the recording, or the mode of the recorder is switched from on to off.
Configuring Trigger Routing

You can route triggers to recorder instances. A trigger can be routed to one or more recorder instances. To
generate a fault record, assign the triggers to the recorders.
² Double-click Recorder interaction in the project tree in DIGSI 5.
² Right-click X (routed).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[sctrigge-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-13 Trigger Routing in the Recorder Interaction Matrix
Routing the Signals and Indications in the Information Routing

You can find a detailed description of the routings in chapter 7.2.3 Function Description .
² Rout signals, indications, etc. with the Information routing to sources and goals.
The Information routing is a device-oriented tool. A separate Information routing is available for each
offline configuration present in a project.
Routing the Measured Values in the Information Routing

² You can find more information about the measured values that can be routed as well as recommenda-
tions in chapter 7.5.1.2 Using Measurands .
7.1.4 Step 3: Evaluating Recordings
Generating the Record by the Device

The records generated by the fault recorder can be loaded and converted by DIGSI 5 or SICAM PQS. A
maximum of 3 communication connections are possible, irrespective of the type DIGSI 5 or IEC 61850.
Depending on the recorder, the records are provided in different file formats (see the following table).
Table 7-2 File Formats Used by the Individual Recorders
Interface File Format FSR5 SSR6 CR7 TR8

DIGSI 5 SIPROTEC 5 X X X X
IEC 61850 SIPROTEC 5 X X
IEC 61850 COMTRADE X X
5 FSR: Fast-Scan Recorder

6 SSR: Slow-Scan Recorder
7 CR: Continuous recorder
8 TR: Trend recorder

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Interface File Format FSR5 SSR6 CR7 TR8

IEC 61850 PQDIF X X
Displaying the Record in DIGSI 5

Follow the instructions to download the records from the device into DIGSI 5.
² Open your project in the project tree.
² Click Process data (1).
² Click Records (2).
² If needed, double-click Fast-scan and Slow-scan fault records or Continuous records or Trend recorder
(3).
² In the menu bar, click Read records (4).
Now, the fault recorder downloads the recordings into DIGSI 5.
² You can select the records as desired (5) and download them clicking Download (6).
² With a double-click, you can open the record in DIGSI 5 (8) (see also Figure 7-15 ).
[leAnzeige_DIGSI-220813, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-14 Procedure for Displaying the Record in DIGSI 5
(1) Process data

(2) Records
(3) Fast-scan and slow-scan fault records, continuous records, and trend records
(4) Reading the list of records
(5) Selecting recordings
(6) Downloading fault records
(7) Display of the record duration
(8) Double-clicking to open the record


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i The pre-trigger time is not included in the displayed record duration.
In the following table, the various statuses of the records are displayed.
Table 7-3 Description of the Status of the Records in Logical Sequence
Status Description
New After you click the Read records button, an overview of existing records in the
device is collected and those with the status New are displayed in DIGSI 5.
Download The recording is downloaded into DIGSI 5.
Downloaded The recording has been downloaded to DIGSI 5 and can be opened with SIGRA,
for example.
Deleted from the device The recording has been deleted in the device, but is still stored in DIGSI 5.
[scplugin-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-15 Display of the Record in DIGSI 5
NOTE
i To prevent records being lost, they must be stored regularly to DIGSI 5 if the allocated memory area is
exceeded.
Display in SIGRA
To perform additional analyses, open the record in SIGRA. SIGRA offers additional display modes and calcu-
lation methods for evaluating the recordings.
² Click the SIGRA4 button to open the record in SIGRA (see the following figure).
[sciconsi-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-16 Procedure to Open a Record in SIGRA from DIGSI 5

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[scsigras-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-17 Display of a Record in SIGRA
You find detailed information on SIGRA in the SIGRA Manual .
Display in SICAM PQS

² If you have connected SICAM PQS with the fault recorder via IEC 61850, you can also read the record-
ings in SICAM PQS.
You can find detailed information on SICAM PQS in the SICAM PQS Manual .
7.1.5 Working with IEC 61850
Function Overview of the IEC 61850

IEC 61850 covers the process, field and station level as the station control protocol and defines comprehen-
sively the data exchange between devices within a switchgear. The individual participants communicate
between the levels or per GOOSE on one level.
The GOOSE service enables rapid data exchange between devices and can therefore replace the cross-
wiring between devices by communication connections. In addition IEC 61850 Service, SIPROTEC 5
supports statistical and dynamic reporting. IEC 61850 guarantees the seamless interoperability of devices of
various types and origin.
A detailed description of IEC 61850 can be found in the communication manual SIPROTEC 5 IEC 61850 or in
DIGSI 5 Help .
NOTE
i The protocols DNP, T103 and T104 are available in DIGSI 5, but they are not supported in the 7KE85 fault
recorder.
Siemens recommends to avoid using these protocols.
Organization of Continuous Data in PQDIF Format

The data of the continuous recorder and the trend recorder is stored in 10-minute or 2-hour intervals. Time
jumps can shorten or extend the intervals. When the date changes, these individual files of the previous day

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
are stored and combined into a single file. That is to say, that all 10-minute intervals, 144 files will be replaced
by a single file and all 2-hour intervals, 12 files will be replaced by a single file.
The PQDIF files will be filed according to the following nomenclature:
• Subdirectory: Identification of the continuous recorder and the recorder ID: /Cont_PQDif_fffe
• ID of the recording (for example, /00000001)
• ID of the recorder (for example, fffe)
• Date Year/Month/Day: YYYYMMTT (for example, 20130814)
• Time of the recording hour/minute/second: hhmmss (for example, 211016)

Example of a PQDIF file path: /Cont_PQDif_fffe/00000001_fffe_20130814_211016.pqd
[leIEC_Browser-270813, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-18 Organization of PQDIF Files
(1) Recording of the current day

(2) Recording of the oldest day
(3) One file per recording day

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i In order to establish and display the file date, the device-internal UTC time is used.
NOTE
i In the mode off , the continuous recorder and the trend recorder no longer record any measured values,
but continue to record device statuses (time jumps, modes on/off, as well as disconnection and recovery
of the supply voltage).
PQDif recordings are still generated, even though the continuous recorder and the trend recorder are set
to the mode off. It is recommended to delete the instance in case of long-term non-use.
Organization of the Fast and Slow-Scan Records

Fast and slow-scan records are available via IEC 61850 in SIPROTEC format and COMTRADE format.
You can find the description of the different file formats in chapter 7.1.4 Step 3: Evaluating Recordings .
Description of the IEC 61850 Browser

The IEC 61850 Browser is a PC program that allows the IEC 61850 structure of a device to be displayed
online. It is supplied together with DIGSI 5 and during commissioning provides important information about
the IEC 61850 structure of the device. The IEC 61850 browser displays datasets configured in the device, for
example, for static reports or GOOSE messages, as well as the data objects they contain.
You can find a detailed description of the IEC 61850 browser in the Communication Manual SIPROTEC 5
IEC 61850 .

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.2 Function-Group Type Recorder
The fault recorder has a flash memory in which records can be saved. The recording documents operations
within the power system and the way in which devices respond to them. You can read out records from the
device and analyze them subsequently using evaluation tools such as SIGRA or SICAM PQS/SICAM PQ
Analyzer.
The Recorder function group consists of the following functionalities.

• General function block
• Fast-scan recorder function
• Slow-scan recorder function
• Continuous recorder function
• Trend recorder function

The following figure shows the structure of the Recorder function group and its link to other function groups.
The function blocks are described in the following chapters.
[dwfg7ke8-161012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-19 Structure of the Recorder Function Group
The Recorder function group is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You are
able to individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5.
Interfaces with Measuring Points

The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points.
If you are using an application template the 3-phase voltage/current function group connected with the meas-
uring points 3-phase voltage and 3-phase current, since these linkages are required. It can be necessary to

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
connect additional measuring points to the function group, depending on the nature of the user functions
used. The configuration is done via the Function group connections editor in DIGSI 5.
You can find more detailed information on this in chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.
The 3-phase voltage and 3-phase voltage/current function groups have the following interfaces to the meas-
uring points:
• 3-phase voltage
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are, for example, VA, VB, VC.
• 3-phase voltage/current
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage and current system are supplied via this interface. All values
that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface.
• Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

The measurands from the PMU are supplied via this interface..
System Data and Function Groups and Functions that cannot be Configured
'The system data and the PMU function group are visible, but cannot be changed.
Input and Output Signals

Recordings are started on the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders if a trigger criterion is satisfied or a control
input is activated.
The fault recorder makes different input signals available, with which recordings can be specifically started
and deleted. The output signals provide information about the function status.
In the following table you can find input signals of the fault-recording functions:
Name Type Description
Control: Start record SPC Start of a recording preferably via IEC 61850
The set pre and post-trigger time are taken into
account.
Control: >External start SPS Start of a recording preferably via a binary input or a
logic block chart.
The set pre and post-trigger time are taken into
account.
Control: >Manual start SPS Start of a recording with fixed time (Manual record
time parameter), preferably using a function key
In the following table you can find output signals of the fault-recording functions:
Name Type Description
General: Mode (controllable) ENC Status feedback of the fault recording according to
General: Behavior ENS Chapter 2.3 Function Control
General: Health ENS
Control: Fault number INS Indication of the error number for current fault
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running
Control: Record made SPS End of recording

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Configuration of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5
• In the Information routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals to LEDs and
output contacts. For this open in the project tree.
• Click with the right mouse button on the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or
binary output column in the routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:
Table 7-4 Overview of Routing Options
Routing Options LED BI9 BO10 FK11 Description

(unrouted) X X X X The signal is not routed.
X (routed) X The signal is routed.
H Active with X There is a voltage applied at the routed binary input
voltage
L Active without X X There is no voltage applied at the routed binary input
voltage
V Unlatched X X The signal is routed as unsaved. Activation and reset of the output
(LED, BO) occurs automatically via the binary-signal value.
G Latched X X The binary signal is latched when the output (LED, binary output) is
activated. To reset, a targeted confirmation must occur.
V Toggle X With this routing option, the trigger rises with the first operational
handling (LED on). When the function key is activated again, the
trigger clears (LED off).
This setting applies for the controllable Start record and binary
inputs>External start and >Manual start.
P (Trigger pulse) X With this routing option, the trigger rises and clears. The LED
display illuminates approx. 200 ms.
This setting applies for the binary inputs >External start and
>Manual start.
This routing option is practical for a routing of the function key to
>Manual start.
On On X This setting applies only for the controllable Start record.
Off Off X This setting applies only for the controllable Start record.
9 Binary input
10 Binary output
11 Function key

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[sctrigra-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-20 Routing of the Signals in the Information Routing
7.2.4 Memory Splitting
The maximum flash-memory capacity of the recorder is 15 GB.

Using the parameter Flash-memory size you can change the flash-memory capacity of each individual
recorder.
Several thousand recordings can be stored, depending on the flash-memory capacity.
[sc7kemem-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-21 Overview of Flash-Memory Splitting

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTICE
The sum of the individual memory capacities must not exceed the maximum flash-memory capacity. If,
when setting the parameters of the individual recorders, the maximum memory capacity of 15 GB has
been reached or exceeded, a warning indication is displayed in DIGSI 5.
Every change of memory splitting leads to a permanent deletion of all recordings in the device.
² Secure all recordings before you reset the parameters.
Figure 7-22 Change of the Flash-Memory Capacity in the Example of the Fast-Scan Recorder
NOTE
i Due to the internal administration data, the complete flash memory size for storing the recordings is not
available. The Estimated record size is user information in order to be able to estimate how many
recordings can be stored in the reserved flash memory. The actual size of the fault record depends on the
degree of compression and the number of stored events.
7.2.5 Time Jumps
Time jumps can happen in a fault record for the following reasons:
• When the clock time is changed manually
• When the clock is corrected by an external time synchronizing device (see the chapter Date and Time
Synchronization 3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
Time jumps shorter than 50 ms are automatically compensated and are not visible in recordings. Time jumps
higher than 50 ms are identified in recordings using a marking line TJ12.
12 (TJ = Time jump)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.2.6 Fast-Scan Recorder
7.2.6.1 Overview of Functions

The Fast-scan recorder records individual current and voltage sampled values at a sampling rate that is high
enough for the display of network events and transients.
The fast-scan recorder records at least 1 s up to a maximum of 90 seconds. The sampled values (SAV) are
always routed automatically to the Fast-scan recorder.
The fault record generated contains the following information:
• Pre-trigger time
• Trigger point
• Fault Recording
• Trigger end mark (if a falling trigger is detected)
• Post-trigger time (if a falling trigger is detected)

In addition, the cause that trips the trigger is saved.

The function Fast-scan recorder is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the Recorder function group, the
Fast -scan recorder can only be operated once.
[dwfast7k-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the method of function of the fast-scan recorder.
[lofastsc-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-24 Logic Diagram of the Fast-Scan Recorder Function
The function Fast-scan recorder records the following data:

• Sampled values (SAV) of all analog inputs
• Measured values calculated internally
• Binary signals

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
The sampling frequency is a maximum of 16 kHz. This corresponds to 320 sampled values per nominal
period at 50 Hz and 266 sampled values at 60 Hz. Binary changes are recorded at a sampling rate of 4 kHz
and a resolution of 1 ms.
The flash memory of the device is automatically updated for every recording. If the flash memory is full, the
oldest recording is automatically overwritten when the device records a new fault record.
The pre-trigger and post-trigger time is set for all recorders. The recording starts as soon as the recorder is
triggered. The trip signal (trigger cause) can be again inactive during the recording (trigger clears). In this
case, the fault record is limited by the set parameters of the post-trigger time.
Four (4) different possible triggers are available for the fast-scan recorder:
• Trigger from trigger routing
• Manual trigger start
• External trigger start
• Triggers on indications
• Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable ( Start record )

You will find additional information about the Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable in the chapters
7.3.3.4 Trigger Start Using Logic Block Chart and 7.3.3.3 GOOSE Trigger .
NOTE
i For all trigger types except >Manual start , the parameters Pre-trigger time , Post-trigger
time and Maximum record time apply.
For the trigger type >Manual start the parameter Manual record time applies.
Manual Start
Routing of the binary input >Manual start leads to a recording of fixed length. The length is set based on
the parameter Manual record time .
Triggering from Trigger Routing/External Start/Trigger on Indications/Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable
With the routing of the binary input >External start, recording is performed as long as the signal is
present and the Post-trigger time is running. The running record ends as soon as the parameters
Post-trigger time or Maximum record time have reached the set values.
Mode
The fast-scan recorder operates only if Mode is set to on .
The recording is ended if Mode is set to off during the recording.
Recording Finished/Error Number

After the recording, the indication Record made remains active for 2 s. The signal Fault number incre-
ments by 1 after each recording.
Retrigger Blocking Time

The retrigger blocking time can be activated separately for each triggered recorder. The retrigger blocking
time prevents retriggerings that lead either to a fault-record extension or to another recording.
The retrigger blocking time is started separately for each trigger source that is routed to a recorder.
Ring-Buffer Mode
While making a record on the flash memory, the device can determine whether the free space assigned to
the recorder in the recorder partition is too small. As a result of this, as many old records as needed are
deleted – starting with the oldest record – for the complete storage of the current recording. Deleting occurs
even if the record to be deleted is being read at the same moment by DIGSI 5 or a higher control level. In this
case, transmission is canceled.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Disconnection and Recovery of Supply Voltage
NOTE
i If the supply voltage is disconnected during a recording, this record will not be lost. The record truncated
by the disconnected supply voltage can be read out after the supply voltage is recovered.
Parameters of the Fast-Scan Recorder Function

The parameters of the fast-scan recorder are shown in the following figure.
Figure 7-25 Settings for the Fast-Scan Recorder (as an Example)
The procedure is described in chapter 7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device and in
the DIGSI Help .
Parameter: Flash-Memory Size
• Default setting (_:10741:161) Flash-memory size = 4000 MB

With the parameter Flash-memory size you specify a maximum memory capacity of the fast-scan
recorder on the mass storage.
If the flash memory becomes full while recording new fault records, the device automatically deletes the
oldest file to be able to continue recording (ring buffer).
The maximum number of storable fault records is limited only by the set flash-memory size and the size of the
individual fault records.
NOTE
i If you change the capacity of the recorder or delete a recorder instance, the flash memory of the device is
re-organized and all recordings of the device – not just those of the changed recorder – are automatically
and irrevocably deleted.
Before this, save your recordings by exporting them manually in DIGSI 5 or archiving them in SICAM PQS.
Then, delete your recordings in DIGSI 5 to avoid inconsistencies between new and old recordings.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i The setting aid Estimated record size is dimmed and thus, you cannot set or change it.
Keep in mind that the estimation refers to typical sinusoidal signals and that the size of a fault record can
increase in the event of distorted signals.
NOTE
i Due to the internal administration data, the complete flash memory size for the storing of recordings is not
Parameter: Maximum Record Time
• Default setting (_:10741:111) Maximum record time = 3.0 s

With the Maximum record time setting, you configure the maximum recording duration for a recording.
When the time configured expires, an ongoing fault recording is canceled. This parameter merely limits the
duration of the fault recording.
The maximum record duration includes the pre-trigger time.
NOTE
i The parameter Maximum record time does not apply to fault records which are tripped by manual trig-
gers ( >Manual start ). For these fault records, the parameter Manual record time applies.
Parameter: Pre-Trigger Time
• Default setting (_:10741:112) Pre-trigger time = 0.1 s

With the Pre-trigger time parameter, you configure the pre-trigger time for an individual fault recording.
The pre-trigger time defines that time before a trigger event.
NOTE
i The Pre-trigger time must be a maximum of 10 % of the Post-trigger time , as otherwise

DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Parameter: Post-Trigger Time
• Default setting (_:10741:113) Post-trigger time = 1.0 s

With the Post-trigger time parameter, you configure the post-trigger time for an individual fault
recording. The post-trigger time defines that time after dropout of the trigger event.
Parameter: Manual Record Time
• Default setting (_:10741:116) Manual record time = 1.0 s

The parameter Manual record time determines the length of a recording if the fault recording is acti-
vated dynamically (edge-controlled) via a separately configured input signal >Manual start .
NOTE
i The pre-trigger time, the post-trigger time, and the maximum record time have no effect in this case.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Parameter: Sampling Frequency
• Default setting (_:10741:140) Sampling frequency = 16 kHz

With the Sampling frequency parameter, you define the sampling frequency of the fault recording.
Possible setting values are 16 kHz , 8 kHz , 4 kHz , 2 kHz , and 1 kHz .
The setting value has no influence on calculated measured values.
Parameter: Retrigger Blocking Time
• Default setting (_:10741:166) Retrigger blocking time = 1.0 s

With the Retrigger blocking time parameter, a fault-record extension is prevented by repetitively
occurring identical trigger events. If another trigger is tripped during a recording, the post-trigger time is
restarted and the recording is extended. To prevent this, a retrigger blocking time can be defined. Identical
triggers, which come during the retrigger blocking time, are ignored and do not lead to an extension.
NOTE
i If you set the parameter of the retrigger blocking time longer that the record time, no trigger events are
recorded within this time!
7.2.6.5 Settings

General
_:2731:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test
Control
_:10741:161 Fst-scan rec.1:Flash- 0.200 GB to 15.000 GB 4.000 GB
memory size
_:10741:102 Fst-scan rec.1:Esti- 0.000 MB to 200.000 MB 0.000 MB
mated record size
_:10741:111 Fst-scan rec.1:Maximum 1.0 s to 90.0 s 3.0 s
record time
_:10741:112 Fst-scan rec.1:Pre- 0.0 s to 3.0 s 0.1 s
trigger time
_:10741:113 Fst-scan rec.1:Post- 1.0 s to 90.0 s 1.0 s
trigger time
_:10741:116 Fst-scan rec.1:Manual 1.0 s to 90.0 s 1.0 s
record time
_:10741:140 Fst-scan rec.1:Sampling • 16 kHz 16 kHz
frequency • 8 kHz
• 4 kHz
• 2 kHz
• 1 kHz
_:10741:166 Fst-scan rec.1:Retrigger 0.0 s to 3600.0 s 1.0 s
blocking time

(Type)
Binary IO
_:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) C
_:2731:52 General:Behavior O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

(Type)
Binary IO
_:10741:300 Fst-scan rec.1:Start record C
_:10741:502 Fst-scan rec.1:>External start I
_:10741:503 Fst-scan rec.1:>Manual start I
_:10741:310 Fst-scan rec.1:Fault number O
_:10741:311 Fst-scan rec.1:Recording started O
_:10741:314 Fst-scan rec.1:Record made O
_:10741:322 Fst-scan rec.1:Recorder formatted O
7.2.7 Slow-Scan Recorder

The Slow-scan recorder is, just like the Fast-scan recorder, a triggered recorder. It records measured values
with the set averaging time. SPS indications can still be recorded. Longer record times are possible using the
Slow-scan recorder.
The fault record generated contains the following information:
• Trigger point
• Fault Recording
• Trigger end mark (if a falling trigger is detected)
• Post-trigger time (if a falling trigger is detected)

In addition, the cause that trips the trigger is saved.

The function Slow-scan recorder is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the Recorder function group, the
Slow-scan recorder can be operated at a maximum of 2 times.
[dwslow7k-161012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Logic
The following logic diagram shows how the slow-scan recorder functions.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[loslowsc-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-27 Logic Diagram of the Slow-Scan Recorder Function
The slow-scan recorder can record fault records up to a length of 90 min. Measured values are acquired
based on half periods and averaged over a configurable averaging time. The averaging time can be set from
1 period to 3000 periods. Binary changes are recorded at a sampling rate of 4 kHz and a resolution of 1 ms.
The flash memory of the device is automatically updated for every recording. If the flash memory is full, the
oldest recording is automatically overwritten when the device records a new fault record.
The pre-trigger and post-trigger time is set for all recorders. The recording starts as soon as the recorder is
triggered. The trip signal (trigger cause) can be again inactive during the recording (trigger clears). In this
case, the fault record is limited by the set parameters of the post-trigger time.
4 different possible triggers are available for the slow-scan recorder:
• Trigger from trigger routing
• Manual trigger start
• External trigger start
• Triggers on indications
• Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable (Start record)

You will find additional information about the Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable in chapters
7.3.3.4 Trigger Start Using Logic Block Chart and 7.3.3.3 GOOSE Trigger .
NOTE
i Consider that the maximum record duration and the post-trigger time at high averaging times can be
shorter than expected, since these parameters act as a multiple of the averaging time.
EXAMPLE
Averaging time: 3000 periods (equal to 60 seconds)
Maximum record duration: 200 seconds
Resulting fault record length: 180 seconds
NOTE
i For all trigger types except >Manual start , the parameters Pre-trigger time , Post-trigger
time and Maximum record time apply.
For the trigger type >Manual start the parameter Manual record time applies.
Manual Start
Routing of the binary input >Manual start leads to a recording of fixed length. The length is set based on
the parameter Manual record time.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Triggering from Trigger Routing/External Start/Trigger on Indications/Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable
With the routing of the binary input >External start , recording is performed as long as the signal is
present and the Post-trigger time is running. The running record ends as soon as the parameters
Post-trigger time or Maximum record time have reached the set values.
Mode
The recorder operates only if the Mode is set to on .
The recording is ended if Mode is set to off during the recording.
Recording Finished/Error Number

After the recording, the indication Record made remains active for 2 s. The signal Fault number incre-
ments by 1 after each recording.

The retrigger blocking time can be activated separately for each triggered recorder. The retrigger blocking
time prevents retriggerings that lead either to a fault-record extension or to another recording.
The retrigger blocking time is started separately for each trigger source that is routed to a recorder.
Ring-Buffer Mode
While making a record on the flash memory, the device can determine whether the free space assigned to
the recorder in the recorder partition is too small. As a result of this, as many old records as needed are
deleted – starting with the oldest record – for the complete storage of the current recording. Deleting occurs
even if the record to be deleted is being read at the same moment by DIGSI 5 or a higher control level. In this
case, transmission is canceled.
NOTE
i If the supply voltage is disconnected during a recording, this record will not be lost. The record truncated
by the disconnected supply voltage can be read out after the supply voltage is recovered.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Parameter of the Slow-Scan Recorder Function
[scslosca-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-28 Settings Group of the Slow-Scan Recorder
the DIGSI Help .
• Default setting (_:10081:161) Flash-memory size = 1500 MB

With the Flash-memory size parameter, you specify a maximum memory size of the slow-scan recorder
on the mass storage.
oldest file to be able to continue recording (ring buffer).
The maximum number of storable fault records is limited by the set flash-memory size and the size of the
individual fault records.
NOTE
NOTE
i The setting aid Estimated record size is dimmed and thus, you cannot set or change it.
Keep in mind that the estimation refers to typical sinusoidal signals and that the size of a fault record can
increase in the event of distorted signals.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
Parameter: Maximum Record Time
• Default setting (_:10081:111) Maximum record time = 2 minutes

With the Maximum record time parameter, you set the maximum record time for an individual fault
recording. When the time configured expires, an ongoing fault recording is canceled. This parameter merely
limits the duration of the fault recording.
The maximum record duration includes the pre-trigger time.
Parameter: Pre-Trigger Time
• Default setting (_:10081:112) Pre-trigger time = 5.0 s

With the Pre-trigger time parameter, you configure the pre-trigger time for an individual fault recording.
The pre-trigger time defines that time before a trigger event.
NOTE
i The Pre-trigger time must be a maximum of 10 % of the Post-trigger time , as otherwise,

DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Parameter: Post-Trigger Time
• Default setting (_:10081:113) Post-trigger time = 1 minute

With the Post-trigger time parameter, you configure the post-trigger time for an individual fault
recording. The post-trigger time defines that time after dropout of the trigger event.
Parameter: Manual Record Time
• Default setting (_:10081:116) Manual record time = 1 minute

The parameter Manual record time determines the length of a recording if the fault recording is acti-
vated dynamically (edge-controlled) via a separately configured input signal >Manual start .
NOTE
i The pre-trigger time, the post-trigger time, and the maximum record time have no effect in this case.
Parameter: Averaging Time
• Default setting (_:10081:140) Averaging time = 1 period

With the Averaging time parameter, you determine the number of periods for which an average value will
be generated and stored in the memory.
The average value is always formed over the entire averaging time.
NOTE
i The actual record time can differ from the parameterized record time since the actual record time is deter-
mined by the parameterized averaging time. The longer the averaging time, the larger the deviation can
be.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i If fault records are recorded with a slow-scan recorder over a long averaging time, brief trigger events are
detected, but not visible in the fault record.
NOTE
i The complex types (CMV) can be routed in the slow-scan recorder.

The angles are not determined but rather used at the end of the averaging time with the current value.
Parameter: Retrigger Blocking Time
• Default setting (_:10081:166) Retrigger blocking time = 1 minute

With the Retrigger blocking time parameter, a fault-record extension is prevented by repetitively
occurring identical trigger events. If another trigger is tripped during a recording, the post-trigger time is
restarted and the recording is extended. To prevent this, a retrigger blocking time can be defined. Identical
triggers, which come during the retrigger blocking time, are ignored and do not lead to an extension.
All other active channels can retrigger the fault recorder and thus extend the recording.
NOTE
i If you set the parameter of the retrigger blocking time longer that the record time, no trigger events are
recorded within this time!
7.2.7.5 Settings

General
• on
• test
Control
_:10081:161 Slow-scan 1:Flash-memory 0.200 GB to 14.800 GB 1.500 GB
size
_:10081:102 Slow-scan 1:Estimated 0 KB to 200000 KB 48 KB
record size
_:10081:111 Slow-scan 1:Maximum 1 min to 90 min 2 min
record time
_:10081:112 Slow-scan 1:Pre-trigger 0 s to 90 s 5s
time
_:10081:113 Slow-scan 1:Post-trigger 1 min to 90 min 1 min
time
_:10081:116 Slow-scan 1:Manual record 1 min to 90 min 1 min
time
_:10081:140 Slow-scan 1:Averaging 1 cycles to 3000 cycles 1 cycles
time
_:10081:166 Slow-scan 1:Retrigger 0 min to 240 min 1 min
blocking time

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

(Type)
Binary IO
_:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) C
_:2731:52 General:Behavior O
Binary IO
_:10081:300 Slow-scan 1:Start record C
_:10081:502 Slow-scan 1:>External start I
_:10081:503 Slow-scan 1:>Manual start I
_:10081:310 Slow-scan 1:Fault number O
_:10081:311 Slow-scan 1:Recording started O
_:10081:314 Slow-scan 1:Record made O
_:10081:322 Slow-scan 1:Recorder formatted O
7.2.8 Continuous Recorder

Continuous recorders are used for data acquisition of the measured values over a longer time period. Thus,
long-time analyses of the power system behavior can be performed. The continuous recorder forms the arith-
metic average value over the averaging time.

The function Continuous recorder is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the Recorder function group,
the Continuous recorder can be operated a maximum of 5 times.
[dwcont7k-161012-01.tif, 2, en_US]

The continuous recorder is not a triggered recorder, runs constantly, and has large averaging times. The
continuous recorder saves the arithmetic average value of the process quantities (power, frequency, RMS
values of the fundamental component of currents, voltages and symmetric components).
In the course of parameterization, specify a maximum memory capacity for storage of the recordings. The
continuous recorder is organized as a ring buffer. When the memory is filled completely, the oldest data are
overwritten automatically.
Mode
The continuous recorder operates only if Mode is set to on .
The recording is interrupted if Mode is set to off during the recording. Recording starts again if Mode is set
to on again.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i In the mode off , the continuous recorder no longer records any measured values, but continues to
record device statuses (time jumps, modes on/off, as well as disconnection and recovery of the supply
voltage).
PQDif recordings are still generated, even though the continuous recorder is set to the mode off. It is
recommended to delete the recorder instance in case of long-term non-use.
Averaging of the Continuous Recorder

If the Averaging time parameter is configured to 600 s or 900 s , the data are made available cycli-
cally after 2 hours. This setting defines the time frame in a 2-hour cycle. That means, the activation occurs at
00:00, 02:00, 04:00 UTC, etc. If the averaging time is less than 600 s, the cycle time is 10 minutes.
Ring-Buffer Mode
With the continuous recorder, data are stored on the flash memory in blocks. With an averaging time up to
and including 300 seconds, these blocks cover a time span of 10 minutes. With longer averaging times, the
blocks cover a time span of 2 hours. If while recording a record, the device determines that the free space
remaining on the record partition is too small, the oldest data block is deleted automatically. During this
process, complete time segments in the specified grid are always lost.
NOTE
i If the supply voltage of the device is disconnected intentionally or by mistake, measuring gaps will appear
for the period of the disconnection. However, the recorded data remains stored and can be read after
recovery of the supply voltage.
Parameters of the Continuous Recorder Function
[sccontiu-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-30 Parameters of the Continuous Recorder (as an Example)
the DIGSI Help .

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
• Recommended setting value (_:10111:161) Flash-memory size = 1000 MB

With the parameter Flash-memory size you specify a maximum memory capacity of the continuous
recorder on the mass storage.
oldest data in order to continue recording (ring buffer).
The record time is limited by the set flash memory size, number of routed tracks and by the averaging time.
NOTE
NOTE
i The setting aid Estimated record time is dimmed and thus, you cannot set or change it.
NOTE
available. The Estimated record time provides user information that helps to estimate how many
recordings can be stored in the reserved flash memory. The actual size of a continuous record depends on
the degree of compression and the number of stored events.
Parameter: Averaging Time
• Recommended setting value (_:10111:112) Averaging time = 600 s

With the parameter Averaging time, you determine the time range over which an average value is formed
and stored in the memory.
The average value is always formed over the entire averaging time.
NOTE
i The angles are not determined but rather used at the end of the averaging time with the current value.
7.2.8.5 Settings

General
• on
Control
_:10111:161 Continuous 1:Flash- 0.200 GB to 14.800 GB 1.000 GB
memory size
_:10111:102 Continuous 1:Estimated 0.0 day(s) to 214748364.7 0.0 day(s)
record time day(s)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

_:10111:112 Continuous 1:Averaging • 1s 600 s
time • 2s
• 5s
• 10 s
• 30 s
• 60 s
• 120 s
• 150 s
• 300 s
• 600 s
• 900 s

(Type)
Binary IO
_:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
Binary IO
_:10111:322 Continuous 1:Recorder formatted SPS O
7.2.9 Trend Recorder

Trend recorders are used for long-term recording and monitoring the process of voltage change within toler-
ance ranges that can be set using parameters. The flicker measurement can also be determined and stored
in the trend recorder.

The Trend recorder function is not preconfigured at the factory. Within the Recorder function group, the Trend
recorder can be operated a maximum of 2 times.
[dwtrend7k-160514-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

The trend recorder ensures capture and long-term supervision of frequency and voltage when the voltage
and frequency change. If a change occurs in the measurand with respect to the last captured RMS value
during the parameterized measuring interval, and this change exceeds the set tolerance range, the new RMS
value is recorded.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwTrendDef-220514-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-32 Operation of the Trend Recorder, Voltage Interruption
For the parameterization, specify a maximum memory capacity for the storage of recordings. The trend
recorder is organized as a ring buffer. When the memory is filled completely, the oldest data are overwritten
automatically.
Mode
The trend recorder operates only if the Mode is set to on .
Recording is interrupted if Mode is set to off during recording. Recording starts again if Mode is set again
to on .
NOTE
i In the mode off , the continuous recorder no longer records any measured values, but continues to
record device statuses (time jumps, modes on/off, as well as disconnection and recovery of the supply
voltage).
PQDif recordings are still generated, even though the trend recorder is set to the mode off. It is recom-
mended to delete the recorder instance in case of long-term non-use.
Ring-Buffer Mode
With the trend recorder, data is stored on the flash memory in blocks. The new data of the last 10-minute
interval are available every 10 minutes. If, while recording of a record, the device determines that the free
space remaining on the recorder partition is too small, the oldest data block is erased automatically. During
this process, complete time segments in the specified grid are always lost.
NOTE
i If the supply voltage of the device is disconnected intentionally or by mistake, measuring gaps will appear
for the period of the disconnection. However, the recorded data remains stored and can be read after
recovery of the supply voltage.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Settings of the Trend-Recorder Function
[scTrend-051014, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-33 Settings of the Trend Recorder
the DIGSI Help .
• Recommended setting value (_:10111:161) Flash-memory size = 1000 MB

With the parameter Flash-memory size , you specify a maximum memory capacity of the trend recorder
on the mass storage.
oldest data in order to continue recording (ring buffer).
The record time is limited by the set flash-memory size and the number of events occurring.
NOTE
reorganized and all recordings of the device – not just those of the changed recorder – are automatically
You can find the description for routing the measurand in chapter 7.5.1.2 Using Measurands .
You can find the description on setting the tolerances (frequency and voltage) in the chapters 7.5.2.4 Applica-
tion and Setting Notes and 7.5.3.3 Application and Setting Notes .
7.2.9.5 Settings

General
• on
Control
_:15361:161 Trend 1:Flash-memory 0.200 GB to 14.800 GB 1.000 GB
size

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

(Type)
Binary IO
_:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
Binary IO
_:15361:322 Trend 1:Recorder formatted SPS O
7.2.10 Sequence of Events

The sequence of events is described in more detail in Chapter 3.1.5.4 Sequence of Events Log.
7.2.11 Flow Control of Fault Records (Fast-Scan and Slow-Scan Recorder)
7.2.11.1 Function Description of the Retrigger Blocking Time
General
You can make the following settings in the fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder:
• Post-trigger time
• Maximum record time
• Retrigger Blocking Time
• Manual record time

You can find detailed information about the settings in chapters 7.2.6.1 Overview of Functions and
7.2.7.1 Overview of Functions .
There are more settings required in the recorders in addition to the settings for the time flows of the trigger,
for example memory used.
You can find more detailed information on this in chapter 7.2.6.3 Function Description .

The retrigger blocking time prevents a fault-record extension with repetitively occurring identical trigger
events. If another trigger is tripped during a recording, the post-trigger time is restarted and the recording is
extended. To prevent this, a retrigger blocking time can be defined. Identical triggers, which come during the
retrigger blocking time, are ignored and do not lead to an extension.
The retrigger blocking time is started together with the incoming trigger and is channel-specific. If the triggers
repeat, the retrigger blocking time is restarted.
NOTE
i If you configure the setting of the retrigger blocking time to be longer that the record time, no trigger events
are recorded within this time!

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.2.11.2 Triggering Without the Retrigger Blocking Time
Trigger with Pre-Trigger and Post-Trigger Times
[dwtrig01-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-34 Trigger with Pre-Trigger and Post-Trigger Times
a Trigger rising edge

b Trigger falling edge
c End of recording
t Time line
When a trigger event occurs, the start trigger (a) trips a fault record.
The first part of the recording records the signal profile before the trigger event (Pre-trigger time). Afterwards,
the fault (a) to (b) is recorded. To evaluate the signal behavior even after the failure, the further signal profile
up to the end of the post-trigger time (c) is registered.
Trigger with Maximum Record Time

The maximum record time is used for the limit of the fault-record length.
[dwtrig02-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-35 Trigger with Pre-trigger Time and Maximum Recording Time

c End of recording
t Time line

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
The first part of the recording of the fault record captures the signal profile before the trigger event (Pre-
trigger time). Afterwards the recording of the trigger events (a) to (b) is done. By setting the maximum record
time, the trigger event cannot be completely recorded and the maximum record time (c) ends the recording.
The configured post-trigger time is disregarded in this case.
Trigger with Post-Trigger Time and Maximum Record Time

The maximum record time is used for the limit of the fault-record length. The recording is ended before
reaching the maximum record time when the post-trigger time expires.
[dwtrig03-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-36 Trigger with Pre-Trigger Time, Post-Trigger Time, and Maximum Record Time

c End of recording of the 1st post-trigger time
d End of recording of the 2nd post-trigger time
e Maximum record time
t Time line
The trigger event is not recorded. The second trigger event extends the recording.
The recording is ended when the post-trigger time expires.
7.2.11.3 Triggering With the Retrigger Blocking Time
Other Triggers During the Retrigger Blocking Time

The figure below shows that the second trigger does not extend the recording.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwtriwei-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-37 Other Triggers During the Retrigger Blocking Time
a Trigger rising edge: Start of the recording of the pre-trigger time and the retrigger blocking time
b Trigger falling edge: Start of the post-trigger time
c End of the retrigger blocking time
d End of recording
t Time line
The trigger event does not extend the recording due to the retrigger blocking time.
Trigger with Ineffective Retrigger Blocking Time
[dwtrig05-140213-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-38 Trigger with Pre-Trigger Time, Post-Trigger Time, Maximum Record Time, and Ineffective

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
a Trigger rising edge: Start of the recording of the pre-trigger time and the retrigger blocking time,
as well as with the 1st trigger event start of the maximum record time
b Trigger falling edge: Start of the post-trigger time
d End of the post-trigger time
e End of the maximum record time
t Time line
The retrigger blocking time is ineffective with both trigger events because the duration of the failure is longer
than the configured retrigger blocking time.
Trigger events can result in a recording or in extending the recording. After expiration of this post-trigger time,
the recording continues, because the 2nd trigger event is already detected and recorded.
The configured maximum record time has no influence on the recording because it is longer than all profiles.
Repeated Triggers
To avoid repeated triggers of the device due to limit violations within the shortest time, you can configure a
retrigger block.
[dwtrigka-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-39 Example 1: Repeated Triggers in the Same Channel
c End of the repeated retrigger blocking time
d End of the maximum record time
t Time line
When a trigger event occurs, the start trigger (a) trips a fault record. The recording is done in the same way
as in the previous example.
If another limit violation of the same channel (d) occurs within the retrigger blocking time, this does not extend
the fault record but rather only restarts the channel-specific retrigger blocking time.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwtrigwi-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-40 Example 2: Triggers in 2 Channels
c End of the retrigger blocking time, channel 1
d End of the retrigger blocking time, channel 2
e End of the post-trigger time
f End of the maximum record time
t Time line
When a trigger event occurs, the start trigger (a) trips a fault record. Another limit violation of the second
channel occurs within the retrigger blocking time of the first channel (c). This extends the fault record (e)
because the retrigger block acts only on the appropriate channel.
Each individual channel can trip a retrigger. The retrigger blocking time can be activated separately for each
analog input.
Retrigger Blocking Time with Trigger Reason

Each threshold (Max. trigger, Min. trigger, dM/dt rise (/Filter time) or dM/dt drop (/
Filter time)) of a channel has its own retrigger blocking time. That is, for example, one Min. trigger
can extend the recording started by the Max. trigger once (see the figure below).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwmintri-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-41 A New Trigger Reason (Min. Trigger) Extends the Fault Record

c End of the retrigger blocking time (Max. trigger)
d End of the retrigger blocking time (Min. trigger)
t Time line
If the identical trigger reason (for example, Iph rms: C) occurs again during the retrigger blocking time, the
retrigger blocking time restarts. The fault record is not extended. A new recording is only possible once a
trigger occurs outside the expired retrigger blocking time (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwmaxtri-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-42 The Fault Record is not Extended with the Same Trigger Reason and Within a Retrigger
Blocking Time

d End of the newly started retrigger blocking time
g Start of a new recording
t Time line
All other active channels can retrigger the fault recorder and thus extend the recording.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i • A shortened record results when the device is in the ramp-up phase, a trigger occurs and the pre-
trigger time buffer is not filled by this.
• If the device is in the ramp-up phase and a failure has already occurred, the trigger is ignored.
• If a time jump occurs during the pre-trigger time and before triggering, the recorded pre-trigger time is
reduced to the time interval between the time jump and the trigger time.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.3 Function Description of the Analog and Binary Triggers
The fast-scan and slow-scan recorders have analog and binary triggers.
Each analog trigger can be configured as primary, secondary or percentage value, relative to the rated value,
and switched into the mode ON, OFF or Test.
Fault records generated in test mode are marked with the Test (Test flag) identifier.
Many trigger combinations can be implemented using a CFC chart. To do this, various indications in CFC
blocks are processed into one CFC output signal that can then, for example, be routed to the External Start.
Analog Triggers
Table 7-5 Description of Analog Triggers
Analog Triggers Description

Frequency trigger (Also see 7.4.3.1 Overview of Functions )
Voltage trigger (Also see 7.4.1.1 Overview of Functions )
Current trigger (Also see 7.4.2.1 Overview of Functions )
Power trigger (Also see 7.4.4.1 Overview of Functions )
In these function blocks level triggers (Min/Max) and gradient trigger (dM/dt) can be configured.
Binary Triggers
Table 7-6 Using Binary Triggers
Binary Triggers Use

Manual Start Function key (via >Manual start)
Binary Inputs Via >External start
GOOSE trigger Via >External start
CFC trigger Via >External start
Manual Start and External Start are each described in the Chapters 7.3.3.1 Manual Trigger Start and
7.3.3.2 External Trigger Start .
Manual Start and External Start are 2 inputs on each recorder that can be used to start recording. The func-
tion is identical for both triggers. Manual Start is primarily used during commissioning and maintenance.
External Start is of universal use.
7.3.2 Function Description - Analog Trigger
7.3.2.1 Structure of the Analog Trigger

There are 4 trigger functions available in the fault recorder:
• Frequency trigger (also see 7.4.3.1 Overview of Functions )
• Voltage trigger (also see 7.4.1.1 Overview of Functions )
• Current trigger (also see 7.4.2.1 Overview of Functions )
• Power trigger (also see 7.4.4.1 Overview of Functions )

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwfnreco-140313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-43 Structure of the Trigger Functions
7.3.2.2 Trigger Functions of the Analog Trigger

For a trigger detection, the trigger blocks compare the applied actual value (measured value) with the config-
ured trigger criteria (threshold values). The appropriate trigger starts a fault record in the fast-scan and/or
slow-scan recorder with the detection of a trigger criterion (exceeding or dropping below a set parameter
threshold value). The threshold values are checked on a half-period cycle for all measured values.
You can set different threshold values and record-time settings for the fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan
recorder. The duration of the fault recording depends on the configured record times (pre-trigger time, post-
trigger time, maximum record time). The duration can be extended by repeatedly exceeding or dropping
below the threshold value within the record time (retriggering).
The fault record is ended after reaching the maximum record time in any case.
7.3.2.3 Level Trigger

Triggering occurs as soon as the measurands exceed (Max. trigger) or drop below (Min. trigger) the
corresponding limiting value. The max level trigger is available for all measurands. The min level trigger
cannot be selected for negative-sequence and zero-sequence systems.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Hysteresis
If a measurand reaches precisely the magnitude of the maximum or minimum limiting value for level triggers
without hysteresis with slight fluctuations, there are repeated, undesirable fault recordings or undesirable
extended recordings due to retriggering. For this reason, hysteresis is permanently set for all level trigger
variables. This hysteresis is 0.2 % for frequency triggers and usually 2 % of the configured threshold value for
all other trigger variables in each channel. The hysteresis is permanently set for very small threshold values.
After the limiting value is exceeded or dropped below, the signal must have left the hysteresis range. Only
afterwards can triggering again take place with a repeated exceeding or dropping below a limiting value.
[dwhyst01-130213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-44 Hysteresis
• Start: At this time, a threshold-value violation is detected.
• End: At this time, a detected threshold-value violation is canceled.
7.3.2.4 Gradient Trigger (dM/dt)

The gradient of a signal is the level change over time. The gradient-trigger condition complies with alternating
variables when the difference of 2 measured values is greater than the configured threshold in the interval of
the configured filter time. Differentiation is made between an increasing gradient (dM/dt rise) and a
decreasing gradient (dM/dt drop).
The gradient trigger cannot be selected for negative-sequence or zero-sequence systems.
The figure below shows a typical profile of the power frequency.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[scgrad01-151112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-45 dM/dt
dM Change of the measurand

dt Change of the filter time
7.3.3 Function Description - Binary Trigger
7.3.3.1 Manual Trigger Start

The fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder can be manually triggered.
They can trigger the start of the recording as follows:
• Manually by the fault recorder (function key on the operation panel)
• Via DIGSI 5
• Via any IEC 61850 client (e.g., SICAM PQS with IEC 61850)
NOTE
i The manual trigger is started by pressing the function keys routed to the >Manual start. In the applica-
tion templates, Function key 1 is the default for the fast-scan recorder and Function key 2 is the default for
the slow-scan recorder (see Figure 7-49).
The record time depends on the configured value Manual record time for the manual trigger start.
Manual Start of the Trigger with Information Routing

For the fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder, you route the manual trigger start in the Information
routing in the matrix row >Manual start to the inputs that can be assigned binary signals.
[scmantrm-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-46 Routing the Manual Trigger Start

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
If you want to manually start the recording using a function key, you can assign the keys with S (switchover)
or P (trigger pulse).
Siemens recommends to preferably use the setting P (trigger pulse), also see 7.2.3 Function Description).
Recording is started by pressing the routed function key on the operation panel and the activated recorder
records the current signal profile.
EXAMPLE of Setting the Manual Trigger
• Open the information routing
• Open the function group Recording-> Function Fast-scan recorder.-> Function block Fst-scan rec..
Route the signal >Manual start.
• For example, set the trigger pulse (P) in the tab Function keys to the function key F1. Then route the
signals Recording started and Recording ended to LED1 and LED2.
This is already the default in the application template.
[schanddi-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-47 Routing the Signal >Manual Start
The assignments for the function key and the LEDs are completed with these steps.
• The signal Recording started lights up as long as the recording is running.
The signal Recording finished lights briefly after the recording is finished.
Manual Trigger Tripping by DIGSI 5

You can start the manual trigger tripping from the DIGSI 5 interface by proceeding as follows in your project:
• Place the mouse cursor on your project and right-click Connect with Device.
• Next, go to the project tree and open the Online access tab.
• Click 7KE85 (assigned).
• Click Fast and slow-scan fault records.
• In the menu bar, click Start fault records.
• A dialog window opens: Select the relevant fault records (Fast Scan, Slow Scan).
• The fault records can now be displayed in SIGRA.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[scmantrd-040613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-48 Manual Trigger Tripping via DIGSI 5
Manual Trigger Start via IEC 61850 Clients

The manual triggering of a fault record is possible from all connected IEC 61850 clients, e.g., SICAM PQS.
Information on this can be found in the manual of the appropriate device.
Changing the Function-Key Names in DIGSI 5

In the application templates, the manual trigger is the default on Function key 1 for the fast-scan recorder and
Function key 2 for the slow-scan recorder.
On the display in the device, Man. start fast-scan appears for F1 and Man. start slow-scan1 for F2.
If the signals for the function keys are re-routed, we recommend changing the names.
You can change the name of the manual trigger in DIGSI 5 using the following procedure:
• Open your project in the project tree.
• Double-click Hardware and protocols.
• Click at the top right on the large device display.
• Then click at the bottom on Properties, next on the function key of your choice and change the name.
[scfnkeys-191112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-49 Procedure When Changing the Function-Key Names
You can find more information on the default setting of function keys in the application templates in chapter
4.2 Application Template and Functional Scope for the Fault Recorder .

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.3.3.2 External Trigger Start

An external start (>External start) of the fault recording is possible for the fast-scan recorder and the slow-
scan recorder. The record time is made up of the pre-trigger time, the trigger time and the post-trigger time.
The recording is limited by the maximum record time (the same as with analog trigger).
NOTE
i Only one routing is possible to the external start, that is:

• Either one binary input
• Or one CFC output
• Or one function key
External Start of the Trigger with Information Routing

For the fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder, you route the manual trigger start in the Information
routing in the matrix row >Manual start to the inputs that can be assigned binary signals.
[scexttri-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-50 Routing the External Trigger Start
Route the external trigger start according to the same principle as the manual trigger (refer to 7.3.3.1 Manual
Trigger Start).
If you want to manual start the recording via a binary input, you can assign the inputs with either H (active
with voltage) or with L (active without voltage).
In the Information routing the indication on the tripping of the external trigger can be routed to a binary output
or an LED (refer to 7.2.3 Function Description).
The external start is also required for triggering via a CFC chart (see 7.3.3.4 Trigger Start Using Logic Block
Chart).
7.3.3.3 GOOSE Trigger

To start a fault record in the fast-scan recorder or in the slow-scan recorder, the status of the binary variables
and the analog values in the GOOSE message can be used as the trigger condition. You may connect each

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
IEC GOOSE data type in a CFC chart to one trigger source. You can select the indications and their trigger
conditions on the basis of the imported SCD file (see IEC61850 Communication Protocol Manual ).
For the GOOSE trigger, you preferably use the Boolean data type.
So that the indication can, for example, be routed to >External start, the GOOSE input must be routed via a
logic block chart (refer to the DIGSI 5 manual and following chapter).
7.3.3.4 Trigger Start Using Logic Block Chart

This function enables a modular, flexible combination of the trigger criteria. The following inputs and outputs
are supported:
• Single-point and double-point indications
• Analog values (absolute values or phases)
• Boolean signals
• GOOSE messages
The creation of CFC charts is described in detail in the DIGSI 5 manual. The CFC chart can be created in the
project tree under Plans.
The trigger, that you select, for example, for the external or manual start of the fault record in the logic block
chart must in all cases be an AND operation.
[sccfctri-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-51 Example of a Logic Block Chart with AND Operation Trigger for External Start of the Fault
Record.
NOTE
i If you have AND operation signals in the logic block chart, then avoid a single interconnection of these
signals in the Trigger routing, because this will remove this AND-operation.
7.3.3.5 Triggers on Indications

In the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders, it is possible to trigger on SPS indications and to record them.
The following routing options are available in the information routing:
Routing Symbol Description
X The SPS indication is only routed.
T Triggering is done on the SPS indication.
XT Triggering is done on the SPS indication. The SPS indication is also recorded.
For triggering on binary inputs, the following procedure is recommended:

• Open the DIGSI library.
• Instantiate a user-defined function group.
• Then add a user-defined function block to the user-defined function group.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
• Open the User-defined signals folder and add an SPS indication to the user-defined function block.
• Open the information routing.
• Route the SPS indication to a binary input by selecting the routing option H. The SPS signal is thereby
routed as active with voltage.
• Move the menu bar from left to right and route the SPS indication to the recorder as desired.
[ScTrigDevInd-010715, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-52 Procedure: Trigger on SPS Indication

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.4 Trigger Functions
7.4.1 Voltage Trigger

Voltage triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger) in
the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders. It is triggered by fundamental values, RMS values or on symmetrical
components.

The function Voltage trigger is configurable in the 3-phase voltage and 3-phase voltage/current function
groups. The structure of the function Voltage trigger is shown in the following figure:
[dwfnvolt-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-53 Structure/Embedding of the 3-Phase Voltage or 3-Phase Voltage-Current Function
A maximum of 3 function blocks of the same type can be entered or removed within the function. In order to
distinguish the function blocks, they automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the function
block, e.g.,. V Fund. Trig 1, V Fund. Trig 2 and V Fund. Trig 3.
Each function block contains the level trigger Max. trigger and Min. trigger, as well as the gradient
trigger dM/dt rise (/Filter time) and dM/dt drop active of the corresponding measurand.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating state of a voltage trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwlotriu-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-54 Logic Diagram of a Voltage Trigger
The function Voltage Trigger is subdivided into Level and Gradient trigger.
The Level trigger monitors the measurand for minimum and maximum limit violations. The Gradient trigger
monitors the positive slope (increasing) and the negative slope (decreasing) of the measurand for limit viola-
tion. The gradient is formed based on the set filtering time.
A hysteresis of 2 % of the setting value is preset for the level and gradient triggers. This is equal to 0.980 p.u.
for the max. and gradient trigger and 1.020 p.u. for the Min trigger.
Exceeding or dropping below one of the set threshold values leads to trigger tripping. The trigger tripping is
however first effective on the recorders, if you have routed the trigger to the recorder.
Function Blocks
Function blocks of the Voltage Trigger function:
• V Fund. Trig: Setting of the trigger for the fundamental-component value of the measured voltage
• Trig. V RMS: Setting the trigger for the RMS value of the measured voltage
• Trigger V0: Setting of the trigger for the zero-sequence components of the measured voltage
• Trigger V1: Setting of the trigger for the positive-sequence components of the measured voltage
• Trigger V2: Setting of the trigger for the negative-sequence components of the measured voltage
NOTE
i The triggers V Fund. and V RMS are 3-phase building blocks (VA, VB, VC, VAB, VBC, VCA). The set threshold
values have the same effect on all phases.
NOTE
i The thresholds can be set in the primary, secondary, and percentage view. All subsequent setting values
are shown in the secondary view.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Mode
The trigger is switched on, off, or in test mode. In test mode, the fault records are marked with a test flag.
You can find more information on the mode in chapter 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in
DIGSI 5 .
Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the function block analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC. This parameter can be adjusted
in the function blocks V Fund. Trig and V RMS Trig.
NOTE
i Take into account that the setting of the trigger in percent always related to the connection type phase-
to-phase.
Switching on Trigger Max./Trigger Min.

With the parameters Max. trigger active and Min. trigger active, you define whether the
respective level trigger is active or inactive.
Trigger Max./Trigger Min.

With the parameters Max. trigger and Min. trigger, you define from which threshold value the acti-
vated level trigger starts a fault record.
Switch on dM/dt Rise - dM/dt Drop

With the parameters dM/dt rise active and dM/dt drop active, you define whether the respective
gradient trigger is active or inactive.
Filtering Time
With the Filter time parameter, you define the number of the periods with which the gradient is deter-
mined.
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Voltage

With the parameters dM/dt rise (/Filter time) and dM/dt drop (/Filter time), you define
from which threshold value within the set filtering time a fault record is started.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.4.1.4 Application and Setting Notes Trig V Fund (Fundamental Component)
Function Block Trig. V Fund
[ScVolHys_2014-06-30, 1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-55 Function Block Trig. V Fund
This figure applies in the same manner for all voltage triggers
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:9571:1) Mode = off

With the Mode parameter, you activate the trigger for normal operation (On) or the test mode (Test).
on The function block Trig. V fund is activated and the fundamental compo-
nent is monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameter.
off The function block Trig. V fund is deactivated.
test The function block Trig. V fund is activated for test purposes.
Parameter: Measured Value
• Default setting (_:9571:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define independently of the connection type, whether to trigger
on phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground variables.
phase-to-ground The triggering is done on the basis of phase-to-ground variables.
phase-to-phase The triggering is done on the basis of phase-to-phase variables.
Parameter: Max. Trigger Active/Max. Trigger/Max. Trigger Hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9571:101) Max. trigger active = yes
• Default setting (_:9571:105) Max. trigger = 120.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:113) Max. trigger hysteresis = 0.980 p.u.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage of
the fundamental component and prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The voltage of the fundamental component is monitored for overvoltage.
no The voltage of the fundamental component is not monitored for over-
voltage.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.980 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter Max. trigger and can
be adjusted.
Parameter: Min. Trigger Active/Min. Trigger Hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9571:102) Min. trigger active = yes
• Default setting (_:9571:106) Min. trigger = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:114) Min. trigger hysteresis = 1.020 p.u.

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage of
the fundamental component for dropping below the set values.
yes The voltage of the fundamental component is monitored for undervoltage.
no The voltage of the fundamental component is not monitored for under-
voltage.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 1.020 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter Min. trigger and can
be adjusted.
Parameter: dM/dt Rise Active - dM/dt Rise (/Filter Time) dM/dt Rise Hysteresis - Filter Time
• Default setting (_:9571:103) dM/dt rise active = no
• Default setting (_:9571:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:115) dM/dt rise hysteresis = 0.980 p.u.
• Default setting (_:9571:112) Filter time = 2 periods

With the dM/dt rise active parameter, you activate the gradient trigger in order to monitor the positive
gradients of the voltage of the fundamental component using the set filtering time (input in periods)
yes The positive gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is not
monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.980 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter dM/dt rise (/Filter
time) and can be adjusted.
Parameter: dM/dt Drop Active - dM/dt Drop (/Filter Time) - dM/dt Drop Hysteresis - Filter Time
• Default setting (_:9571:104) dM/dt drop active = no
• Default setting (_:9571:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:116) dM/dt drop hysteresis = 0.980 p.u.

With the dM/dt drop active parameter, you activate the gradient trigger in order to monitor the negative
gradients of the voltage of the fundamental component using the set filtering time (input in periods).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

yes The negative gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is
monitored.
no The negative gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is not
monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.980 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter dM/dt drop (/Filter
7.4.1.5 Application and Setting Notes V RMS Trig (RMS Value)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block V RMS Trig is activated and the RMS value of the
voltage is monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameter.
off The function block V RMS Trig is deactivated.
test The function block V RMS Trig is activated for test purposes.
Parameter: Measured value
• Default setting (_:9601:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define independently of the connection type, whether to trigger
on phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground variables.
phase-to-ground The triggering is done on the basis of phase-to-ground variables.
phase-to-phase The triggering is done on the basis of phase-to-phase variables.

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS
value of the voltage and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The RMS value of the voltage is monitored for overvoltage.
no The RMS value of the voltage is not monitored for overvoltage.
be adjusted.
Parameter: Min. Trigger Active/Min. Trigger/Min. Trigger Hysteresis

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS
value of the voltage and to prevent it from dropping below the set value.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

yes The RMS value of the voltage is monitored for undervoltage.
no The RMS value of the voltage is not monitored for undervoltage.
be adjusted.
Parameter: dM/dt Rise Active - dM/dt Rise (/Filter Time) - dM/dt Rise Hysteresis - Filter Time

gradients of the RMS value of the voltage using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is not monitored.

gradients of the RMS value of the voltage using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is not monitored.
7.4.1.6 Application and Setting Notes - V0 Trigger (Zero-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block V0 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the zero-
sequence system is monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameter.
off The function block V0 Trigger is deactivated.
test The function block V0 Trigger is activated for test purposes.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor in the zero-
sequence system the voltage and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The voltage in the zero-sequence system is monitored for overvoltage.
no The voltage in the zero-sequence system is not monitored for overvoltage.
be adjusted.

gradients of the voltage in the zero-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the voltage in the zero-sequence system is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the voltage in the zero-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.4.1.7 Application and Setting Notes - V1 Trigger (Positive-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block V1 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the positive-

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage in
the positive-sequence system and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

yes The voltage in the positive-sequence system is monitored for overvoltage.
no The voltage in the positive-sequence system is not monitored for over-
voltage.
be adjusted.
Parameter: Min. Trigger Active/Min. Trigger/Min Trigger Hysteresis

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage in
the positive-sequence system and to prevent ut from dropping below the set value.
yes The voltage in the positive-sequence system is monitored for undervoltage.
no The voltage in the positive-sequence system is not monitored for under-
voltage.
be adjusted.

gradients of the voltage in the positive-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the voltage in the positive-sequence system is
monitored.
no The positive gradient of the voltage in the positive-sequence system is not
monitored.

gradients of the voltage in the positive-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the voltage in the positive-sequence system is
monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

no The negative gradient of the voltage in the positive-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.4.1.8 Application and Setting Notes - V2 Trigger (Negative-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block V2 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the negative-

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor in the nega-
tive-sequence system the voltage for exceeding the set values.
yes The voltage in the negative-sequence system is monitored for overvoltage.
no The voltage in the negative-sequence system is not monitored for over-
voltage.
be adjusted.

gradients of the voltage in the negative-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the voltage in the negative-sequence system is
monitored.
no The positive gradient of the voltage in the negative-sequence system is not
monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.4.1.9 Settings

Trig. V fund 1
_:9571:1 Trig. V fund 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9571:9 Trig. V fund 1:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value • phase-to-phase
_:9571:101 Trig. V fund 1:Max. • no yes
trigger active • yes
_:9571:105 Trig. V fund 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
trigger
_:9571:113 Trig. V fund 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9571:102 Trig. V fund 1:Min. • no yes
_:9571:106 Trig. V fund 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
trigger
_:9571:114 Trig. V fund 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9571:103 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active • yes
_:9571:107 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt rise 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(/Filter time)
_:9571:115 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9571:104 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt • no no
drop active • yes
_:9571:108 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
drop (/Filter time)
_:9571:116 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
drop hysteresis
_:9571:112 Trig. V fund 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trig. V RMS 1
_:9601:1 Trig. V RMS 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9601:9 Trig. V RMS 1:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value • phase-to-phase
_:9601:101 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. • no yes
_:9601:105 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
trigger
_:9601:113 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9601:102 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. • no yes
_:9601:106 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
trigger
_:9601:114 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

_:9601:103 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active • yes
_:9601:107 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt rise 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(/Filter time)
_:9601:115 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9601:104 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt • no no
drop active • yes
_:9601:108 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
drop (/Filter time)
_:9601:116 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
drop hysteresis
_:9601:112 Trig. V RMS 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trigger V0 1
_:9631:1 Trigger V0 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9631:101 Trigger V0 1:Max. • no yes
_:9631:105 Trigger V0 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
trigger
_:9631:113 Trigger V0 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9631:103 Trigger V0 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active • yes
_:9631:107 Trigger V0 1:dM/dt rise 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(/Filter time)
_:9631:115 Trigger V0 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9631:112 Trigger V0 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trigger V1 1
• on
• test
trigger
trigger hysteresis
_:9661:102 Trigger V1 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active • yes
_:9661:106 Trigger V1 1:Min. trigger 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
_:9661:114 Trigger V1 1:Min. trigger 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
hysteresis
active • yes
(/Filter time)
hysteresis

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

_:9661:104 Trigger V1 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active • yes
_:9661:108 Trigger V1 1:dM/dt drop 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(/Filter time)
_:9661:116 Trigger V1 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
Trigger V2 1
• on
• test
trigger
trigger hysteresis
active • yes
(/Filter time)
hysteresis

(Type)
Trig. V fund 1
_:9571:54 Trig. V fund 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9571:52 Trig. V fund 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9571:53 Trig. V fund 1:Health ENS O
_:9571:301 Trig. V fund 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trig. V RMS 1
_:9601:54 Trig. V RMS 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9601:52 Trig. V RMS 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9601:53 Trig. V RMS 1:Health ENS O
_:9601:301 Trig. V RMS 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger V0 1
_:9631:54 Trigger V0 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9631:52 Trigger V0 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9631:53 Trigger V0 1:Health ENS O
_:9631:301 Trigger V0 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger V1 1

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

(Type)
Trigger V2 1
7.4.2 Current Trigger

Current triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger) in
the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders. It is triggered by fundamental values, RMS values or on symmetrical
components.

The Current trigger function can be configured in the 3-phase voltage / current function group.. The structure
of the function Current trigger is shown in the following figure:
[dwfncurr-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-56 Structure/Embedding of the 3-Phase Voltage/Current Function
A maximum of 3 function blocks of the same type can be entered or removed within the function. For unam-
biguous differentiation the function blocks automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the func-
tion block, for example, Trig I RMS 1, Trig I RMS 2, and Trig I RMS 3.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating state of the current trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwlotrii-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-57 Logic Diagrams of the Current Trigger
The function Current trigger is subdivided into Level and Gradient trigger.
for the max. and gradient trigger and to 1.020 p.u. for the Min trigger.
Exceeding or dropping below one of the set threshold value leads to trigger tripping. The trigger tripping is
however effective on the recorders only if you have routed the trigger to the recorder.
NOTE
Function Blocks
Function blocks of the Current trigger function:
• I Ground. Trig: Setting of the trigger for the fundamental-component value of the measured current
• Trig. I RMS: Setting of the trigger for the RMS value of the measured current
• Trigger I0: Setting of the trigger for the zero-sequence component of the measured current
• Trigger I1: Setting of the trigger for the positive-sequence component of the measured current
• Trigger I2: Setting of the trigger for the negative-sequence component of the measured current
NOTE
i The triggers I Ground. Trig and Trig. I RMS are 3-phase building blocks (I1, I2, I3). The set threshold values
have the same effect on all phases.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
Mode
DIGSI 5 .
Max. trigger active/Min. trigger active

Max. trigger/Min. trigger

dM/dt rise active - dM/dt drop active

gradient trigger is active or inactive.
Filter time
mined.
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Current

from which threshold value the parameterized filtering time starts a fault record.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.4.2.4 Application and Setting Notes I Ground. Trig
Function Block Trig. I Fund
[ScCurHys_2014-06-30, 1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-58 Function Block Trig. I Fund
This figure applies in the same manner for all current triggers
Parameter: Mode

With the parameter Mode , you activate the trigger for normal operation (On) or for the test mode (Test).
on Function block Trig. I fund is activated and the fundamental component
monitored according to the set trigger parameters.
off Function block Trig. I fund is deactivated.
test Function block Trig. I fund is activated for test purposes.
• Default setting (_:9751:105) Max. trigger = 1.200 A

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current of
the fundamental component and prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The current of the fundamental component is monitored for overcurrent.
no The current of the fundamental component is not monitored for overcurrent.
be adjusted.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
• Default setting (_:9751:106) Min. trigger = 0.800 A

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current of
the fundamental component and prevent it from dropping below the set values.
yes The current of the fundamental component is monitored for undercurrent.
no The current of the fundamental component is not monitored for undercur-
rent.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9751:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 0.300 A

gradients of the current of the fundamental component, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the current of the fundamental component is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the current of the fundamental component is not
monitored.
• Default setting (_:9751:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 0.300 A

gradients of the current of the fundamental component, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the current of the fundamental component is moni-
tored.
no The negative gradient of the current of the fundamental component is not
monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.4.2.5 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Qsum
Parameter: Mode

With the Mode parameter, you activate the trigger for normal operation (On) or for the test mode (Test).
on The function block I RMS Trig is activated and the RMS value of the
voltage is monitored according to the set trigger parameter.
off The function block I RMS Trig is deactivated.
test The function block I RMS Trig is activated for test purposes.
Parameters: Max. trigger active/Max. trigger/Max. trigger hysteresis

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS
value of the current and to prevent exceeding the set values.
yes The RMS value of the current is monitored for overcurrent.
no The RMS value of the current is not monitored for overcurrent.
The hysteresis is preset the factory to 0.980 p.u. of the parameter Max. trigger and can be adjusted.
Parameters: Min. trigger active/Min. trigger/Min. trigger hysteresis

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS
value of the current and to prevent it from dropping below the set values.
yes The RMS value of the current is monitored for undercurrent.
no The RMS value of the current is not monitored for undercurrent.
be adjusted.
Parameters: dM/dt rise active - dM/dt rise (/Filter time) - dM/dt rise hysteresis - Filter time

gradients of the RMS value of the current, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the RMS value of the current is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the RMS value of the current is not monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Parameters: dM/dt drop active - dM/dt drop (/Filter time) - Filter time

gradients of the RMS value of the current, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the RMS value of the current is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the RMS value of the current is not monitored.
7.4.2.6 Application and Setting Notes - I0 Trigger (Zero-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block I0 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the zero-
off The function block I0 Trigger is deactivated.
test The function block I0 Trigger is activated for test purposes.

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current in
the zero-sequence system and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The current in the zero-sequence system is monitored for overcurrent.
no The current in the zero-sequence system is not monitored for overcurrent.
be adjusted.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
gradients of the current in the zero-sequence system, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the current in the zero-sequence system is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the current in the zero-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.4.2.7 Application and Setting Notes I1 Trigger (Positive-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block I1 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the positive-
sequence system is monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameters.

the positive-sequence system and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The current in the positive-sequence system is monitored for overcurrent.
no The current in the positive-sequence system is not monitored for overcur-
rent.
be adjusted.

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current in
the positive-sequence system and to prevent it from dropping below the set values.
yes The current in the positive-sequence system is monitored for undercurrent.
no The current in the positive-sequence system is not monitored for undercur-
rent.
be adjusted.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

gradients of the current in the positive-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the current in the positive-sequence system is
monitored.
no The positive gradient of the current in the positive-sequence system is not
monitored.
• Default setting (_:9841:104) dM/dt drop active = yes

gradients of the current in the positive-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the current in the positive-sequence system is
monitored.
no The negative gradient of the current in the positive-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.4.2.8 Application and Setting Notes - I2 Trigger (Negative-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block I2 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the negative-

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
the negative-sequence system and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The current in the negative-sequence system is monitored for overcurrent.
no The current in the negative-sequence system is not monitored for overcur-
rent.
be adjusted.

gradients of the current in the negative-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the current in the negative-sequence system is
monitored.
no The positive gradient of the current in the negative-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.4.2.9 Settings

Trig. I fund 1
_:9751:1 Trig. I fund 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9751:101 Trig. I fund 1:Max. • no yes
_:9751:105 Trig. I fund 1:Max. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
trigger 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 500.000 A 6.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 6.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9751:113 Trig. I fund 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9751:102 Trig. I fund 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active • yes
_:9751:106 Trig. I fund 1:Min. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 500.000 A 4.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 4.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

_:9751:114 Trig. I fund 1:Min. trigger 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9751:103 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active • yes
_:9751:107 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt rise 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
(/Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 500.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9751:115 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9751:104 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active • yes
_:9751:108 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt drop 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9751:116 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9751:112 Trig. I fund 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trig. I RMS 1
_:9781:1 Trig. I RMS 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9781:101 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. • no yes
_:9781:105 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 6.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9781:113 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9781:102 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. • no yes
_:9781:106 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 4.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9781:114 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9781:103 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active • yes

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

_:9781:107 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt rise 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9781:115 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9781:104 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active • yes
_:9781:108 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt drop 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9781:116 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9781:112 Trig. I RMS 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trigger I0 1
_:9811:1 Trigger I0 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9811:101 Trigger I0 1:Max. trigger • no yes
active • yes
_:9811:105 Trigger I0 1:Max. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 500.000 A 6.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 6.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9811:113 Trigger I0 1:Max. trigger 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9811:103 Trigger I0 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active • yes
_:9811:107 Trigger I0 1:dM/dt rise (/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 500.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9811:115 Trigger I0 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9811:112 Trigger I0 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trigger I1 1
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

active • yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 500.000 A 6.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 6.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
hysteresis
_:9841:102 Trigger I1 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active • yes
_:9841:106 Trigger I1 1:Min. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 500.000 A 4.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 4.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9841:114 Trigger I1 1:Min. trigger 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
hysteresis
active • yes
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
hysteresis
_:9841:104 Trigger I1 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active • yes
_:9841:108 Trigger I1 1:dM/dt drop 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9841:116 Trigger I1 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
Trigger I2 1
• on
• test
active • yes

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 500.000 A 6.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 6.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
hysteresis
active • yes
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 250.000 A 1.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
hysteresis

(Type)
Trig. I fund 1
_:9751:54 Trig. I fund 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9751:52 Trig. I fund 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9751:53 Trig. I fund 1:Health ENS O
_:9751:301 Trig. I fund 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trig. I RMS 1
_:9781:54 Trig. I RMS 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9781:52 Trig. I RMS 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9781:53 Trig. I RMS 1:Health ENS O
_:9781:301 Trig. I RMS 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger I0 1
_:9811:54 Trigger I0 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9811:52 Trigger I0 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9811:53 Trigger I0 1:Health ENS O
_:9811:301 Trigger I0 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger I1 1
Trigger I2 1

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

(Type)
7.4.3 Frequency Trigger

Frequency triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger)
in the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders. It is triggered on the power frequency.

The function Frequency trigger is configurable in the 3-phase voltage and 3-phase voltage/current function
groups.
The structure of the function Frequency trigger is shown in the following figure:
[dwfnfreq-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
biguous differentiating the function blocks automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the func-
tion block, for example, Frq. Trigger 1, Frq. Trigger 2, Frq. Trigger 3.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating state of the frequency trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwlotrif-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-60 Logic Diagram of the Frequency Trigger
The function Frequency trigger is subdivided into Level and Gradient trigger.
A hysteresis of 0.2 % of the setting value is preset for the level and gradient triggers. This is equal to 0.998
p.u. for the max. and gradient trigger and to 1.020 p.u. for the Min trigger.
Function Block
The Frequency trigger contains the function block Frq. Trigger 1 with which you can set the trigger for moni-
toring the power frequency.
NOTE
Mode
DIGSI 5 .
Max. trigger active/Min. trigger active

With the parameters Max. trigger active and Min. trigger active, you can define whether the

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Max. trigger/Min. trigger

With the parameters Max. trigger and Min. trigger, you can define from which threshold value the
activated level trigger starts a fault record.
dM/dt rise active - dM/dt drop active

With the parameters dM/dt rise active and dM/dt drop active, you can define, whether the respec-
tive gradient trigger is active or inactive.
Filter Time
mined.
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Power Frequency
7.4.3.4 Application and Setting Notes - Frequency Trigger
Function Block Frequency Trigger (Trigger f)
[ScFrqHys_2014-06-30, 1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-61 Function Block Trigger f
Parameter: Mode

on Function block Trigger f is activated and the power frequency monitored
according to the set trigger parameters.
off Function block Trigger f is deactivated.
test Function block Trigger f is activated for test purposes.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
• Default setting (_:9721:102) Max. trigger = 50.200 Hz

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the power
frequency and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The power frequency is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The power frequency is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.998 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter Max. trigger and
can be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9721:104) Min. trigger = 49.600 Hz

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the power
frequency and prevent it from dropping below the set value.
yes The power frequency is monitored for dropping below the set value.
no The power frequency is not monitored for dropping below the set value.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 1.002 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter Min. trigger and
can be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9721:106) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 0.100 Hz

gradients of the sum apparent power using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the power frequency is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the power frequency is not monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.998 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter dM/dt rise (/
Filter time) and can be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9721:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 0.100 Hz

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
gradients of the power frequency using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the power frequency is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the power frequency is not monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.998 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter dM/dt drop (/
Filter time) and can be adjusted.
7.4.3.5 Settings

Trigger f 1
_:9721:1 Trigger f 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9721:101 Trigger f 1:Max. trigger • no yes
active • yes
_:9721:102 Trigger f 1:Max. trigger 50.000 Hz to 60.000 Hz 50.200 Hz
_:9721:113 Trigger f 1:Max. trigger 0.990 p.u. to 0.999 p.u. 0.998 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:103 Trigger f 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active • yes
_:9721:104 Trigger f 1:Min. trigger 25.000 Hz to 50.000 Hz 49.600 Hz
_:9721:114 Trigger f 1:Min. trigger 1.001 p.u. to 1.010 p.u. 1.002 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:105 Trigger f 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active • yes
_:9721:106 Trigger f 1:dM/dt rise (/ 0.005 Hz to 60.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Filter time)
_:9721:115 Trigger f 1:dM/dt rise 0.990 p.u. to 0.999 p.u. 0.998 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:107 Trigger f 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active • yes
_:9721:108 Trigger f 1:dM/dt drop (/ 0.005 Hz to 60.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Filter time)
_:9721:116 Trigger f 1:dM/dt drop 0.990 p.u. to 0.999 p.u. 0.998 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:112 Trigger f 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles

(Type)
Trigger f 1
_:9721:54 Trigger f 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9721:52 Trigger f 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9721:53 Trigger f 1:Health ENS O
_:9721:301 Trigger f 1:Trigger active SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.4.4 Power Trigger

Power triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger) in the
fast-scan and slow-scan recorders. It is triggered on active, reactive and apparent power.

The Power trigger function is found in the 3-phase voltage/current function group, which is connected with a
3-phase voltage and a 3-phase current measuring point.
The structure of the Power trigger function is shown in the following figure:
[dwfnpowe-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
biguous differentiation the function blocks automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the func-
tion block, for example, Trigger Psum 1, Trigger Psum 2, and Trigger Psum 3.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating state of the power trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
[dwlotrip-161012-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-63 Logic Diagram of the Power Trigger
The Power trigger function is subdivided into Level and Gradient trigger.
for the Max. and gradient trigger and 1.020 p.u. for the Min. trigger.
Function Blocks
Function blocks of the Power Trigger function:
• Trigger Psum: Setting of the trigger for the sum active power
• Trigger Qsum: Setting of the trigger for the sum reactive power
• Trigger Ssum: Setting of the trigger for the sum apparent power
NOTE
Mode
DIGSI 5 .

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Switching on Trigger Max./Trigger Min.

Trigger Max./Trigger Min.

Switch on dM/dt Rise - dM/dt Drop

gradient trigger is active or inactive .
Filter Time
With the parameter Filter time, you define the number of periods with which the gradient is determined.
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Active, Reactive, and Apparent Power
7.4.4.4 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Psum
Function Block Trigger Psum
[ScPwrHys_2014-06-30, 1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-64 Function Block Trigger Psum
This figure applies in the same manner for all power triggers
Parameter: Mode


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

on The Trigger Psum function block is activated and the sum active power is
off The Trigger Psum function block is deactivated.
test The Trigger Psum function block is activated for test purposes.
Parameter: Power Direction
• Default setting (_:9901:111) Power direction = positive

With the Power direction parameter, you can trigger on negative powers if the parameter is set to
negative .
positive This setting value has no influence on the trigger thresholds.
negative This setting value multiplies the trigger threshold by -1.
• Default setting (_:9901:105) Max. trigger = 138.564 W

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum
active power and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The sum active power is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The sum active power is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
be adjusted.
Parameter: Min. Trigger Active/Min. Trigger/Min Trigger Hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9901:106) Min. trigger = 138.564 W

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum
active power for dropping below the set values.
yes The sum active power is monitored for dropping below the set values.
no The sum active power is not monitored for dropping below the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9901:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 34.641 W

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
gradients of the sum active power using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the sum active power is monitored for exceeding
the set values.
no The positive gradient of the sum active power is not monitored for
exceeding the set values.
• Default setting (_:9901:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 34.641 W

gradients of the sum active power using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the sum active power is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the sum active power is not monitored.
7.4.4.5 Application and Setting Notes Qsum Trig
Parameter: Mode

on The Trigger Qsum function block is activated and the sum reactive power is
off The Trigger Qsum function block is deactivated.
test The Trigger Qsum function block is activated for test purposes.
Parameter: Power Direction
• Default setting (_:9961:111) Power direction = positive

With the Power direction parameter, you can trigger on negative powers if the parameter is set to
negative .
positive This setting value has no influence on the trigger thresholds.
negative This setting value multiplies the trigger threshold by -1.
• Default setting (_:9961:105) Max. trigger = 207.846 var

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum reac-
tive power for exceeding the set values.
yes The sum reactive power is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The sum reactive power is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9961:106) Min. trigger = 138.564 var

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum reac-
tive power for dropping below the set values.
yes The sum reactive power is monitored for dropping below the set values.
no The sum reactive power is not monitored for dropping below the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9961:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 34.641 var

gradients of the sum reactive power using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the sum reactive power is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the sum reactive power is not monitored.
• Default setting (_:9961:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 34.641 var

gradients of the sum reactive power using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the sum reactive power is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the sum reactive power is not monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.4.4.6 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Ssum
Parameter: Mode

on The Trigger Ssum function block is activated and the sum apparent power
is monitored according to the set trigger parameters.
off The Trigger Ssum function block is deactivated.
test The Trigger Ssum function block is activated for test purposes.
• Default setting (_:10021:105) Max. trigger = 207.846 VA

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum
apparent power and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The sum apparent power is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The sum apparent power is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:10021:106) Min. trigger = 138.564 VA

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum
apparent power for dropping below the set values.
yes The sum apparent power is monitored for dropping below the set values.
no The sum apparent power is not monitored for dropping below the set
values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:10021:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 34.641 VA

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
yes The positive gradient of the sum apparent power is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the sum apparent power is not monitored.
• Default setting (_:10021:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 34.641 VA

yes The negative gradient of the sum apparent power is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the sum apparent power is not monitored.
7.4.4.7 Settings

Trigger Psum 1
_:9901:1 Trigger Psum 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9901:111 Trigger Psum 1:Power • negative positive
direction • positive
_:9901:101 Trigger Psum 1:Max. • no yes
_:9901:105 Trigger Psum 1:Max. 0 W to 0 W 0W
trigger
_:9901:113 Trigger Psum 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9901:102 Trigger Psum 1:Min. • no yes
_:9901:106 Trigger Psum 1:Min. 0 W to 0 W 0W
trigger
_:9901:114 Trigger Psum 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9901:103 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt • no no
rise active • yes
_:9901:107 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt 0 W to 0 W 0W
rise (/Filter time)
_:9901:115 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
rise hysteresis

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

_:9901:104 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt • no no
drop active • yes
_:9901:108 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt 0 W to 0 W 0W
drop (/Filter time)
_:9901:116 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
drop hysteresis
_:9901:112 Trigger Psum 1:Filter 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
time
Trigger Qsum 1
_:9961:1 Trigger Qsum 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9961:111 Trigger Qsum 1:Power • negative positive
direction • positive
_:9961:101 Trigger Qsum 1:Max. • no yes
_:9961:105 Trigger Qsum 1:Max. 0 var to 0 var 0 var
trigger
_:9961:113 Trigger Qsum 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9961:102 Trigger Qsum 1:Min. • no yes
_:9961:106 Trigger Qsum 1:Min. 0 var to 0 var 0 var
trigger
_:9961:114 Trigger Qsum 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9961:103 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt • no no
rise active • yes
_:9961:107 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt 0 var to 0 var 0 var
rise (/Filter time)
_:9961:115 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
rise hysteresis
_:9961:104 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt • no no
drop active • yes
_:9961:108 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt 0 var to 0 var 0 var
drop (/Filter time)
_:9961:116 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
drop hysteresis
_:9961:112 Trigger Qsum 1:Filter 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
time
Trigger Ssum 1
_:10021:1 Trigger Ssum 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:10021:101 Trigger Ssum 1:Max. • no yes
_:10021:105 Trigger Ssum 1:Max. 1A 0.10 VA to 20000.00 VA 120.00 VA
trigger 5A 0.50 VA to 100000.00 VA 600.00 VA
_:10021:113 Trigger Ssum 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

_:10021:102 Trigger Ssum 1:Min. • no yes
_:10021:106 Trigger Ssum 1:Min. 1A 0.10 VA to 20000.00 VA 80.00 VA
trigger 5A 0.50 VA to 100000.00 VA 400.00 VA
_:10021:114 Trigger Ssum 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:10021:103 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt • no no
rise active • yes
_:10021:107 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt 1A 0.10 VA to 20000.00 VA 20.00 VA
rise (/Filter time) 5A 0.50 VA to 100000.00 VA 100.00 VA
_:10021:115 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
rise hysteresis
_:10021:104 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt • no no
drop active • yes
_:10021:108 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt 1A 0.10 VA to 20000.00 VA 20.00 VA
drop (/Filter time) 5A 0.50 VA to 100000.00 VA 100.00 VA
_:10021:116 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
drop hysteresis
_:10021:112 Trigger Ssum 1:Filter 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
time

(Type)
Trigger Psum 1
_:9901:54 Trigger Psum 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9901:52 Trigger Psum 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9901:53 Trigger Psum 1:Health ENS O
_:9901:301 Trigger Psum 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger Qsum 1
_:9961:54 Trigger Qsum 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9961:52 Trigger Qsum 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9961:53 Trigger Qsum 1:Health ENS O
_:9961:301 Trigger Qsum 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger Ssum 1
_:10021:54 Trigger Ssum 1:Inactive SPS O
_:10021:52 Trigger Ssum 1:Behavior ENS O
_:10021:53 Trigger Ssum 1:Health ENS O
_:10021:301 Trigger Ssum 1:Trigger active SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.5 Measurands and Recorder Routing Functions
7.5.1 Measurands
7.5.1.1 Properties of Measurands

With the SIPROTEC 5 device, various recording options are available for supervision and evaluation of the
power-system voltage quality. Measurands are measured or calculated in 3-phase systems.
To achieve the best power-quality supervision, the following tables contain recommendations on routing the
measurands in DIGSI 5.
7.5.1.2 Using Measurands
Function Description
The sampled values (SAV) are automatically routed to the Fast-scan recorder and cannot be changed by the
user. The measured values, on the other hand, are formed from the sampled values. You can route the
measured values manually in Information routing.
After you have instantiated the Recorder routing function and the desired function blocks, you can assign the
measured values to the individual recorders in the Information routing.
[scinfora-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-65 Routing Measured Values in the Information Routing

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i The measured values under the Recorder routing V and Recorder Routing VI functions are optimized
specifically for recording. Preferably use these measured values for routing to the various recorders.
Operational measured values can also be recorded. However, this is not recommended because of the
low refresh rate for the 7KE85 fault recorder.
Frequency
Long-term supervision can be performed using the measurand Routing f:f.
You will find information about the average value, the refresh rate, and the recommended routing of the
frequency measurands in the following table.
Table 7-7 Using the Frequency Measurand
Measurand Refresh Rate Use in

FSR13 SSR14 CR15 TR16
Routing f:f 10 ms X X X
NOTE
i The frequency is calculated based on the positive-sequence system components. The calculated
frequency is always 0 for a zero-sequence or negative-sequence system.
Voltage, Current and Power Measurands

The following measurands can be recorded to evaluate power-quality problems: voltage, current, and power.
You will find information about the average value, the refresh rate and the recommended routing of the
voltage, current, and power measurands in the following table.
Table 7-8 Using Voltage Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
Routing V:Vph rms Half periods X X X
Routing V:Vpp rms Half periods X X X
Routing V:VN rms Half periods X X X
Routing V:Vph fd. Half periods X X X
Routing V:Vpp fd. Half periods X X X
Routing V:VN fd. Half periods X X X
Routing V:V0 Half periods X X X
Table 7-9 Using Current Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
Routing I:Iph rms Half periods X X X
Routing I:IN rms Half periods X X X


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

FSR SSR CR TR
Routing I:Iph fd. Half periods X X X
Routing I:IN fd. Half periods X X X
Routing I:I0 Half periods X X X
Table 7-10 Using Power Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
Routing Pwr:P tot Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:Q tot Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:S tot Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:PF tot Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:P Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:Q Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:S Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:PF Half periods X X X
Measuring Transducer – I/O Modules (for Example, IO212)

You will find information about the refresh rate and the possible routings of the measuring-transducer meas-
urands in the following table.
Table 7-11 Using Measuring-Transducer Measurands – I/O Modules (for Example, IO212)
Measurand Refresh Rate 17 Use in

FSR SSR CR TR
TD scale MV 1 to 8 10 ms X X X
Measuring Transducer – Measuring-Transducer Module (for Example, ANAI-CA-4EL)

You will find information about the refresh rate and the possible routings of the measuring-transducer meas-
urands in the following table.
Table 7-12 Using Measuring-Transducer Measurands – Transformers (for Example, ANAI-CA-4EL)

FSR SSR CR TR
TD scale MV 1 to 4 200 ms X X X
TD direct MV 1 to 4 200 ms X X X
PQ 10/12 Cycles
The measurement determines the RMS value of the power voltage over a 10-period time interval for 50 Hz
distribution systems and over a 12-period time interval for 60 Hz distribution systems. All 10/12-period time
intervals are captured without gaps and without overlaps
You will find information about the average value, the refresh rate, and the recommended routing of the PQ
10/12 cycles in the following tables.
17 Can be set in the Measurement window parameter: 10 ms; 20 ms; 40 ms; 60 ms; 80 ms; 100 ms

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Table 7-13 Using PQ 10/12 Cycle Measurands
Measurand Refresh Rate Use in Recommended

FSR SSR CR TR Average Value
CR
PQ 10/12cyc:f 200 ms X X 10 s
PQ 10/12cyc:Vph 200 ms X X 10 min
rms
PQ 10/12cyc:Vpp 200 ms X X 10 min
rms
PQ 10/12cyc:VN rms 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc:u0 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc:u2 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ Trend
Table 7-14 Using PQ Trend Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
PQ trend:f Event-based X X
PQ trend:Vph rms Event-based X X
PQ trend:Vpp rms Event-based X X
PQ Flicker
The short-term flicker severity Pst PQ flicker and the long-term flicker severity Plt PQ flicker are determined for
phase-to-ground and delta voltages (depending on the connection type). The flicker is measured in all 3
voltage channels of the corresponding feeder. Flicker appear with a frequency between 0.005 Hz and 35 Hz.
The flicker severity is determined as follows:
• Short-term flicker severity Pst: over 10 minutes (short-term flicker), permanently set
• Long-term flicker severity Plt: over 2 hours (12 Pst values), permanently set
• Instantaneous value of flicker perception Pinst 18
• Pimx: Maximum value of flicker perception Pinst
NOTE
i Pinst and Pimx serve as the qualification of the flicker algorithm and are not available for long-term
recording.
You will find information about the average value, the refresh rate, and the recommended routing of the
frequency measurands in the following table.
Table 7-15 Using Flicker Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
PQ flicker:Pst ph 10 min X X
PQ flicker:Plt ph 2h X X
PQ flicker:Pinst ph 12 ms X
PQ flicker:Pimx ph 12 ms X
18 Pinst is designated as output 5 in the former version of the standard.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

FSR SSR CR TR
PQ flicker:Pst pp 10 min X X
PQ flicker:Plt pp 2h X X
PQ flicker:Pinst pp 12 ms X
PQ flicker:Pimx pp 12 ms X
Other Measured Values (No Recorder Routing Measured Values)
Table 7-16 Using Other Measured Values

FSR SSR CR TR
For example, operational For example, 180 ms X
measured values
Frequency

(Type)
Routing f
_:301 Routing f:f MV O
Current

(Type)
Routing I
_:300 Routing I:Iph rms WYE O
_:301 Routing I:IN rms MV O
_:302 Routing I:Iph fd. WYE O
_:303 Routing I:IN fd. CMV O
_:304 Routing I:I0 CMV O
Voltage

(Type)
Routing I
_:300 Routing V:Vph rms WYE O
_:301 Routing V:Vpp rms DEL O
_:302 Routing V:VN rms MV O
_:303 Routing V:Vph fd. WYE O
_:304 Routing V:Vpp fd. DEL O
_:305 Routing V:VN fd. CMV O
_:306 Routing V:V0 CMV O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Power

(Type)
Routing I
_:300 Routing Pwr:P tot MV O
_:301 Routing Pwr:Q tot MV O
_:302 Routing Pwr:S tot MV O
_:303 Routing Pwr:PF tot MV O
_:305 Routing Pwr:P WYE O
_:306 Routing Pwr:Q WYE O
_:307 Routing Pwr:S WYE O
_:308 Routing Pwr:PF WYE O
PQ 10/12 Cycles

(Type)
PQ 10/12cyc
_:300 PQ 10/12cyc:f MV O
_:301 PQ 10/12cyc:Vph rms WYE O
_:302 PQ 10/12cyc:Vpp rms DEL O
_:303 PQ 10/12cyc:VN rms MV O
_:304 PQ 10/12cyc:u0 MV O
_:305 PQ 10/12cyc:u2 MV O
PQ Trend

(Type)
PQ trend
_:300 PQ trend:f MV O
_:301 PQ trend:Vph rms WYE O
_:302 PQ trend:Vpp rms DEL O
PQ Flicker

(Type)
PQ flicker
_:300 PQ flicker:Pst ph WYE O
_:301 PQ flicker:Plt ph WYE O
_:302 PQ flicker:Pinst ph WYE O
_:303 PQ flicker:Pimx ph WYE O
_:304 PQ flicker:Pst pp DEL O
_:305 PQ flicker:Plt pp DEL O
_:306 PQ flicker:Pinst pp DEL O
_:307 PQ flicker:Pimx pp DEL O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

(Type)
MT in #

(Type)
MT in #
_:302 MT in #:TD direct MV MV O
7.5.2 Recorder Routing V

The Recorder routing V function starts when there is an exceedance of the set frequency and voltage toler-
ance values.
You can find more information on the Recorder routing V function in chapter 6.1.2 Structure of the Function
Group.

The Recorder routing V function is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the Voltage 3-phase function
group, the Recorder routing V function can be operated only once.
You can find more information on the Recorder routing V function in the chapters 6.1.2 Structure of the Func-
tion Group and 7.5.1.2 Using Measurands .
7.5.2.3 Indications
Indications can be routed on recorders that are available via the GOOSE configurator.
Only SPS indications can be routed in DIGSI 5.
Table 7-17 Using SPS Indications

FSR SSR CR TR
SPS messages Event-based X X X

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Settings of the Recorder Routing V Function
[Screcrou-030614-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-66 Settings of the Recorder Routing V
This representation applies in a similar manner to the Recorder routing VI function.

The Recorder routing V function can only be added to the Voltage 3-phase function group.
the DIGSI Help.
Parameter: Tol. trend frequency
• Default setting (_:15271:101) Tol. trend frequency = 0.200 %

Using the parameter Tol. trend frequency, you set the tolerance range for the frequency measured
value at which a new RMS value is recorded following an exceedance.
The setting value refers to the rated frequency set as a parameter.
Parameter: Tol. trend voltage
• Default setting (_:15271:102) Tol. trend voltage = 2.000 %

Using the parameter Tol. trend voltage, you set the tolerance range for the voltage measured value at
which a new RMS value is recorded following an exceedance.
The setting value refers to the rated voltage set as a parameter.
7.5.2.5 Settings

General
_:15271:101 General:Tol. trend 0.010 % to 1.000 % 0.200 %
frequency
voltage

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Frequency

(Type)
Routing f
Voltage

(Type)
Routing I
PQ 10/12 Cycles

(Type)
PQ 10/12cyc
_:300 PQ 10/12cyc:f MV O
_:304 PQ 10/12cyc:u0 MV O
_:305 PQ 10/12cyc:u2 MV O
PQ Trend

(Type)
PQ trend
PQ Flicker

(Type)
PQ flicker

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder

(Type)
7.5.3 Recorder Routing VI

The Recorder routing VI function starts when there is an exceedance of the set frequency and voltage toler-
ance values.
You can find more information on the Recorder routing VI function in chapter 6.2.2 Structure of the Function
Group .

The Recorder routing VI function is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the Voltage/current 3-phase
function group, the Recorder routing VI function can be operated only once.
You can find more information on the Recorder routing VI function in the chapters 6.2.2 Structure of the Func-
tion Group and 7.5.1.2 Using Measurands .
Settings of the Recorder Routing VI Function

The Recorder routing VI function can only be added to the Voltage/current 3-phase function group.
the DIGSI Help.
Parameter: Tol. trend frequency
• Default setting (_:15241:101) Tol. trend frequency = 0.200 %

Using the parameter Tol. trend frequency, you set the tolerance range for the frequency measured
value at which a new RMS value is recorded following an exceedance.
The setting value refers to the rated frequency set as a parameter.
Parameter: Tol. trend voltage
• Default setting (_:15241:102) Tol. trend voltage = 2.000 %

Using the parameter Tol. trend voltage, you set the tolerance range for the voltage measured value at
which a new RMS value is recorded following an exceedance.
The setting value refers to the rated voltage set as a parameter.
7.5.3.4 Settings

General
frequency
voltage

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
Frequency

(Type)
Routing f
Current

(Type)
Routing I
_:300 Routing I:Iph rms WYE O
_:301 Routing I:IN rms MV O
_:302 Routing I:Iph fd. WYE O
_:303 Routing I:IN fd. CMV O
Voltage

(Type)
Routing I
Power

(Type)
Routing I
_:300 Routing Pwr:P tot MV O
_:301 Routing Pwr:Q tot MV O
_:302 Routing Pwr:S tot MV O
_:303 Routing Pwr:PF tot MV O
_:305 Routing Pwr:P WYE O
_:306 Routing Pwr:Q WYE O
_:307 Routing Pwr:S WYE O
_:308 Routing Pwr:PF WYE O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
PQ 10/12 Cycles

(Type)
PQ 10/12cyc
_:300 PQ 10/12cyc:f MV O
_:304 PQ 10/12cyc:u0 MV O
_:305 PQ 10/12cyc:u2 MV O
PQ Trend

(Type)
PQ trend
PQ Flicker

(Type)
PQ flicker

(Type)
MT in #

(Type)
MT in #
_:302 MT in #:TD direct MV MV O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Fault Recorder
7.5.4 V/I Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs

You can find a detailed description of the function V/I measuring-transducer unit with fast inputs in chapter
Analog Units 6.4.6.1 Overview .

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8 Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview 312

8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision 313
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 317
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware 342
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware 347
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration 348
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections 349
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 350
8.9 Group Indications and Predefined CFC Charts 357

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview
8.1 Overview
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous super-
vision:
• Ensures the availability of the technology used
• Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device
• Protects persons and primary technical devices
• Offers effective assistance during commissioning and testing

The following areas are monitored:
• Supervision the resource consumption of the application
• Supervision of the secondary system
• Supervision of device hardware
• Supervision of device firmware
• Supervision of hardware configuration
• Supervision of communication connections

When the supervision functions pick up, that will be displayed and also indicated. Error responses are defined
for the device. The error responses are grouped in defect severities.
The supervision functions work selectively. When the supervision functions pick up - as far as possible - only
the affected parts of the hardware and firmware are blocked. If this is not possible, the device goes out of
operation into a secure state (fallback mode). In addition to safety, this warrants a high degree of availability.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
8.2.1 Load Model
SIPROTEC 5 devices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model prevents
you from overloading the device with an excessively large application.
The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that
an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into
the device.
In this rare case, you must then reduce the application in order to be able to load it into the device.
The load model can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Device information. In
the operating range, select the Resource consumption setting sheet. The following figure shows an example
of the view of the load model in DIGSI 5:
[scressou_n, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-1 Visualization of the Load Model in DIGSI
A green total display for the processor response time indicates that the device is not overloaded by the
present application. On the other hand, if you see a red exclamation mark, the planned application is over-
loading the device.
The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas. These areas combine functions with the
same real-time requirements in groups. A green display in front of an area (see Figure 8-1) indicates that the
response times of the functions grouped in this area can be maintained. A red exclamation point indicates
that functions may have longer response times than are specified in the Technical data for the device. In such
a case, loading of the application into the device is blocked.
The following table provides an overview of the functional areas and the most important influencing quantities
on device utilization:
Functional Brief Description Change in Load
Area
CFC event- CFC-charts, which must be Adding or removing CFC charts in the fast event-triggered
triggered, fast processed especially fast process range
• Create CFC chart
• Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the
CFC chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the fast event-trig-
gered process area
Measuring Provision of measured values Adding or removing
points for measuring functions • Measuring points (in the Measuring-points routing
Editor)
• Function groups that provide measured-value prepro-
cessing for insertable functions

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Functional Brief Description Change in Load

Area
• FG • Interaction between indi- Adding or removing
connec- vidual function groups, for • Recorder Functions
tions example, between the FG • Current and voltage functions
• Fast VI 3-phase and the FG • Fast GOOSE connections
GOOSE recorder
• Fast GOOSE communica-
tion
CFC event- CFC charts with a maximum Adding or removing CFC charts in the event-triggered
triggered, processing time of 40 ms process range
standard • Create CFC chart
GOOSE • Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the
CFC chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the event-triggered
process area
• Control • Control and interlocking Adding or removing
• Other • CFC charts in the area of • CFC charts in the control area
contin- control, measured-value • Operational measured values
uous preprocessing, and event- • CFC charts in the measured values area
function controlled
chart • Operational measured
• Opera- values
tional
measured
values
If the load model displays a warning, bear in mind the following general instructions:
The areas named in the table are listed in descending order of real time requirements. If a warning appears to
the effect that the guaranteed response times may be exceeded in an area, you may be able to return to the
permitted area by taking the following measures:
• Reduce the functional scope in the marked area (red exclamation mark)
• Reduce the functional scope in another area with higher real time requirements
When you have reduced the application, check the display in resource consumption! If a function has been
switched off, it will continue to represent a load for the area. If you do not need the function, delete it rather
than switching it off.
8.2.2 Function Points
When you order a SIPROTEC 5 device, you are also ordering a function-points account for use of additional
functions.
The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the
existing function-points account.
[scfpunkt-141210-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-2 Resource Overview: Function-Points Consumption

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
The remaining white bar shows the function points that have not yet been used up by your configuration. The
number of function points available in a device depends on the device purchase order (position 20 of the
product code). You can also order function points subsequently, and so increase the function-points account
for the device.
NOTE
i Find out the function-points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device. For this,
you can use the device configurator.
8.2.3 CFC Resources
Task Levels of the CFC Function

A CFC chart, and thus the configured CFC function, runs in the SIPROTEC 5 device on exactly one of the 4
task levels. The individual task levels differ, on the one hand, in the priority of processing tasks and, on the
other, in the cyclic or event-triggered processing of the CFC charts.
You can select between the following task levels:
Task Level Description
Fast Event-Triggered Use the Fast Event-Triggered task level for time-critical tasks, for
example, if a signal should block a protection function within 2 ms to 3 ms.
Functions on this task level are processed in an event-triggered way with
the highest priority. Each change to a logical input signal is immediately
processed. Processing can interrupt the execution of protection functions
and functions on the Event-Triggered task level.
Event-Triggered Use the Event-Triggered task level preferably for logic functions that
need not be executed with highest priority. Each change to a logical input
signal is immediately processed. Protection functions or functions on the
Fast event-triggered task level can disrupt processing.
Functions on the Event-Triggered task level are typically processed
within a maximum of 5 ms in all devices. For busbar protection or line
protection, the functions on the Event-Triggered task level are
processed within a maximum of 10 ms.
Measurement Use the Measurement task level for processing measured values. Func-
tions on this task level are processed cyclically every 500 ms.
Interlocking Use the Interlocking task level preferably for logic functions that should
be executed with lower priority than functions in the Event-Triggered
task level. If the available ticks of the Event-Triggered task level shown
in the following figure are sufficient for the required CFC functionality, you
do not need to use the Interlocking task level.
All CFC function blocks can be assigned to all the task levels. There are no device-specific function blocks. If
enough ticks are available, all CFC charts can be created in the same task level. A tick is the measure of the
performance requirement of CFC blocks.
The number of available ticks for each task is calculated depending on the created device configuration. This
calculation is based on the previously described load model. In this process, it is recommended to create all
selected functions and objects first followed by configuration of the CFC charts so that a realistic information
about the remaining system capacitance for CFC charts is available. Significantly exceeding the typical
response time is prevented by the load model by limiting the number of CFC function blocks in the corre-
sponding task level via the number of ticks available.
The typical response times for CFC tasks are listed in the Technical Data.
The following figure shows an example of the CFC chart capacitances in DIGSI calculated by the load model.
The ticks available for each task are shown here. The green bars represent the ticks used in the task levels.
You reach this dialog with the following call: Device → Device information → Resource consumption.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[sc-cfc-statistic, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-3 CFC Statistics
NOTE
i The fast-event-triggered CFC charts have the highest priority and are processed before all other tasks. At
this level, a considerable smaller number of ticks are available than at all other tasks. It is recommended to
configure only very-high-priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in any
other level.
NOTE
i Empty CFC charts also consume system resources. Empty charts that are not required any more should
be deleted.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.1 Signaling-Voltage Supervision

Signaling-voltage supervision is used to evaluate the validity of binary signals connected to the SIPROTEC
device via binary inputs. For this purpose, one binary input is used to monitor the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, the associated binary signals are marked as invalid and a Signaling-voltage malfunc-
tion indication is issued.
Several signaling-voltage supervision groups can be created in one SIPROTEC device. Each of these groups
monitors an adjustable area with binary inputs.

The Signaling-voltage supervision function group contains, besides the general functionality, one preinstanti-
ated Supervision group stage. The Supervision group stage can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dwivsstr-060214-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-4 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group

You can instantiate the Signaling-voltage supervision function group in DIGSI from the global library. It
contains 1 pre-instantiated Supervision group function block (see the following figure). You can instantiate a
maximum of 25 supervision groups.
[sc_ivslib, 1, en_US]
Following the instantiation of the function group in the DIGSI project tree, it appears in the information routing
of DIGSI (see the following figure). The status indications of the supervision groups can be routed here, for
example, to existing binary outputs and/or logs.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[sc_ivsrou, 1, en_US]
Set the binary input used for signaling-voltage supervision within one input/output module using the setting
option (see the following figure). This binary input monitors the presence of the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, this sets the quality attribute for all other binary inputs of the parameterized input/
output module to invalid. The signal status of each of these binary inputs is frozen with its last valid value
prior to the occurrence of the fault. The quality attribute of the binary inputs for other input/output modules are
not taken into consideration by this.
If the signaling voltage again exceeds the binary threshold, the quality attribute of the binary inputs is reset to
valid.
[sc_ivsgrp, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i Each status change of the monitored binary inputs is delayed by 3 ms.
You can also combine binary inputs across modules in one Supervision group function block, and define any
binary input within this group for the supervision of the signaling voltage. For this purpose, place a check
mark at the parameter (_:102) Enable variable group when configuring the supervision group. This
extends the parameter menu by the sections Start supervision group and End supervision group (see the
following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[sc_gruppe_de, 1, en_US]
There, for example, you are able to combine 1 to n different binary inputs into one supervision group. When
doing so, the binary inputs on the input/output modules assignable to a supervision group must be related
logically. With 3 input/output modules, for example, this allows only consecutive binary inputs to be grouped
on the modules 1+2 or 2+3, but no binary inputs on modules 1+3. The binary inputs used for supervision can
be located on any input/output module within the group defined in this manner.
If you have to monitor several binary inputs that, for example, work with different signaling voltages from
different sources, then you can also instantiate and configure several Supervision group function blocks
within the Signaling-voltage supervision function group accordingly.
Within different supervision groups, only those consecutive binary inputs that are not already assigned to
another supervision group can be grouped. The overlapping of binary inputs in different supervision groups is
not permitted.
Example: There are 4 input/output modules. Binary inputs of input/output module 1+2 are already combined
in supervision group 1. The 2 last binary inputs on module 2 are not included in the grouping. Thus, only
these 2 binary inputs not used in the supervision group 1 of the input/output module 2 as well as, where appli-
cable, further consecutive binary inputs of input/output modules 3+4 can be combined in supervision group 2.
Error parameters are displayed to you by inconsistency indications in DIGSI.
Parameter (General): Mode
• Default setting (_:1) Mode = on

With the Mode parameter, you specify whether you want to activate, deactivate, or test the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the appropriate group. If you put the group into test mode, the Sig. volt.
disturbed indication is given a test flag. If the supervision input drops out in test mode, the assigned inputs
retain their status without their quality attribute being set to invalid.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): I/O module ID
• Default setting (_:104) I/O module ID = I/O module 1

Using the I/O module ID parameter, you specify the I/O module for which you want to activate signaling-
voltage supervision. Counting of the I/O modules starts in increasing order with the binary inputs of the base
module. The binary inputs of the PS201 power-supply module permanently installed in the base module

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
count as the 2nd I/O module followed by additional I/O modules (3 to n) in the expansion boards of the
device.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Binary input
• Default setting (_:105) Binary input = 1

Using the Binary input parameter, you specify the binary input responsible for the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the parameterized I/O module. The quality attribute of all other binary inputs for this
module are set to valid or invalid depending on the presence of the signaling voltage at the parameterized
binary input.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Enable variable group
• Default setting (_:102) Enable variable group = untrue

You can activate the parameter Enable variable group by placing the check mark. If you have not set
the check mark (default setting), only these 2 parameters are available for the configuration of the supervision
signal. If you have set the check mark, the parameter menu is extended by the areas Start supervision group
and End supervision group. You can then use that to carry out the grouping of binary inputs for supervision
groups explained in the function description.
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the first I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the lowest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): Binary input

Parameter Binary input is used to define the lowest binary input for the first I/O module (see (_:106)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the last I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the highest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): Binary input

Parameter Binary input is used to define the highest binary input for the last I/O module (see (_:108)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
8.3.1.5 Settings

General
_:1 Superv.Grp.#:Mode • off on
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

Superv. signal
_:104 Superv.Grp.#:I/O • I/O module 1 I/O module 1
module ID • I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
_:105 Superv.Grp.#:Binary 1 to 256 1
input
_:102 Superv.Grp.#:Enable • 0 false
variable group • 1
Supervis. grp. start
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
input
Supervis. grp. end
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

input

(Type)
Superv.Grp.#
_:52 Superv.Grp.#:Behavior ENS O
_:55 Superv.Grp.#:Sig. volt. disturbed SPS O
8.3.2 Voltage-Balance Supervision

In healthy system operation, a certain balance between voltages can be assumed.
The Voltage-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase-to-phase voltages in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Voltage-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase voltage meas-
uring point.
[dwstrusy-300913, 2, en_US]

The voltage balance is checked by a magnitude supervision function. This function relates the smallest
phase-to-phase voltage to the largest phase phase-to-phase voltage. Unbalance is detected if
|Vmin| / |Vmax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Vmax > Release threshold.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[lokenuns-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-6 Characteristic of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
Logic
[lospasym-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-7 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which a phase-to-phase voltage unbalance is
measured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum (Vmax) phase-to-
phase voltage.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage (Vmax) with the parameter Release
threshold. This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Operate delay
If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase-to-phase
voltage exceeds the Release threshold, the Operate delay begins. If both conditions persist during
this time, the indication Failure is generated.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.75

The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum
(Vmax) phase-to-phase voltage. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 50 V

With the Release threshold parameter you set the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage
(Vmax). Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Operate delay
• Recommended setting value (_:6) Operate delay = 5.00 s

Set the Operate delay parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as switching
operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
8.3.2.5 Settings

Supv. balan. V
_:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. V:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
delay

(Type)
Supv. balan. V
_:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.3.3 Voltage-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all voltages at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Voltage-sum supervision monitors the sum of all voltages of one measuring point in the secondary circuit. It
detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit.
For summation of the voltages, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages and the residual voltage (da-dn - voltage of
an open-circuited delta winding) are required.
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.
NOTE
i For the Voltage-sum supervision, the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th
voltage measuring input.
For the Voltage-sum supervision to work correctly, the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter must be
set accordingly.

The Voltage-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data function group of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.
[dwstrvss-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

The voltage sum is generated by addition of the voltage phasors. Errors in the voltage circuits are detected if
VF = |VA+ VB + VC + Vph/VN • VN | > Threshold, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN
parameter.
[lokenvss-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-9 Characteristic of the Voltage-Balance Supervision

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lovssumm-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-10 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Sum Supervision
The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The
sum of the 4 voltages must be 0.
Threshold
If the calculated fault voltage (VF) exceeds the Threshold, the parameter Operate delay triggers the indi-
cation Failure.
The device calculates the fault voltage (VF) with the formula:
VF = |VA+ VB + VC + Vph/VN • VN |, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter.
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter takes into account the differing transformation ratios between
the residual voltage input and the phase-voltage inputs.
More information in this respect can be found in chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions ).
Operate delay
When the threshold value for the Operate delay is exceeded, the indication Failure is generated.
Parameter: Threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 25 V

The Threshold parameter is used to set the voltage which the device uses to recognize the calculated fault
voltage (VF) as a failure of the voltage sums. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.3.3.5 Settings

Supv. sum V
_:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 43.300 V
_:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm

(Type)
Supv. sum V
_:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
8.3.4 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
voltages by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the voltages. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase voltage
measuring point.
[dwstrvrs-060611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lovrsymm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-12 Logic Diagram for the Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision
The device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase-rotation direction.
You can find detailed information in the section Power-system data.
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence.
The connection diagrams are shown in the section Appendix.
Operate delay
When the device detects an inverted phase-rotation direction for the duration of the Operate delay, the
indication Failure is generated.
• Recommended setting value (_:6) Operate delay = 5,00 s


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.3.4.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.V
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
delay

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
8.3.5 Broken-Wire Detection

The purpose of the broken-wire detection is to detect interruptions in the secondary circuit of the current
transformers during steady-state operation. In addition to jeopardizing the secondary circuit by high voltages,
such interruptions can mimic the presence of differential currents for the differential protection, as caused by
short circuits in the protected object. To prevent overfunctions due to faulty current values, you can program
the affected protection functions to be blocked.

The Broken-wire detection function is structurally anchored in the power-system data as well and in various
protection function groups.
[dwbwsstr-070311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
The Broken-wire detection function consists of several stages.

1. Broken wire suspected (power-system data)
• The instantaneous values of all current measuring points are checked on a phase-selective basis for
implausible values.
• The affected phases are marked with wire-break suspected.
• Depending on the supervision mode, you can add a marker for blocking protection functions for the
affected phases.
• After 10 ms of broken-wire check, the wire break is reliably signaled.

2. Broken-wire check (Protection function group)
• Current phases suspected to have a broken wire are tested for plausibility using exclusion criteria.
• A valid exclusion criterion resets the broken-wire suspicion and cancels any existing blocking of protec-
tion functions.
3. Broken-wire blocking (Protection-function group)
• The Broken-wire blocking marker immediately leads to blocking of the protection functions that pick up
on unbalanced currents (for example, differential protection).
[lobwstr1-070311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-14 Stages of the Broken-Wire Detection Function Using the Differential Protection
Broken-Wire Suspected
The Broken-wire detection function monitors the dynamic behavior of the currents of each phase and of all
measuring points. For this purpose, the instantaneous values of the currents are checked for their plausibility.
Each expected violation must be confirmed by additional criteria before a wire break can be detected and
signaled with assurance.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i If the secondary circuits of the current transformers are accidentally opened while the broken-wire detec-
tion is on, functions like the differential protection are blocked phase-segregated and no longer initiate trip-
ping. Hazardous overvoltages can be generated at the open circuit of the current transformer in this condi-
tion which are not eliminated because the differential protection is blocked.
The detection of the local broken-wire suspected is performed on each 3-phase current measuring point of
the device selectively for each phase. Depending on the protected object, the detection is based on perma-
nent (line differential protection) or frequency-adjusted instantaneous values (transformer differential protec-
tion).
Detection:
A wire break initially manifests itself as a sudden decrease of the current below the minimum threshold of
0.06 I/I rated. A plausibility test on one period of past instantaneous values confirms this condition. If the criteria
for the local wire break are satisfied, the affected phase is marked with Broken-wire suspected.
Resetting:
The broken-wire suspected is reset by phase current flowing again , by a reset criterion of the broken-wire
check or by a binary input signal. Binary resetting can be useful during laboratory tests among other applica-
tions.
Indication
If the broken-wire detection by the broken-wire check has not been reset within 10 ms, it will be indicated.
The indication is held stable for the duration of at least 3 periods.
Broken-Wire Check
To prevent unwanted pickup of this monitoring function caused by special operating conditions, for example
fault, maintenance, test, etc., a local broken-wire suspected must be confirmed by additional other criteria.
These criteria are checked on the level of the protection functions (Protection function group).
If at least one of the following criteria contradicting wire break is satisfied, the locally set broken-wire
suspected is reset including any associated protection blocking.
Local resetting criteria:
• At least one protection function has picked up.
• An assigned circuit-breaker is open.
• A wire break is simultaneously detected at a different local current channel.
• Jump detection on a local voltage channel (if voltage transformers exist)
• Jump detection of the associated residual current
• Jump detection on a different local current channel of the same phase without broken-wire suspected
• Local overcurrent, that is, for at least one local phase applies Iph > 2· Irated
Reset criteria at the opposite end:

For the line differential protection, there are additional criteria of the opposite end that can contradict a local
broken-wire suspected and cause resetting. The request to reset is transmitted via the protection interface.
• A wire break is simultaneously detected at a current channel of the opposite end.
• Jump detection on a voltage channel of the opposite end (if voltage transformers exist)
• Jump detection on a current channel of the opposite end
• Local overcurrent at the opposite end, that is true for at least one phase Iph > 2· Irated
Blocking the Protection

The decision to block the protection and the determination of the local broken-wire suspected is performed
phase-segregated for each 3-phase current measuring point of the device. A central mode parameter of the
broken-wire detection (Mode) in the power-system data decides the blocking behavior.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
• No blocking
– A wire break is only signaled.
• Blocking
– Each broken-wire suspected must cause the affected protection functions to be blocked. Affected
phases are marked with “protection blocked”.
• Automatic blocking
– In addition to broken-wire suspected, you can make the blocking dependent on the criterion that the
maximum differential current of all phases does not exceed a settable threshold value Delta
value for autoblock for the differential protection. The phases to be blocked are marked.
Differential protection functions and protection functions that pick up on unbalanced currents are blocked.
Each individual protection function is responsible for the actual blocking and is described there, too.
Parameter: Mode
• Recommended setting value (_:1) Mode = off

The Mode parameter is used to switch the broken-wire detection to on, off and test.
Parameter: Mode of blocking
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Mode of blocking = blocking

The Mode of blocking parameter enables you to define the blocking condition (see Blocking the protec-
tion). Siemens recommends using the default setting. The setting options are blocking, auto blocking
and not blocking.
Parameter: Delta value for autoblock
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Delta value for autoblock = 1.00 I/IN
With the Delta value for autoblock parameter you can make the blocking decision for protection func-
tions dependent on the amount of the differential current.
8.3.5.5 Settings

Brk.wire det.
_:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Brk.wire det.:Mode of • blocking blocking
blocking • auto blocking
• not blocking
_:102 Brk.wire det.:Delta value 0.004 to 5.000 1.000
for autoblock

(Type)
Brk.wire det.
_:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O
8.3.6 Current-Balance Supervision

In healthy network operation, a certain balance between currents can be assumed.
The Current-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase currents in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current meas-
uring point.
[dwstrsym-060611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

The current balance is checked by a magnitude monitoring function. This function relates the smallest phase
current to the largest phase current. Unbalance is detected if
|Imin| / |Imax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Imax > Release threshold / IN.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[losymmke-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-16 Characteristic of the Current-Balance Supervision
Logic
[locbsymm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-17 Logic Diagram of the Current-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which unbalance in the phase currents is measured.
The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax) phase current.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax) with the parameter Release threshold. This
specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Operate delay
If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase current
exceeds the Release threshold, the tripping delay begins. If both conditions persist during this time, the
indication Failure is generated.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.5

The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum
(Imax) phase current.
Parameter: Release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 0.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.5
A for Irated = 5 A
The Release threshold parameter is used to set the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax).

operations) are avoided.
8.3.6.5 Settings

Supv. balan. I
_:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1A 0.030 A to 90.000 A 0.500 A
threshold 5A 0.150 A to 450.000 A 2.500 A
_:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. I:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
delay

(Type)
Supv. balan. I
_:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.3.7 Current-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all currents at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Current-sum supervision monitors the sum of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary circuit. It
detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit.
For summation of the currents, the device requires the phase currents and the ground current of the current
transformer neutral point or of a separate ground-current transformer at this measuring point. The following
connection variants are available:
• Current-transformer connections connected to 3 current transformers and the neutral point (see
Figure A-6 in the Attachment)
• Ground current detected with 3 separate ground-current transformers (see Figure A-8 in the Attachment)
• 3 current transformers and one summation current transformer connected (see Figure A-7 in the Attach-
ment)
• 2 current transformers and one summation current transformer connected (see Figure A-10 in the
Attachment)
NOTE
i For current-sum supervision, the ground current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th
current measurement input (IN).

The Current-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current measure-
ment point.
[dwstrcss-300913, 2, en_US]

The current sum is generated by addition of the current phasors. Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN| > Threshold + Slope factor •Σ | I |.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
[lokensum-300311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-19 Characteristic of the Current-Sum Supervision
Logic
[locssumm-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-20 Logic Diagram of the Current-Sum Supervision
Slope of the Characteristic Curve

The Slope factor • Σ | I | part takes into account permissible current-proportional transformation errors of
the transformer, which can occur in the case of high short-circuit currents.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
The Slope factor and Threshold parameters are used to set the fault-current limit (IFmax) for the
current-sum supervision. The device calculates this fault current limit with the formula:
IFmax = Threshold + Slope factor • Σ| I |
The device uses the current inputs (IA, IB, IC and IN) to calculate:
• The fault current IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN|
• The maximum current Σ| I | = | IA| + |IB| +| IC| + |kl• IN|
with kI taking into account a possible difference from the transformation ratio of a separated ground-current
transformer (IN), for example, cable type current transformer.
• Transformation ratio of residual-current converter: RatioN
• Transformation ratio of phase-current converter: Ratioph
[foglchki-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Threshold
The Threshold parameter is the lower limit of the operating range of the Current-sum supervision function.
Operate delay
When the calculated fault current (IF) exceeds the calculated fault current limit (IFmax), the Operate delay
starts. If the threshold-value violation persists for that time, the Failure indication is generated.
Parameter: Slope factor
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Slope factor = 0.1

The Slope factor parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax)
phase current. This function calculates the RMS values.
Parameter: Threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or 0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current (Imax).

operations) are avoided.
8.3.7.5 Settings

Supv. sum I
_:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5A 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.500 A
_:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

_:6 Supv. sum I:Operate delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s

(Type)
Supv. sum I
_:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
8.3.8 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Current phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
currents by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the currents. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current phase rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current
measurement point.
[dwstrcrs-040211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[locrsymm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-22 Logic Diagram Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
The device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase-rotation direction.
You can find detailed information in the section Power-system data.
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence.
The connection diagrams are shown in the section Appendix.
Operate delay
When the device detects an inverted phase sequence for the duration of the Operate delay the indication
Failure is generated.


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.3.8.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.I
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
delay

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
8.4.1 Overview
The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure
or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions.
The following modules of the device hardware are monitored:
• Base module
• Expansion modules
• Plug-in modules on the interface locations
• SDHC memory card

The fault responses result, depending on type and degree of the error, as follows:
Hardware errors where the device remains in operation.
The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can switch into a secure state. Such errors are, for example:
• Communication-module failure (module x)
• Measuring-transducer module failure (module x)
• USB interface
• Integrated Ethernet interface
• Real-time clock building block
• A/D converter (fast current sum)
• Battery voltage
• Faulty or missing compensation values (magnitude/phase)
• SDHC memory card (see also A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card )
Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of operation.
Such errors are, for example:
• Memory error (RAM) in the base module
• Faulty module
• Module-connection error (PCB Link)
• Control circuit error binary output
• Outage of an internal auxiliary voltage
NOTE
i If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts, the system automatically recognizes it as a
severe device malfunction. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Fatal device errors with outage of central components: The device goes permanently out of operation into a
secure state (fallback mode).
• Memory error (flash) in the base module
• CPU/Controller/FPGA error in the base module
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the fault responses at the end of chapter 8 . You will
find corresponding corrective measures there.
Device Operating Hours

The Device operating hours statistical value counts the operating hours of the physical device. The
starting time and the time in Fallback mode are not considered.
You can neither reset nor change the statistical value.
8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum

The function Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters it performs the following tasks:
• Supervision of the correct functioning of the device-internal analog-digital converters, based on the sum
of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary circuit.
• Detection of failures in the device-internal measuring circuits ( for example, analog-digital converter )
• Blocking of protection and control functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection). This avoids an overfunction of the device.
The supervision principle is based on fast current sum supervision with connection of the neutral-point current
to the 4th current measurement input. In order to ensure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection
functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup, the fast current measurement is based on instan-
taneous values.
For Analog-digital converter supervision, the neutral-point current of the line to be protected must be
connected to the 4th current measuring input (IN). The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the
current-transformer neutral point (IN neutral point) (see next figure).
[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-23 Connection to a 3-Phase Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current
(Current in Common Return Path)
NOTE
i The analog channel supervision via fast current sum is only available when the 4th current input is a
protection-class current transformer. In the DIGSI 5 project tree, under Device → Measuring-point routing,
set the connection type 3-phase + IN for the current measuring point.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

The Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters function is located in the System data func-
tion group of each 3-phase current measuring point.
[dwschstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN| > Threshold value + Slope of the characteristic 1 •Σ| i | and
IF > Slope of the characteristic 2 • (Σ| i | - Base point 2)
With the current inputs (iA, iB, iC, and iN), the device calculates:
• The fault current IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN|
• The maximum current Σ| i | = |iA|+|iB|+|iC|+ |iN|
[lokenisu-240413-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-25 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[losumsch-240413-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-26 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid
failures (see 11.5.8 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ).
NOTE
i The parameters are fixed in the device and cannot be changed.

It is not necessary to change the parameters depending on the application.
Threshold Value
The threshold value is the lower limit of the operating range of the Supervision of the device-internal analog-
digital converters function.
The threshold value is fixed to 10 % of the device rated current.
Slope of the Characteristic 1

The component slope of the characteristic 1 • Σ | i | takes into account permissible current-input errors, which
can occur in the case of small overcurrents.
The slope of the characteristic 1 is fixed to 0.1.
Slope of the Characteristic 2

The component slope of the characteristic 2 takes into account permissible current-input errors, which can
occur in the case of high overcurrents (high short-circuit currents).

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
The slope of the characteristic 2 is fixed to 0.95. The base point of the slope of the characteristic 2 is fixed to
10.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware

The device firmware determines essentially the functionality of the device.
The following supervisions ensure the stable function of the device:
• Supervisions of the data and version consistency
• Supervision of the undisturbed sequential activity of the device firmware
• Supervision of the available processor performance

When you start the device, load data via the interfaces and these supervisions of the device firmware will be
in effect during the continuous operation. Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error
responses will result:
Firmware failures where the device remains in operation.
The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in time synchronization
(loss and errors).
Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of operation.
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. The old parameter set is still present.
• Overloading of the processor
• Program-sequence error
Fatal firmware error. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. No usable parameter set is present.
• Device startup with version error
• CFC-runtime error
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the fault responsed at the end of chapter 8. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration

The modular hardware concept requires adherence to some rules within the product family and the modular
system. Configuration errors show that the hardware configuration saved in the device does not agree with
the hardware actually detected. Impermissible components and unallowed combinations must be detected
just as missing configured components are.
Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error responses will result: The identified hardware
configuration errors are assigned to the defect severities as follows:
Configuration errors where the device remains in operation.
The failure is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in IE converter
configuration (loss and errors).
Fatal configuration error: The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Missing hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware combination
• Incorrect plug-in module (module x)

You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the error reactions at the end of chapter 8 . You will find
corresponding corrective measures there. You can resolve configuration errors through another synchroniza-
tion with DIGSI.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections

SIPROTEC 5 devices offer extensive communication possibilities via fixed and optional interfaces. Beyond
the hardware supervision of the communication plug-in modules the transferred data must be monitored with
respect to their consistency, failure, or outage.
Supervision
With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
• Failures are detected and indicated via the operational log. The device remains in operation!
• Each port additionally is equipped with a separate communication log, with which details of the failures
(for example, error rate) are displayed.
Marking Fault Signals/Data

The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected protection functions
can go into a secure state. In the following, some examples are named:
• GOOSE signals can automatically be set to defined values in case of disturbed IEC 61850 communica-
tion.
• Disturbed time-synchronization signals can lead to an automatic change of the source of time synchroni-
zation.
Normally, you can correct communication failures by checking the external connections or by replacing the
affected communication modules. In chapter 8.8.4 Defect Severity 3 , you will find the detailed description, in
tabular form, of the error responses. Corresponding corrective measures can also be found there.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
8.8.1 Overview
When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the
device and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals
are marked and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state. If the super-
vision functions pick up, this will lead to defined error responses.
How Do Device Errors Make Themselves Noticeable

In case of a device error the supervision functions of the device pickup. The device responds according to the
type and severity of the error. To report an error, supervision functions use outputs on the device and indica-
tions.
Run LED (green) The external auxiliary voltage is present. The device is ready for operation.
Error LED (red) The device is not ready for operation. The life contact is open.
Life contact Signaling of device readiness following successful device startup.
Group-warning indication The device remains in operation and signals an error via the prerouted LED
Group warning and the log.
Log of the device Indications of causes for defects and corrective measures
Determination of Causes for Defects and Corrective Measures

To determine the cause for defect and the corresponding corrective measure, proceed step by step.
Step 1: Pick up of supervisions leads to one of the following defect severities in all cases.
• Defect severity 1:
Internal or external device error that is reported. The device stays in operation.
Severe device failure, the device restarts (reset) to correct the cause for defect.
Severe device failure, the device goes to a safe condition (fallback mode), as the
correction of defects by a restart is not possible. In fallback mode, the protection
and automated functions are inactive. The device is out of operation.
Severe device-external failure, the device switches the protection and automatic
functions to inactive for safety, but stays in operation. Normally, the user can
correct the fault by himself.
Step 2: For every defect severity, you will find detailed tables with information about causes for
defects, error responses, and corrective measures in the following chapters.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Error Responses
Indication of the Life Contact
All Protection and Automation Functions
Device Restart (Reset)
Fallback Mode
Group-Warning Indication Group Warning
Indication in the Operational Log
Indication in the Device-Diagnosis Log
Are Inactive
Defect severity 1 x x x
Defect severity 2 x x During the x
starting
time of the
device
Defect severity 3 x x x x
Defect severity 4 x x x
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1
Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated.
The device remains in operation.
When the supervision functions pick up, corrupted data and signals are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected functions can go into a secure state. Whether functions are blocked is decided in the appropriate
function itself. For more detailed information, refer to the function descriptions.
Live status contact Remains activated
Red error LED Is not activated
Log
For every device fault, a corresponding supervision indication is generated. The device records these indica-
tions with a real-time stamp in the operational log. In this way they are available for further analyses. If super-
visions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up, there is a separate communication log
available for each port. Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there. The
device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recommendations of corre-
sponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3 .
Group-Warning Indication Group Warning

As delivered, all supervision indications of Defect Severity 1 are routed to the signal (_:301) Group
warning. In this way, a device error can be indicated with only one indication. The majority of supervision
indications are permanently connected to the Group warning indication (Group warning column = fixed).
However, some supervision indications are routed flexibly to the Group warning via a CFC chart (Group
warning column = CFC). If necessary, you can remove the routings via a CFC chart from the group indication.
In delivery condition, the Group warning is prerouted to an LED.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Overview of Errors
Indication Type Group Explanation

Warning
General: ENS If the Health of an individual function block or
(_:53) Health an individual function goes to the Warning or
(_:53) Health = Warning SPS Alarm state, this state is processed via the
associated function group up to the general
(_:53) Health = Alarm SPS group indication Health (_:53).
Check via the operational log from which function
or function block the error originates. You can
find additional information as to why the health of
the function or a function block can change in the
associated function description.
Device: SPS Fixed Fault with the auxiliary power supply:
(_:320) AuxVolt.fault Check the external power supply.
Device: SPS Fixed Battery fault:
(_:305) Battery fault Replace the device battery.
Device: ENS Fixed Calibration error in module x:
(_:312) Compensation Contact the Customer Support Center.
fault x Quality: Measured values are marked with the
quality attribute of questionable (measured
value display with ∼).
Device: ENS Fixed Offset error on module x:
(_:314) Offset error x If this indication persists after the device start,
contact the Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the
quality attribute of questionable (measured
value display with ∼).
Device: SPS Fixed Internal time failure
(_:306) Time failure • Check the time settings first.
• Then replace the device battery.
• If the fault is not remedied, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Quality: The internal clock is marked with the
quality attribute of Clock Failure.
Device: SPS Fixed Checksum (CRC) error in monitored memory
(_:319) Memory fault areas of the device
Device: ENS Fixed Hardware error on measuring-transducer module
Measuring-transducer error (x) in plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Handling an alarm: SPS Fixed Input signal for user-defined generation of the
(_:504) >Group warning group warning
Time sync.: SPS Fixed Time synchronization error, the timing master is
(_:305) Time sync Fault faulty:
• Check the external time source first.
• Check the external connections.
Quality: The internal clock is marked with the
quality attribute of Clock not synchronized.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Indication Type Group Explanation

Warning
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Current balance failure (see chapter
I-3ph:superv. sym I 8.3.6.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of current phase-rotation reversal (see
I-3ph:superv. Phsseq.I: chapter 8.3.8.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of current sum (see chapter 8.3.7.1 Over-
I-3ph:superv. Sum I view of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of the quick current sum (see chapter
I-3ph:superv.ADC sum.I: 8.4.2.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure The failure indication indicates a fault in the
analog-digital converter at the power input.
• Check the exterior wiring.
Quality: The internally managed measured
values are marked with the invalid quality
attribute.
Blocking: Main protection function is blocked.
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is open.
V-3ph: Volt.Trans.Cir.B: Blocking: Appropriate functions are either
(_:500) >Open blocked definitely or you can set the blocking
individually.
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Voltage balance failure (see chapter
V-3ph: Superv. sym V: 8.3.2.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of voltage phase-rotation monitoring (see
V-3ph: Superv. Phsseq.V: chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of voltage sum (see chapter 8.3.3.1 Over-
V-3ph: Superv. of Sum V: view of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Faults of defect severity 2 are fatal device faults that lead to an immediate restart of the device (reset).
This occurs when the device data is corrupted (for example, RAM memory), if a restart prevents restoration of
data consistency. The device goes briefly out of operation, a failure is avoided.
Life contact Is terminated during the restart
Red error LED Is activated during the restart
NOTE
i If the fault of defect severity 2 has not be been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is
automatically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Log
For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational
log. The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault
detection and before the restart. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available
for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive
recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
Overview of Errors
Number Device-Diagnosis Log

826 Processor error on the base module:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.
830 FPGA hardware error on the base module:
834 Memory error (short term):
Reset initiated.
3823 Program run error:
826 CPU overload:
Miscellaneous Internal firmware error:
Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode.
The signal (_:301) Device status goes to the Alarm state. The Warning state is not supported for this
signal.
Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device. In this case, contact the
Customer Support Center. The device goes permanently out of operation, a failure is avoided. In the fallback
mode, minimal operation of the device via the on-site operation panel and DIGSI is possible. In this way, for
example, you can still read out information from the device-diagnosis log.
Life contact Is terminated in the fallback mode
Red error LED Is activated in the fallback mode
Log
For every device error that immediately leads to entry into the fallback mode, entries from supervision
messages and from the signal (_:301) Device status into the operational log are not possible. The
actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detection,
that is, before entry into the fallback mode. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are
thus available for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you
are offered recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
Overview of Errors

2822 Memory error (continuous)
4727, 5018-5028 Hardware failure at module 1-12:

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

4729 Device bus error (repeated):
• Check the module configuration and the module connections.
• Contact the Customer Support Center.
4733 Incorrect hardware configuration:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.
5037-5048 Wrong module 1-12 detected:
5031-5035 Identified wrong plug-in module on plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:
Wrong application configuration:
Search for the cause in the operational log and load a valid configuration to the device.
3640, 4514 Data-structure error:
956 Firmware-version error:
2013, 2025 Signature error:
CFC error:
In DIGSI, check your CFC chart for the cause.
5050-5061 Binary-output error in module 1 - 12:
5088, 5089 A missing display configuration was established:
8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)
Errors of defect severity 4 are not device failures in the classical meaning. These errors do not affect the
device hardware and are not detected or reported by internal device supervision functions. The condition of
the defect severity 4 – the group alarm – is set user-specifically by the binary input signal (_:503) >Group
alarm. If the binary input signal is reset, the device is no longer in the Group alarm condition and all func-
tions return to the normal operating state.
If the group alarm is generated, the device reacts as follows:
• The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is generated and recorded in the operational log.
• The life contact is terminated.
• The red Error LED is activated.
• All protection and automation functions are blocked.
• The device remains in operation, does not carry out any restart (reset), and does not switch to the safe
condition (Fallback mode).
• The signals managed internally are marked with the invalid quality attribute. Signals managed inter-
nally are, for example, measured values, binary input and output signals, GOOSE and CFC signals.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the Group
alarm (see chapter 8.9 Group Indications and Predefined CFC Charts ).
Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm
Red error LED Is initiated in case of Group alarm

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Log
The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is recorded in the operational log. Depending on the cause of
the initiation, further information can be found in the operational log.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
8.9 Group Indications and Predefined CFC Charts

The following group indications are available:
• (_:300) Group alarm
• (_:301) Group warning
• (_:302) Group indication
You can find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device) → Information routing. In the
operating range, you can find the signals under Alarm handling (see the following figure).
[scgrwarn-010313-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-27 Group Monitoring Indication in the DIGSI 5 Information Routing Matrix
Group Indication Group Alarm

The indication (_:300) Group alarm is the group indication for defect-severity 4 monitoring. This moni-
toring has a special purpose, as it is set in a user-specific way by a binary input signal and not by internal
device supervision. Nevertheless, the response of the device is serious, for example, the blocking of all
protection and automatic functions (see chapter 8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm) ).
If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is set, the group indication (_:300) Group alarm is
activated. If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is reset, the signal (_:300) Group alarm
is also reset and the device returns to the normal operating state.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive that initiates the >Group
Alarm . This CFC chart checks whether the device is still accidentally in the simulation or commissioning
mode.
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name
of the device → Charts.
Group Indication Group Warning

The indication (_:301) Group warning is the group indication for defect-severity 1 monitoring. Some
error messages of defect severity 1 are firmly connected to the signal (_:301) Group warning , others
are connected in a flexible way via a CFC chart in the device delivery condition. This allocation is described in
chapter 8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 .
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Group warning that initiates the Group warning .
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name
of the device → Charts.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
The group-warning indication (_:301) Group warning is prerouted to an LED of the base module.
Group Indication
The Group indication is used only for user-specific purposes. There is no internal device supervision
function that activates this indication. If the binary input signal (_:505) >Group Indication is set, the
indication (_:302) Group indication is activated and recorded in the operational log. In the delivery
condition, there is no further response of the device. If the binary input signal is reset, the signal (_:302)
Group indication drops out. You can define via a CFC chart when the binary input signal (_:505)
>Group Indication is to be set.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
9 Measured and Energy Values
9.1 Overview of Functions 360

9.2 Structure of the Function 361
9.3 Operational Measured Values 362
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components 364
9.5 Average Values 365
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values 368

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Measured and Energy Values
9.1 Overview of Functions
9.1 Overview of Functions

The measurands are recorded at the measuring points and forwarded to the function groups.
Within the function groups, further measurands are calculated from these measured values, which are
required for the functions of this function group. This is how, for example, the electric power is calculated from
the voltage and current measurands.
Basic instructions for acquisition and editing process data can be found in the chapter Basic Functional Struc-
ture 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
[dwomverf-010212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-1 Structure of Measured-Value Acquisition and Processing
For the display, the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups:
• Operational measured values
• Fundamental and symmetrical components

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
9.2 Structure of the Function
9.2 Structure of the Function

Depending on the interconnection of the function groups, these can contain different measured-value groups.
A typical function group is displayed below.
3-Phase Voltage and Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Groups

In the simplest version, the 3-phase voltage and Voltage/current 3-phase function groups obtain the meas-
ured values of the 3-phase voltage and current system and contain the following measured-value groups:
[dwomvstr-110912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-2 Structure of Measured Values in Function Groups
The Operational measured values and Fundamental components measured value groups can be inserted
from the DIGSI 5 library into the 3-phase voltage and Voltage/current 3-phase function groups.
Details regarding the individual measured value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters.
Inversion of Power-Related Measured Values

The calculated, directional values in the operational measured values (power, power factor, energy and
minimum, maximum, and average values based on these) are normally defined as positive in the direction of
the protected object. This requires that the connection polarity for the measuring points used be correctly set
(also compare Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter of the measuring point current, 3-phase). It
is, however, possible, to set the "forward" direction for the protection functions and the positive direction for
the powers, etc., differently, for example, such that the active power import (from the line to the busbar) is
displayed positively. Then set the option P, Q sign in the affected function groups on the reversed
parameter. With the parameter not reversed (default setting), the positive direction for power, etc., corre-
sponds to the "forward" direction for the protection functions.
The affected values are given in detail in Chapter 9.3 Operational Measured Values .

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
9.3 Operational Measured Values

Operational measured values are assigned to different function groups.
The values can be displayed as primary and secondary values and as percentage values.
The operational measured values are calculated according to the following definition equations:
RMS values
Active power
Apparent power
Reactive power
n Harmonic order
jn The angle difference between the voltage and current of the nth harmonic
Power factor
Operational Measured Values of the Function Groups

The following table describes the operational measured values of the 3-phase voltage and 3-phase voltage/
current function groups.
All recorder functions have access to the values.
Table 9-1 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Group

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary values
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Calculated zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/√3
Vr Measured neutral-point displace- kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/√3
ment voltage
P Active power MW W Active power of the primary values
Q Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary values
S Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary values
λ Power factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to λ = 1

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

dary
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW W Active power of the phase
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the phase
Wp+, Wp- Output and consumed active MWh Wh
energy
Refer to 9.3 Operational Meas-
ured Values
Wq+, Wq- Output and consumed reactive Mvarh varh
energy
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted:
• Active power (total): P total
• Active power (phase-related): PA, PB, PC
• Reactive power (total): Q total
• Reactive power (phase-related): QA, QB, and QC

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components

The fundamental components are calculated from the instantaneous values through a Fourier filter (integra-
tion interval: one period). The results are phasor values that are described by way of the amount and phase.
In accordance with the transformation matrix, the symmetrical components are calculated from the voltage
and current phasors. These are also phasor quantities.
Fundamental Components
Table 9-2 Fundamental Components
Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VNg Measured neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
values
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary
values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary
values
Symmetrical Components
Table 9-3 Symmetrical Components
Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
V0 Zero-sequence component of the kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
V1 Positive-sequence component of the kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
V2 Negative-sequence component of the kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
I0 Zero-sequence component of the A A Rated operating current of the primary
current values
I1 Positive-sequence component of the A A Rated operating current of the primary
current values
I2 Negative-sequence component of the A A Rated operating current of the primary
current values

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
9.5 Average Values
9.5 Average Values
9.5.1 Function Description of Average Values
Average values can be formed based on different measurands:

• Symmetrical components
Through the settings, you can set how and when the average values are formed. The settings describe:
• Time slot over which the average value is formed
(Parameter: Average calc. interval )
• Update interval for the display of the average values

(Parameter: Average update interval )
• Synchronization time for establishing the date of commencement updating information, for example, at
the top of the hour (hh:00) or at one of the other times (hh:15, hh:30, hh:45).
(Parameter: Average synchroniz. time )
Average values are formed through the following measurands:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components

You reset the average value formation via the
• Binary input >Reset average value
• DIGSI
• The integrated operation panel
NOTE
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Reactive power (total): Q total
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values
The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with the devices in the function group. If you
use the functionality, you must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the average values can be set with DIGSI and at the device.
You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Average calc. interval
• Default setting: (_:104) Average calc. interval = 60 min

1 min to 60 min Time slot for averaging, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average update interval
• Default setting: (_:105) Average update interval = 60 min

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
9.5 Average Values

1 min to 60 min Update interval for displaying the average value, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average synchroniz. time
• Default setting: (_:106) Average synchroniz. time = hh:00

The parameter describes the synchronization time for average value formation.

hh:00 The parameter Average update interval will be
effective on the full hour
effective 15 minutes after the full hour
NOTE
i The average value calculation restarts after

• Changing one of the 3 settings for the average-value calculation
• Resetting the device (initial or normal reset)
• Changing the time
• Resetting the average values

The average values are reset immediately. The display changes to "---".
The following examples explain how to set parameters and to make a change.
Average calc. interval = 60 min

Average update interval = 30 min
Average synchroniz. time = hh:15.
A new average value is formed every 30 min, at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour) and hh:45 (15 min
before the top of the hour). All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value
formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
In this example, the Average synchroniz. time = hh:45 acts as described above for = hh:15.

A new average value is formed every 60 min at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour). All measured values
obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation.


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
9.5 Average Values
A new average value is formed every 10 min at hh:00, hh:10, hh:20, hh:30, hh:40, hh:50. All measured
values obtained during the last 5 min are used to form the average value.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values
9.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values
Minimum and maximum values can be formed based on different measured or calculated measurands:
• Symmetrical components
• Selected values
You can set which measurand will be used. The measurands for the minimum/maximum formation are loaded
from DIGSI.
Calculation and resetting of the minimum and maximum values are controlled through settings. The settings
describe the following points:
• Memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0 cyclically or not at all.
(Setting Min/Max cyclic reset )
• Point in time when the memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0.
(Setting Min/Max reset each and setting Min/Max reset minute )
• Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum/maximum values begins (after the
parameterization)
(Setting Min/Max days until start )
The following figure shows the effect of the settings.
[dwminmax-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-3 Minimum and Maximum-Value Formation
Minimum and maximum values are time-stamped.

Minimum/maximum values are formed through:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components
• Average values
The minimum and maximum values are reset on a regular basis or via the
• Binary input >Reset min/max
• DIGSI
• The integrated operation panel

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Minimum/maximum values of the active and reactive power:
Min:Ptotal, Max:Ptotal, Min:Qtotal, Max:Qtotal
• Minimum/maximum values of the average values of the active and reactive power:
AverageMin:Ptotal, AverageMax:Ptotal, AverageMin:Qtotal, AverageMax:Qtotal
9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values
The minimum/maximum values functionality is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you
must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the minimum/maximum values can be set with DIGSI or at
the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Min/Max cyclic reset
• Default setting: (_:107) Min/Max cyclic reset = yes

Yes Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is activated
No Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is deactivated
None of the following parameters are visible
Parameter: Min/Max reset each
• Default setting: (_:108) Min/Max reset each = 1 day

1 day to 365 days Resetting of the minimum value and the maximum value, cyclically on all specified
days, for example each day (1 day)
Parameter: Min/Max reset minute
• Default setting: (_:109) Min/Max reset minute = 0 min

0 min to 1439 min Resetting the minimum value and the maximum value at the specified minute of the
day, which is stated in the parameter Min/Max Reset takes place every, for
example 0 min (= 00:00)
Parameter: Min/Max days until start
• Default setting: (_:110) Min/Max days until start = 1 day:

1 day to 365 days Indication of when the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum values and
maximum values begins, for example in 1 day (after the parameterization)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
10 Functional Tests
10.1 Overview 372

10.2 Directional Test 373

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.1 Overview
10.1 Overview
Various tests have to be performed for commissioning to warrant the correct function of the device.
For tests using secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurands are locked in and trip and
close commands to the circuit breakers are interrupted, unless otherwise indicated.
Secondary tests can never replace primary tests because they cannot include connection faults. They provide
a theoretical check of the setting values only.
Primary tests may be done only by qualified personnel who are familiar with the commissioning of protection,
monitoring and fault recording systems, with the operation of the system, and with safety regulations and
provisions (switching, grounding, etc.).
Switching operations also have to be performed for the commissioning. The described tests require that these
be capable of being performed safely. They were not conceived for operational checks.
Functional tests must be repeated at regular intervals and include:
• Current and voltage measured values
• Binary Inputs and Outputs
• Trigger settings
• Communication interfaces
• Fault recording and failure indications

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.2 Directional Test
10.2 Directional Test

The proper connection of the current and voltage transformer is checked with load current via the line to be
monitored or the monitored object. Switch the line off for this. A load current of at least 0.1 IN has to flow via
the line; it should be ohmic to ohmic inductive. The direction of the load current has to be known. In case of
doubt, meshed and ring systems should be unraveled. The line remains switched on the for the duration of
the measurements.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured value. First make sure that the power
measured values correspond to the power direction. Normally, it can be assumed that the forward direction
(measuring direction) goes from the busbar toward the line.
Using the power measured values at the device or DIGSI 5, make sure that it corresponds to the power direc-
tion:
• P is positive if the active power flows in the line or in the monitored object.
• P is negative if the active power flows to the busbar or out of the monitored object.
• Q is positive if the lagging reactive power flows in the line or in the monitored object.
• P is negative if the lagging reactive power flows to the busbar or out of the monitored object.
If the power measured values have a different sign than expected, then the power flow is opposite to the
current-direction definition. This can be the case, for example, at the opposite end of the line. The set of
current transformers then points in the direction of the monitored object (such as the line).
If the values are not as expected, it may be due to a polarity reversal at the voltage connection.
As a final step, switch off the system.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
11 Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data 376

11.2 Date and Time Synchronization 383
11.3 Phasor Measurement Unit 384
11.4 Recorder Functions 385
11.5 Supervision Functions 388
11.6 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values 391
11.7 CFC 395

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
11.1.1 Supply Voltage
Integrated Power Supply

For modular devices, the following printed circuit-board assemblies have a power supply:
PS201 – Power supply of the base module and of the 1st device row
PS203 – Voltage supply of 2nd device row
CB202 – Plug in module assembly with integrated power supply, for example, to accommodate communica-
tion modules
Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to DC 300 V
ranges AC 80 V to AC 265 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
(PS201, PS203, CB202)
Auxiliary rated voltage VH DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/DC 125 V/DC 220 V/
(PS201, PS203, CB202) DC 250 V or
AC 100 V/AC 115 V/AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to 150 V DC 88 V to DC 300 V
ranges (PS101) AC 80 V to AC 265 V,
50 Hz/60 Hz
Auxiliary rated voltage VH DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/ DC 110 V/ DC 125 V/
(PS101) DC 125 V DC 220 V/DC 250 V
or
AC 100 V/AC 115 V/
AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Superimposed alternating voltage, peak-to-peak, ≤ 15% of the DC auxiliary rated voltage (applies only
IEC 60255-11 to direct voltage)
Inrush current ≤ 18 A
Recommended external protection Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, characteristic C
according to IEC 60898
Internal fuse
– DC 24 V to DC 48 V DC 60 V to DC 125 V DC 24 V to DC 48 V
AC 100 V to AC 230 V
PS101 4 A intert, AC 250 V, 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
DC 150 V, SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or
Schurter type SPT 5x20
PS201, PS203, CB202 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
Power consumption (life relay active)
– DC AC 230 V/50 Hz AC 115 V/50 Hz
1/3 base module, non- 7.0 W 16 VA 12.5 VA
modular
Without plug-in modules
1/3 base module, modular 13 W 33 VA 24 VA
Without plug-in modules
1/6 expansion module 3W 6 VA 6 VA

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Integrated Power Supply

1/6 plug-in module 3.5 W 14 VA 7 VA
assembly without plug-in
modules (modules
CB202)
Plug-in module for base <5W < 6 VA < 6 VA
module or plug-in module
assembly (for example,
communication module)
Stored-energy time for auxiliary voltage outage or For V ≥ DC 24 V ≥ 50 ms
short circuit, modular devices For V ≥ DC 110 V ≥ 50 ms
For V ≥ AC 115 V ≥ 50 ms
Stored-energy time for auxiliary voltage outage or For V ≥ DC 24 V ≥ 20 ms
short circuit, non-modular devices For V ≥ DC 60 V/DC 110 V ≥ 50 ms
For V ≥ AC 115 V ≥ 200 ms
11.1.2 Binary Inputs
Rated voltage range DC 24 V to 250 V

The binary inputs of SIPROTEC 5 are bipolar with the exception of the
binary inputs on the IO230 and on the IO231.
Current consumption, excited Approx. DC 0.6 mA to 1.8 mA (independent of the operating voltage)
Power consumption, max. 0.6 VA
Pickup time Approx. 3 ms
Dropout time Approx. 4 ms
Switching thresholds Adjustable with DIGSI 5
Range 1 for 24 V, 48 V, and 60 V Vlow ≤ DC 10 V
Operating voltage Vhigh ≥ DC 19 V
Range 2 for 110 V and 125 V Vlow ≤ DC 44 V
Range 3 for 220 V and 250 V Vlow ≤ DC 88 V
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. In order to ensure EMC, use the terminals
shown in the terminal diagrams/connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common potential.
11.1.3 Relay Outputs
Standard Relay (Type S)
Switching capacity On: 1000 W/VA

Off: 30 VA; 40 W ohmic;
30 W/VA at L/R ≤ 40 ms
AC and DC contact voltage 250 V
Permissible current per contact (continuous) 5A
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s (make contact)
holding)
Short-time current across closed contact 250 A for 30 ms

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Total permissible current for contacts connected to 5A

common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) ≤ 10 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance DC 24 V, 8 A, General Purpose
with UL certification DC 48 V, 0.8 A, General Purpose
DC 240 V, 0.1 A, General Purpose
AC 240 V, 5 A, General Purpose
AC 120 V, 1/3 hp
AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
B300
R300
Interference suppression capacitors across the 4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
contacts
Fast Relay (Type F)
Switching capacity On: 1000 W/VA

Off: 30 VA; 40 W ohmic;
30 W/VA at L/R ≤ 40 ms
holding)
common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Closing time, typical: 4 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used Opening time, typical: 2 ms
Maximum: ≤ 5 ms
Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with AC 120 V, 8.5 A, General Purpose
UL certification AC 277 V, 6 A, General Purpose
AC 277 V, 0.7 hp
AC 347 V, 4.5 A, General Purpose
B300
R300
contacts
Supervision 2-channel activation with cyclic testing (only for make
contact)
High-Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration (Type HS)
Switching capacity On/Off: 1000 W/VA

Contact voltage AC 200 V, DC 250 V
holding)
common potential

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Closing time, typical: 0.2 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used Opening time, typical: 6 ms
Maximum: ≤ 9 ms
Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with B150
UL certification Q300
Power Relay (for Direct Control of Motor Switches)
Switching capacity for permanent and periodic operation

250 V/4.0 A 1000 W In order to prevent any damage, the external protec-
220 V/4.5 A 1000 W tion circuit must switch off the motor in case the rotor
110 V/5.0 A 550 W is blocked.
60 V/5.0 A 300 W
48 V/5.0 A 240 W
24 V/5.0 A 120 W
Turn on switching power for 30 s, recovery time until switching on again is 15 minutes.
For short-term switching operations, an impulse/pause ratio of 3 % must be considered.
100 V/9.0 A 1000 W Continuous and inching operation is not permitted.
60 V/10.0 A 600 W In order to prevent any damage, the external protec-
48 V/10.0 A 480 W tion circuit must switch off the motor in case the rotor
24 V/10.0 A 240 W is blocked.
Permissible continuous current per contact 5A
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s
holding)
common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) ≤ 16 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used
Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with DC 300 V, 10 A, Resistive
UL certification DC 250 V, 1 hp motor - 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
DC 110 V, 3/4 hp motor - 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
contacts
The power relays operate in interlocked mode, that is, only one relay of each switching pair picks up at a
time thereby avoiding a power-supply short circuit.
11.1.4 Design Data
Masses
Device Size
Weight of the Modular Devices
Type of construction 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
Flush-mounting device 4.8 kg 8.1 kg 11.4 kg 14.7 kg 18.0 kg
Surface-mounted device with inte- 7.8 kg 12.6 kg 17.4 kg 22.2 kg 27.0 kg
grated on-site operation panel

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Device Size
Weight of the Modular Devices
Surface-mounted device with 5.1 kg 8.7 kg 12.3 kg 15.9 kg 19.5 kg
detached on-site operation panel
Size Weight
Detached on-site operation panel 1/3 1.9 kg
Detached on-site operation panel 1/6 1.1 kg
Device Size
Weight of the Non-Modular Devices 7xx82
Type of construction 1/3
Flush-mounting device 3.7 kg
Bracket for non-modular surface- 1.9 kg
mounting variant
Dimensions of the Basic and 1/3 Modules
Type of Construction (Maximum Dimensions) Width over all x Height over all x Depth 19(in Inches)
Flush-mounting device 150 mm x 268 mm x 229 mm (5.91 x 10.55 x 9.02)
Surface-mounted device with integrated on-site oper- 150 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm (5.91 x 12.36 x 13.27)
ation panel
Surface-mounted device with detached on-site opera- 150 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm (5.91 x 12.36 x 9.06)
tion panel
Dimensions of Device Rows
Type of Width over all x Height over all x Depth 20(in Inches)
Construction
(Maximum
Dimensions)
Type of 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
construction
Flush-mounting 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
device 268 mm x 268 mm x 268 mm x 268 mm x 268 mm x
229 mm (5.91 x 229 mm (8.86 x 229 mm(11.81 x 229 mm (14.76 x 229 mm (17.72 x
10.55 x 9.02) 10.55 x 9.02) 10.55 x 9.02) 10.55 x 9.02) 10.55 x 9.02)
Surface- 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
mounted device 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x
with integrated 337 mm (5.91 x 337 mm (8.86 x 337 mm (11.81 x 337 mm (14.76 x 337 mm (17.72 x
on-site operation 12.36 x 13.27) 12.36 x 13.27) 12.36 x 13.27) 12.36 x 13.27) 12.36 x 13.27)
panel
Surface- 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
mounted device 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x
with detached 230 mm (5.91 x 230 mm (8.86 x 230 mm (11.81 x 230 mm (14.76 x 230 mm (17.72 x
on-site operation 12.36 x 9.06) 12.36 x 9.06) 12.36 x 9.06) 12.36 x 9.06) 12.36 x 9.06)
panel
19 Width and depth rounded to whole numbers in mm


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Expansion Module Dimensions
Type of Construction (Maximum Dimensions) Width x Height x Depth 21 (in Inches)

Flush-mounting device 75 mm x 268 mm x 229 mm (2.95 x 10.55 x 9.02)
Surface-mounted device with integrated on-site oper- 75 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm (2.95 x 12.36 x 13.27)
ation panel
Surface-mounted device with detached on-site opera- 75 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm (2.95 x 12.36 x 9.06)
tion panel
Plug-In Module Dimensions
Type of Construction (Maximum Dimensions) Width x Height x Depth (in Inches)

USART-Ax-xEL, ETH-Bx-xEL 61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 4.74)
USART-Ax-xFO, ETH-Bx-xFO (without protection 61 mm x 45 mm x 132.5 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 5.22)
cover)
ANAI-CA-4EL 61 mm x 45 mm x 119.5 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 4.7)
ARC-CD-3FO 61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 4.74)
Minimum Bending Radii of the Connecting Cables Between the On-Site Operation Panel and the Base Module
Fiber-optic cable R = 50 mm
Pay attention to the length of the cable protection
sleeve, which you must also include in calculations.
D-Sub cable R = 50 mm (minimum bending radius)
Degree of Protection to IEC 60529
For equipment in the surface-mounting housing IP50

For equipment in the flush-mounting housing Front IP51
Back side of the modular devices IP50
Back side of the non-modular devices IP40
For operator protection IP2x for current terminal (installed removed)
IP1x for voltage terminal (removed/without cover)
IP2x for voltage terminal (removed/with cover)
IP2x for voltage terminal (installed)
Degree of pollution, IEC 60255-27 2
Maximum altitude above sea level 2000 m (6561.68 ft)
UL Note
Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure.

When expanding the device with the 2nd device row, then they must be mounted completely inside an
enclosure.
Tightening Torques for Terminal Screws
Type of Line Current Terminal Voltage Terminal with Voltage Terminal with
Spring-Loaded Terminals Screw Connection
Litz wire with ring-type lug 2.7 Nm No ring-type lug No ring-type lug
Stranded wires with boot- 2.7 Nm 1.0 Nm 0.6 Nm
lace ferrules or pin-type
lugs

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Type of Line Current Terminal Voltage Terminal with Voltage Terminal with
Spring-Loaded Terminals Screw Connection
Solid conductor, bare 2.0 Nm 1.0 Nm –
(2 mm2)
NOTE
i Use copper cables only.
Torques for Other Screw Types
Screw Type Torque

M4 x 20 1.2 Nm
M4 x 8 1.2 Nm
M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 8 0.39 Nm
Collar screw, M4 x 20 0.7 Nm
11.1.5 Influencing Variables for Measured Values
Auxiliary voltage: 0.8 Var to 1.2 Var ≤ 0.2 %

Ambient temperature -10 °C to 55 °C ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency: 45 Hz to 65 Hz ≤1%
Harmonics ≤1%
• Up to 10 % of 3rd harmonics ≤1%
• Up to 10 % of 5th harmonics
Warmup ≤ 0.3 %
Transient excess pickup in fundamental component measurement ≤5%
method for τ > 100 ms (with complete unbalance)
EMC interference ≤ 1.5 %
11.1.6 SDHC Memory Card
NOTE
i You can use only Siemens SDHC memory cards.
Capacity 16 GB22
Performance class ≥ Class 10
Temperature range -40 °C to +85 °C
Flash type SLC
Dimensions
Width x Height x Depth (in Inches)

SDHC memory card 24 mm x 32 mm x 2.1 mm (0.94 x 1.26 x 0.08)
22 Usable capacity: Approx. 15 GB

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Date format DD.MM.YYYY (Europe)
MM/DD/YYYY (USA)
YYYY-MM-DD (China)
Time source 1, time source 2 None
IRIG B
DCF77
PI
SNTP
Time zone 1, time zone 2 Local
UTC
Failure indication after 0 s to 3600 s
Time zone and daylight saving time Transfer of PC settings
Manually setting the time zones
Time zone offset with respect to GMT -720 min to 840 min
Switching over to daylight saving time Active
Inactive
Beginning of daylight saving time Input: Day and time
End of daylight saving time Input: Day and time
Offset daylight saving time -120 to 120 [steps of 15]

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.3 Phasor Measurement Unit
11.3 Phasor Measurement Unit

Accuracy
As per IEEE Std C37.118.1a-2013
Synchrophasor Standard
IEEE Std C37.118.1-2011

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.4 Recorder Functions
11.4.1 Fast-Scan Recorder
Setting Values
Fast-Scan Recorder Setting Range Increment

Memory capacity 0.200 GB to 15.000 GB Increments of 1
Maximum record time 1.0 s to 90.0 s Increments of 0.1
Pre-trigger time 0 s to 3.0 s Increments of 0.1
Post-trigger time 1.0 s to 90.0 s Increments of 0.1
Manual record time 1.0 s to 90.0 s Increments of 0.1
Sampling frequency 1 kHz to 16 kHz Increments of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
Retrigger blocking time 0.0 s to 3600 s Increments of 0.1
Number of Recorder Instances
Fast-scan recorder 1 (fix)
Signals to be Recorded
Refer to Number of Routable Measured Values (MV) and Binary Tracks (SPS), Page 386
Trigger
Frequency trigger
Power trigger
Voltage trigger
Current trigger
11.4.2 Slow-Scan Recorder
Setting Values
Slow-Scan Recorder Setting Range Increment

Maximum record time 1 min to 90 min Increments of 1
Pre-trigger time 0 s to 90 s Increments of 1
Post-trigger time 1 min to 90 min Increments of 1
Manual record time 1 min to 90 min Increments of 1
Averaging time 1 to 3000 periods Increments of 1
Retrigger blocking time 0 min to 240 min Increments of 1
Slow-scan recorder 0 to 2
Trigger
Frequency trigger

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Power trigger
Voltage trigger
Current trigger
11.4.3 Continuous Recorder
Setting Values
Continuous Recorder Setting Range Increment

Averaging time 1 s to 900 s
Continuous recorder 0 to 5
11.4.4 Trend Recorder
Setting Values
Trend Recorder Setting Range Increment

Trend recorder 0 to 2
11.4.5 Measured Values and Binary Inputs
Binary Inputs
Sampling 4 kHz23
Resolution 1 ms
Refresh rate Event-driven
Number of Routable Measured Values (MV) and Binary Tracks (SPS)
Recorder Measured Values (MV) Binary Tracks (SPS)

Fast-scan recorder 75 200
Slow-scan recorder 75 100
Continuous recorder 75 –
Trend recorder 100 200
23 Toggle rates applied permanently and greater than 10 Hz are not recommended.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Routable Measurands
Measurands
Frequency
Voltage
Current
Power
PQ 10/12 cycles
PQ trend
PQ flicker (according to IEC 61000-4-15, Class F3)
Measuring-transducer measurands (I/O modules)
Measuring-transducer measurands (measuring-transducer module, for example, ANAI-CA-4EL)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.5 Supervision Functions
11.5.1 Voltage-Balance Supervision
Setting Values
Release threshold value 0,300 V to 170,000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Threshold value min/max 0.58 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Overvoltage dropout ratio Approx. 0.97

Undervoltage dropout ratio Approx. 1.05
Times
Tripping time Approx. 500 ms

11.5.2 Voltage-Sum Supervision
Setting Values
Threshold value 0.300 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.97
Times

11.5.3 Voltage Phase-Rotation Reversal
Setting Values

Phase-rotation direction ABC
ACB
Dropout Ratio
Times


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.5.4 Broken-Wire Detection
Setting Values
Value Setting Range Increment

Mode of blocking Blocking -
Automatic blocking
No blocking
Delta value for autoblock 0.004 I/Irated to 5.000 I/Irated 0.001
11.5.5 Current-Balance Supervision
Setting Values
Release threshold value Irated= 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Irated= 5 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Threshold value min/max 0.10 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01
Dropout Ratio
Overcurrent dropout ratio About 0.97

Undercurrent dropout ratio About 1.05
Times

11.5.6 Current-Sum Supervision
Setting Values
Slope of the characteristic curve 0.00 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01

Threshold 1 A @ 50 and 100 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Irated
5 A @ 50 and 100 0.15 A to 50.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Irated
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A Increments of 0.001 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio About 0.97
Times


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.5.7 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
Setting Values

Phase-rotation direction ABC
ACB
Dropout Ratio
Times

11.5.8 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum
Times
Pickup times Approx. 2 ms (faster than the fastest protection function)


C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.6 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values

Voltages
VA, VB, VC V secondary

Voltage range < 200 V secondary
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V
Measuring range (0.8 to 2) · Vrated
Frequency range 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance 0.1 % of the measured value in the above mentioned
measuring range
Frequency range (expanded) 40 Hz to 60 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
measuring range
VAB, VBC, VCA V secondary
Voltage range < 200 V
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V
Measuring range (0.8 to 2) · Vrated
measuring range
measuring range
Currents, Instrument Transformers
IA, IB, IC, 3l0 A secondary

Current range < 1.6 Irated
Rated currents 1 A, 5 A
Measuring range (0.1 to 1.6) · Irated
Tolerance 0.1 % of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range
(expanded) 50 Hz to 70 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Currents, Protection-Class Current Transformer
IA, IB, IC, 3l0 A secondary

Current range < 100 Irated

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Measuring range 0.1 to 25 A
Currents, Sensitive Ground-Current Transformer
3I0 A secondary
Current range < 1.6 Irated
Measuring range (0.1 to 1.6) · Irated
Phase Angle
ΦV °
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance ΦV 0.2 ° at rated voltage
ΦI °
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance ΦI 0.2 ° at rated current
Power Values
Active power P W secondary

Measuring range |cosφ| ≥ 0.01
Voltage range (0.8 to 1.2) · Vrated
Current range (0.1 to 2) · Irated
measuring range
measuring range
Reactive power Q var secondary

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Measuring range |cosφ| ≥ 0.984

measuring range
measuring range
Apparent power S VA
Measuring range (0.01 to 2) · Srated
Frequency range
measuring range
measuring range
Frequency
Frequency f Hz
Range frated - 0.20 Hz < frated + 0.20 Hz
Tolerance ± 5 mHz in the Vrated range
Range frated - 3.00 Hz < frated + 3.00 Hz
Tolerance ± 10 mHz in the Vrated range
Frequency range 25 Hz to 80 Hz; operational measured values
(expanded) 10 Hz to 80 Hz; functional measured values, system frequency
Tolerance 20 mHz in the range frated ± 10 % for rated values
Statistic Values of the Device
Device Operating Hours h

Range 0 to 9999999 h
Tolerance 1h
Statistic Values of the Circuit Breaker
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None
∑I Off (sum of the primary A, kA, MA, GA, TA, PA primary
outgoing currents)
Range 0 to 9.2e+15

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Operating hours h
Tolerance 1h
CB open hours h
Tolerance 1h
Statistic Values of the Disconnector
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.7 CFC
11.7 CFC
Typical response times and maximum number of ticks of the CFC task levels:
Task Level Time (in ms) Max. Number of Ticks CP300
Fast Event-triggered <1 1500
Event-triggered < 5 (< 10 ms) 12 397
Interlocking < 5 (< 10 ms) 28 656 in total
Measurement 250
The times describe the response time of a typical CFC chart at the respective task level. The maximum
number of ticks applies to a typical load for the device based on the application template Fault recorder N6:
1/1, 43 BI, 33 BO, 20I, 20V
The task level Measurement runs in cycles every 500 ms. All other task levels are event-triggered.
In order to estimate the tick consumption of a CFC chart, you can use the following formula:
Tchart = 5 ∙ nInp + 5 ∙ nOutp + TTLev + ∑i Tint + ∑j TBlock
where:
nInp Number of indications routed as input in the CFC chart
nOutp Number of indications routed as output in the CFC chart
TTLev 101 Ticks in Fast Event-Triggered Level
104 Ticks in Event-Triggered Level
54 Ticks in Measurement Level
74 Ticks in Interlocking Level
Tint Number of internal connections between 2 CFC blocks in one chart
TBlock Used ticks per CFC block (see Technical Data)
Table 11-1 Ticks of the Individual CFC Blocks
Element Ticks
ABS_D 2.3
ABS_R 1.5
ACOS_R 6.9
ADD_D4 3.4
ADD_R4 3.3
ADD_XMV 6.4
ALARM 1.8
AND_SPS 1.1
AND10 2.9
APC_DEF 1.2
APC_EXE 1.0
ASIN_R 1.3
ATAN_R 1.2
BLINK 1.3
BOOL_CNT 2.0
BOOL_INT 1.5
BSC_DEF 1.3
BSC_EXE 1.1
BUILD_ACD 2.9
BUILD_ACT 2.2

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.7 CFC
Element Ticks
BUILD_BSC 1.2
BUILD_DPS 1.4
BUILD_ENS 1.3
BUILD_Q 0.8
BUILD_SPS 0.6
BUILD_XMV 1.1
BUILDC_Q 3.0
CHART_STATE 5.9
CMP_DPS 1.5
CON_ACD 0.7
CON_ACT 0.5
CONNECT 0.4
COS_R 2.5
CTD 1.8
CTU 1.6
CTUD 2.3
DINT_REAL 3.0
DINT_UINT 3.0
DIV_D 2.9
DIV_R 1.6
DIV_XMV 2.2
DPC_DEF 0.4
DPC_EXE 0.4
DPC_INFO 1.1
DPC_OUT 1.3
DPS_SPS 1.0
DRAGI_R 1.7
EQ_D 1.0
EQ_R 1.9
EXP_R 1.5
EXPT_R 2.7
F_TRGM 0.3
F_TRIG 0.3
FF_D 0.9
FF_D_MEM 1.4
FF_RS 0.7
FF_RS_MEM 1.2
FF_SR 0.8
FF_SR_MEM 1.1
GE_D 0.9
GE_R 1.1
GT_D 0.9
GT_R 1.2
HOLD_D 1.1
HOLD_R 1.0
INC_INFO 0.9
LE_D 1.1

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.7 CFC
Element Ticks
LE_R 1.1
LIML_R 1.5
LIMU_R 1.5
LN_R 3.3
LOG_R 1.2
LOOP 1.5
LT_D 0.9
LT_R 0.9
MAX_D 0.9
MAX_R 1.4
MEMORY_D 0.9
MEMORY_R 1.1
MIN_D 0.7
MIN_R 1.3
MOD_D 1.5
MUL_D4 2.5
MUL_R4 2.7
MUL_XMV 2.8
MUX_D 1.2
MUX_R 0.9
NAND10 3.5
NE_D 0.9
NE_R 0.9
NEG 1.2
NEG_SPS 0.8
NLC_LZ 7.1
NLC_XMV 4.4
NLC_ZP 3.0
NOR10 3.2
OR_DYN 1.1
OR_SPS 1.3
OR10 2.6
R_TRGM 0.4
R_TRIG 0.4
REAL_DINT 3.0
REAL_SXMV 3.0
SIN_R 0.8
SPC_DEF 0.4
SPC_EXE 0.4
SPC_INFO 0.4
SPC_OUT 0.4
SPLIT_ACD 3.4
SPLIT_ACT 1.0
SPLIT_BSC 1.3
SPLIT_DPS 1.0
SPLIT_Q 0.7
SPLIT_SPS 0.8

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.7 CFC
Element Ticks
SPLIT_XMV 0.8
SQRT_R 0.6
SUB_D 1.3
SUB_R 1.6
SUB_XMV 2.4
SUBST_B 1.0
SUBST_BQ 1.5
SUBST_D 1.0
SUBST_R 1.0
SUBST_XQ 1.4
SXMV_REAL 3.0
TAN_R 1.1
TLONG 2.2
TOF 1.0
TON 1.1
TT 2.5
TSHORT 1.9
UINT_DINT 3.0

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
A Appendix
A.1 Order Options and Accessories 400

A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions 402
A.3 Standard Variants for 7KE85 405
A.4 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 409
A.5 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers 412
A.6 Application Examples of the Fault Recorder 415
A.7 Shielding Concept 418
A.8 SDHC Memory Card 419
A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card 421

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.1 Order Options and Accessories

Order Configurator
The order configurator assists you in the selection of SIPROTEC 5 products. The order configurator is a Web
application that can be used with any browser. The order configurator can be used to configure complete
devices or individual components, such as communication modules, expansion modules, or other accesso-
ries. At the end of the configuration process, the product code and a detailed presentation of the configuration
result are provided. The product code unambiguously describes the selected product and also serves as an
order number.
Order Options
The following ordering options are possible for SIPROTEC 5 products:
• Device
• Single part
• DIGSI 5
• Functional enhancement
NOTE
i To order single parts in the order configurator, use the Single part link.
Individual parts are:

• Replacement base module
• Expansion module
• Plug-in module
• Operation panel
• Terminal/accessories
• Mechanical accessories
Ordering Accessories
NOTE
i To order terminals, terminal accessories, and mechanical accessories in the order configurator, use the
Single part link.
Table A-1 Accessories
Group Accessories
Terminal/accessories Voltage terminal, terminal block, 14-pole
Terminal/accessories Voltage input (power supply)
Terminal block, 2-pole
Terminal/accessories Current terminal, 4 x protection
Terminal/accessories Current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement
Terminal/accessories Current terminal, 4 x measurement
Terminal/accessories 2-pole cross connector for current terminal
Terminal/accessories 2-pole cross connector for voltage terminal
Terminal/accessories Cover for current terminal block
Terminal/accessories Cover for voltage terminal block

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Group Accessories
Mechanical accessories Cable set for operation panel
Mechanical accessories Cable set COM-link cable
Mechanical accessories Cable for detached on-site operation panel
Mechanical accessories Cover plate for plug-in modules
Mechanical accessories Labeling strips for LEDs/keypad
Mechanical accessories Set of part for mounting bracket 1/2
Mechanical accessories Screw cover 1/3
Mechanical accessories Screw cover 1/6
Mechanical accessories Bus termination plate

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions

The following typefaces are used to characterize parameters in the text:
Mode Parameter name
_:661:1 Parameter address
_ stands for the address combination from function
group:function
661, for example, stands for the address of the
setting parameter
from Parameter state
The following symbols are used in drawings:

Icon Description
Parameter
Parameters with setting values

The default setting is in the 1st position and displayed
in italics
Parameters with application-dependent setting values
Dynamic settings:
State logic
Health of a function, stage, or function block
External binary input signal with indication number
External output signal with indication number and

additional information
External output signal without indication number
Measured output value

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Icon Description
Binary input signal derived from an external output
signal
Internal input signal
Internal output signal
Analog input signal
Reset/Block a logic element
AND gate
OR gate
XOR gate
Negation
Threshold stage exceeded
Threshold stage exceeded with

reset of input
Threshold stage shortfall
Threshold stage shortfall with

reset of input

dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input

Dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input
Comparators
Pickup delay
Dropout delay
Pickup and dropout delay

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Icon Description
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a positive signal
edge
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a negative signal

edge
SR-Flip-Flop, RS-Flip-Flop, D-Flip-Flop
Characteristic curve
Minimum operate time

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.3 Standard Variants for 7KE85

Standard Variant N1: 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4I, 4V (Example with 1 x IO202)
[Sv7KE-Typ1-200314-01, 2, en_US]
Figure A-1 Standard Variant N1: 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4I, 4V (Example with 1 x IO202)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[Sv7KE-Typ2-190314-01, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Standard Variant N2: 1/3, 11 BI, 3 BO, 8V (Example with 1 x IO211)
[Sv7KE-Typ3-260314-01, 1, en_US]
Figure A-3 Standard Variant N2: 1/3, 11 BI, 3 BO, 8V (Example with 1 x IO211)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[Sv7KE-Typ4, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.4 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[ti3leit1-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-5 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer (Residual Current to be Calculated)
Figure A-6 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Path)
NOTE
i The switchover of current polarity at the 3-phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of
electric current for current input I4 (IN)!

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Figure A-7 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensi-
tive Ground-Fault Detection
NOTE
electric current for current input I4 (IN-sep)!
Figure A-8 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Ground Current from a Complete
Holmgreen Connection

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
NOTE
Figure A-9 Connection to a 2-Wire Current Transformer - for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems
Only
Figure A-10 Connection to a 2-Wire Current Transformer and Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensi-
tive Ground-Fault Detection - for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems Only
NOTE

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.5 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers
[tvvolta1-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-11 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers
Figure A-12 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Figure A-13 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding of a
Separate Voltage Transformer (for example, Busbar)
Figure A-14 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Trans-
former) and Connection to the Phase-to-Phase Voltage of a Busbar Voltage Transformer

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
NOTE
i When using the connection type 3-phase-to-phase voltage, the zero-sequence voltage cannot be
detected.
Figure A-15 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Trans-
former) and Connection to the Broken-Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.6 Application Examples of the Fault Recorder

Application Example: Fault Recorder
[dwanwsto-031212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure A-16 Application Example: Fault Recorder
FG Function group
MP Measuring point
CFC Continuous Function Chart
QA Circuit breaker
QB Disconnector
(1) Not available yet

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Application Example: Fault Recorder for Several Feeders
[dwrecfee-031212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure A-17 Application Example: Fault Recorder for Several Feeders
FG Function group
MP Measuring point
QA Circuit breaker
QB Disconnector

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Application Example: Fault Recorder with PMU
[dwrecpmu-031212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-18 Application Example: Fault Recorder with PMU
FG Function group
MP Measuring point
QA Circuit breaker
QB Disconnector
PMU Phasor Measurement Unit

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.7 Shielding Concept
A.7 Shielding Concept

The measuring accuracy of the fault recorder can only be maintained if the voltage and current signals are
connected to the device using shielded lines (1).
Siemens recommends stopping the cable shield at a maximum of 10 cm before the device terminals (1) and
connecting the cable shields near the device with low impedance via the shield terminals (4) to ground poten-
tial (2).
[dwbackvi-130213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure A-19 Shielding Concept
(1) Shielded lines

(2) To the main grounding busbar, cross-section at least 16 mm2
(3) Protective-conductor carrier rail
(4) Shield terminal
(5) Protective-conductor terminal of the device
• Recommended control line for voltage signals: 4•2•0.75 mm2 stranded shielded pair, for example, LiYCY
4x2x0.75
• Recommended control line for current signals: 4•2•2.5 mm2 stranded shielded pair, for example, LiYCY
4x2x2.5
NOTE
i Make sure not to damage the cable shield!

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.8 SDHC Memory Card

The SDHC memory card (Secure Digital High Capacity) is used to store records from the 7KE85 fault
recorder.
[dw_SDHC, 1, --_--]
Figure A-20 SDHC Memory Card
NOTE
i Reading the data of the SDHC memory card with a PC is not intended.
Avoid too frequent insertion cycles!
NOTE
i Use only the original SDHC memory card (ACCESAR) approved by Siemens for the 7KE85 fault recorder.
Replacing the SDHC Memory Card

² De-energize the device.
² Remove the sealing cap.
² Unlock the card by pressing the turquoise eject lever.
[le_Remove_cap_and_SDHC, 1, --_--]
Figure A-21 Removing the Sealing Cap and SDHC Memory Card

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
(1) Push the holder, push the sealing cap to the back and remove it
(2) Unlock the eject lever
(3) Remove the SDHC memory card
² Unpack the new SDHC memory card.

Do not touch the contacts of the SDHC memory card with your fingers.
² Insert the new SDHC memory card.
When inserting, make sure that the SDHC memory card is properly aligned: The side with the contacts
must be facing up, the side with the sticker facing down.
[dw_insert_SDHC, 1, --_--]
Figure A-22 Inserting the SDHC Memory Card into the Device
! CAUTION
Exercise caution when removing the SDHC memory card from a defective device.
If you want to remove the SDHC memory card from a defective device and to insert the card into another
healthy device and if the data must be kept, note the following:
Noncompliance with the specified measures can result in loss of data.
² To avoid a reformatting of the SDHC memory card, you must first import the parameters of the defec-
tive device to another device.
² You can insert the SDHC memory card in the other device and use it only then.
² The recordings on the SDHC memory card from the defective device can still be read in the other
device.
² Insert the sealing cap back again.

² Resume operation of the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card
A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card

Troubleshooting
In the following table, the possible malfunctions of the SDHC memory card and their causes and remedies
are listed.
Table A-2 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card
Defect Cause Indication

7KE85 device does not start in The SDHC memory card is SDHC memory card read/write
Process mode and switches to Fall- defective. error. Insert a new Siemens
back mode SDHC memory card.
The user does not use an Invalid or defective SDHC
original Siemens SDHC memory card found. Insert a
memory card. new Siemens SDHC memory
card.
No SDHC memory card is No SDHC memory card found or
inserted. memory card read/write
error. Insert a new Siemens
SDHC memory card.
In the function block General Infor- The SDHC memory card is No SDHC memory card found or
mation, the health state of the either defective or the card memory card read/write
recorder ((_:2701:53) Health) has been removed during error. Insert a new Siemens
switches to alarm mode. operation. SDHC memory card.
Remedy: Switch off the device auxiliary voltage and insert a Siemens SDHC memory card.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
ACD
IEC 61850 data type: Directional protection activation information
ACT
IEC 61850 data type: Protection activation information
Back-up battery
The back-up battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, times and counters are kept retentive.
BCR
IEC 61850 data type: Binary counter reading
CB
Circuit breaker
Chatter blocking
A rapidly intermittent input (for example, owing to a relay contact fault) is disconnected after a parameteriz-
able monitoring time and therefore cannot generate any more signal changes. The function prevents the
system from overloading in the event of an error.
Combination matrix
In an inter-device communication (IDC) group, up to 16 SIPROTEC devices suitable for this can communi-
cate with one another. The combination matrix specifies which devices exchange which information.
Common format for Transient Data Exchange

Fault record format - COMTRADE
COMTRADE
See the Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
Container
If an object contains other objects, this is referred to as a container. The object Folder for example is such a
container.
Continuous Function Chart (CFC)

The Continuous Function Chart (CFC) is a programming language. It is used for programmable logic control-
lers. The programming language Continuous Function Chart is not defined in the standard IEC 61131-3, but
represents a current extension of IEC programming environments. CFC is a graphic programming language.
Function blocks are linked to one another. This represents an essential difference from conventional
programming languages, where sequences of commands are entered.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Continuous Recorder
The continuous recorder is not a triggered recorder, runs constantly and has large averaging times. The
continuous recorder saves the arithmetic average value of the process quantities (power, frequency, RMS
values of the fundamental component of currents, voltages and symmetric components).
The continuous recorder is organized as a ring buffer. When the memory is filled completely, the oldest data
are overwritten automatically.
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
Data type
The data type is a value set of a data object, together with the operations allowed on this value set. A data
type contains a classification of a data element, such as the determination whether it consists of integers,
letters, or similar.
Data unit
Information item with a joint transmission source. Abbreviation: DU = Data Unit
Data window
The right area of the project window visualizes the content of the area selected in the navigation window. The
data window contains for example, indications or measured values of the information lists or the function
selection for parameterization of the device.
DB
See Double Command.
DC
Double Command – See Double Command.
DCF77
The precise official time is determined in Germany by the Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt PTB in
Brunswick. The atomic clock unit of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time signal transmitter in
Mainflingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1500 km
from Frankfurt/Main.
DCP
See Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol
DEL
Phase-to-phase related measurements of a 3-phase system
Device Container
In the component view, all SIPROTEC devices are subordinate to an object of the device container type. This
object is also a special object from the DIGSI-5 Manager. However, as there is no component view in the
DIGSI 5 Manager, this object only becomes visible in conjunction with STEP 7.
DIGSI
Configuration software for SIPROTEC
Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol

The DCP protocol is used to detect devices without IP addresses and to assign addresses to these devices.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
DM
See Double-point indication
Double command
Double commands (DC) are process outputs, which the on and off command can give separated on different
binary outputs.
Double-point indication
Double-point indications (DI) are process indications which visualize 4 process states at 2 inputs: 3 defined
states (for example, On/Off and disturbed position) and 1 undefined state (00).
DP
See Double-point indication
DPC
IEC 61850 data type: Double point control
DPS
IEC 61850 data type: Double-point status
Drag and drop

Copying, moving and linking function, used in graphic user interfaces. The mouse is used to highlight and
hold objects and then move them from one data area to another.
DU
See Data Unit
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) means that an item of electrical equipment functions without error in a
specified environment. The environment is not influenced in any impermissible way here.
ENC
Enumerated Status Controllable
ENS
Enumerated Status
Fast-Scan Recorder
A fast-scan recorder records individual current and voltage sampled values with a sampling rate that is high
enough for the display of network events and transients. Recording starts once the value of an analog quan-
tity exceeds or drops below a specified limit. High-speed fault recording is used for acquiring brief transient
events of 1-2 seconds.
FG
See Function Group
Fleeting Indication
Fleeting indications are single-point indications present for a very short time, in which only the coming of the
process signal is logged and further processed time-correctly.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Floating
Floating means that a free potential not connected to ground is generated. Therefore, no current flows
through the body to ground in the event of touching.
Folder
This object type helps when structuring a project hierarchically.
Function block
A block that can perform one specific task or function.
Function group
Functions are brought together into function groups (FG). The assignment of functions to current and/or
voltage transformers (assignment of functions to measuring points), the information exchange between the
function groups via interfaces as well as the generation of group indications are important for this bringing
together.
General interrogation
The state of all process inputs, of the status and of the error image are scanned on system startup. This infor-
mation is used to update the system-side process image. Likewise, the current process state can be interro-
gated after data loss with a general interrogation (GA).
Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event

GOOSE. Protocol of IEC 61850 for communication between bay units.
GI
See General Interrogation
Global Positioning System

Satellites with atomic clocks orbit the earth twice a day at a height of about 20 000 km. They emit signals
which contain the GPS universal time with other data. The GPS receiver determines its own position from the
signals received. It can derive the propagation runtime of a satellite's signal from this position and hence
correct the emitted GPS universal time.
GOOSE
See Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event.
GPS
See Global Positioning System
Ground
The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to 0 at every point. In the area of grounding
conductors, the ground can have a potential diverging from 0. The term reference ground is also used for this
situation.
Grounding
The grounding is the entirety of all means and measuring for grounding.
Hierarchy level
In a structure with superordinate and subordinate objects, a hierarchy level is a level of equal-ranking objects.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
HSR protocol
Like PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol), HSR (High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol) is speci-
fied in IEC 62439-3. Both protocols offer redundancy without switching time. The principal function can be
found in the definition of PRP. With PRP, the same message is sent via 2 separated networks. In contrast to
this, in the case of HSR the message is sent twice in the 2 directions of the ring. The recipient receives it
correspondingly via 2 paths in the ring, takes the 1st message and discards the 2nd (see PRP).
IEC
See International Electrotechnical Commission
Input Data/Input Direction

Data is sent from the protocol slave to the protocol master.
International Electrotechnical Commission

See IEC.
Internet protocol
The Internet protocol (IP) enables the connection of participants which are positioned in different networks.
Inter-Range Instrumentation Group B

See IRIG B
IP
See Internet protocol
IRIG B
The IRIG time code is an abbreviation of Inter-Range Instrumentation Group time code and is a set of a group
of time codes used primarily in the military area for video recording, telemetry and other data recording
purposes. The Inter-Range Instrumentation Group (IRIG) is an organization of the United States Air Force
located at White Sands Missile Range and defines various standards for the testing of missiles, among other
purposes. The IRIG time code is divided into the following subgroups: IRIG A (1000 second pulses), IRIG B
(100 second pulses), IRIG D (1 pulse per minute), IRIG E (10 second pulses), IRIG G (10 000 second
pulses), IRIG H (1 second pulse). The subgroups are differentiated by the number of synchronization pulses
per second, the data formats and the modulation techniques used.
Link Address
The link address indicates the address of a SIPROTEC device.
Metered value
Metered values are a processing function, used to determine the total number of discrete similar events
(counter pulses), for example, as integral over a time span. In the power supply utility field, electrical energy
is often recorded as a metered value (energy import/delivery, energy transport).
Navigation window
Left area of the project window, which visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the
form of a hierarchical tree structure.
Object
Each element of a project structure is designated as an object in DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Offline
If there is no communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is offline. The PC program executes in
Offline mode.
Online
If there is a communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is online. The PC program executes in
Online mode.
Order Configurator
One or more appropriate modules are suggested in the order configurator corresponding to the desired
protocol on a module. You will also find the available standard variants in the order configurator.
OSM
See Optical Switch Module.
Output data/output direction

Data is sent from the protocol master to the protocol slave.
Output Indication
Indications can be information provided by the device on events and states. The events and states are
provided via binary outputs, for example, startup of the processor system (event) or fault in a device function
(state). These are designated as output indications.
Parameterization
Comprehensive term for all setting work on the device. You can parameterize the protection functions with
DIGSI 5 or sometimes also directly on the device.
Parameter set
The parameter set is the entirety of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC device.
Participant
In an inter-device communication group, up to 16 SIPROTEC devices suitable for this can communicate with
one another. The individually involved devices are referred to as participants.
Participant Address
A participant address consists of the name of the participant, the international dialing code, the local dialing
code and the participant-specific telephone number.
PDC
See Phasor-Data Concentrator
Phasor-Data Concentrator
PDC. This component collects the information of the PMU devices and makes it available to both other
components.
Phasor Measurement Unit

The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) is a measuring device for power systems. It is capable of taking phasor
measurements of voltages and currents in large, widely distributed networks.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Pinst (Perceptibility, instantaneous)

Perceptibility sensitivity as per flicker measurement according to IEC 61000-4-15
PLC
See Programmable Logic Controller
Plt (Perceptibility, long-term)

Long-term flicker strength according to IEC 61000-4-15
PMU
See Phasor Measurement Unit
PQDIF
PQDIF is a binary file format in the IEEE Standard 1159.3-2003 that is used to exchange the measured
values of current, voltage, power, energy between software applications.
PQDIF means Power Quality Data Interchange Format.
Product code
Compilation of product features in readable form
PROFIBUS
PROcess Feld BUS, German Process and Fieldbus standard (EN 50170). The standard specifies the func-
tional, electrical and mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial fieldbus.
PROFIBUS Address
A unique PROFIBUS address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within a PROFIBUS network. A
total of 254 PROFIBUS addresses per PROFIBUS network are available.
Programmable Logic
The programmable logic is a function in Siemens devices or station controllers, enabling user-specific func-
tionality in the form of a program. This logic component can be programmed by various methods: CFC (=
Continuous Function Chart) is one of these. SFC (Sequential Function Chart) and ST (Structured Text) are
others.
Programmable Logic Controller

Programmable logic controllers (PLC) are electronic controllers whose function is saved as a program in the
control unit. The construction and wiring of the device do not therefore depend on the function of the control.
The programmable logic controller has the structure of a computer; it consists of CPU with memory, installa-
tion/extension groups (for example, DI, AI, CO, CR), power supply (PS) and rack (with bus system). The
peripherals and programming language are oriented towards the circumstances of the control system.
Project
In terms of content, a project is the replication of a real energy supply system. In graphic terms, a project is
represented as a number of objects which are incorporated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project
consists of a series of directories and files containing project data.
Protection Device
A protection device detects fault states in distribution networks, taking into account various criteria, such as
fault distance, fault direction or fault duration, triggering a disconnection of the defective network section.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
PRP
PRP is a redundancy protocol for Ethernet networks that is specified in IEC 62439-3. Unlike conventional
redundancy procedures, such as RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, IEEE 802.1D-2004) PRP offers unin-
terruptible switching, which avoids any down time in the event of a fault, and thus the highest availability.
Pst (Perceptibility, short-term)

Short-term flicker strength according to IEC 61000-4-15
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a standardized redundancy process with a short response time.
In the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP protocol), structuring times in the multidigit second range apply in the
case of a reorganization of the network structure. These times are reduced to several 100 milliseconds for
RSTP.
Real Time
Real time
Reorganize
The frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas which are no longer used. The reorgan-
ization of projects allows these memory areas to be freed up again. The reorganization also leads to VD
addresses being reassigned. This results in all SIPROTEC devices having to be reinitialized.
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
Sampling rate
The sampling rate describes the number of samples taken per period. For protection applications, typical
sampling rates are between 16 and 80. A widely used value is 20 samples per period For power quality appli-
cations, the sampling rate must be considerably higher because of the evaluation of harmonics. A typical
value is 256. If sampling-frequency tracking is used, a constant sampling rate per current power frequency
period can always be assumed regardless of the current power frequency.
SBO
Select before operate
SC
See Single Command
SC
See Single Command
SCD
See Substation Configuration Description
SDHC
Secure Digital High Capacity
Standard for SD memory cards with up to 32 GB capacitance
Service Interface
Device interface for interfacing DIGSI 5 (for example, through a modem)

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
SI
See Single-Point Indication.
SICAM PAS
Power Automation System – Substation automation system, modular in design and based on the Substation
Controller SICAM SC and the HMI system SICAM WinCC.
SICAM PQ Analyzer
The SICAM PQ Analyzer is used for the following purposes:
- Displaying data measured by a PQ device
- Assessment of these data according to power quality criteria by the SICAM PQS System (...).
The various views of the SICAM PQ Analyzer provide the means for evaluation of archived PQ measured
data and system incidents.
- Incident explorer
- PQ Inspector
- PQ Explorer
- Report browser
- Grid code viewer
SICAM PQS
With SICAM PQS, all fault records and power quality data in a system can be analyzed.
SICAM SCC
The HMI system SICAM SCC (serial communications channel) graphically displays the state of your network.
SICAM SCC visualizes alarms and messages, archives the network data, provides the option of intervening
manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employees.
SIGRA
The SIGRA component supports you in analyzing failures in your power system. It graphically conditions
information recorded during the failure and calculates additional supplemental quantities such as impedances
or RMS values, from the supplied measured values making evaluation of the fault record easier for you. The
quantities can be shown as desired in the diagrams of the following views: time signals, phasor diagrams,
locus diagrams and harmonic components. In addition, you may add more fault records to the failure evalua-
tion, for example, from the opposite end of a line, and synchronize these. SIGRA is also suited to evaluate
fault records of devices from other manufacturers.
SIGUARD PDP
SIGUARD PDP (Phasor Data Processing) is software for monitoring the status of power transmission in
extensive power systems. When critical states are approached (frequency stability, voltage stability, transmis-
sion stability, and power swing), this is detected early and displayed. The threshold at which a critical state is
reached and requires intervention can be defined and subsequently changed at any time. In addition,
SIGUARD PDP supports you in the analysis of the power system. Weak points and fault sources can be iden-
tified and eliminated early on. SIGUARD PDP works together with PMUs (phasor measurement units). These
measuring devices are installed in the power distribution systems and connected to the current and voltage
transformers. Time synchronization via GPS having an accuracy of < 5 μs enables the PMUs to acquire the
measured values with amplitude and phase as phasors (indicator values) with high precision and to transmit
them via the communication interface. These time-synchronized measured values from regionally widely
distributed measuring points can be collected and evaluated using SIGUARD PDP.
SIMEAS R
SIMEAS R is a digital fault recorder (like the 7KE85) used primarily in power plants, transformer substations,
medium-voltage systems, high-voltage systems, systems for very high voltages and in industrial complexes

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
for quality assurance and for monitoring secondary and primary facilities. It measures and documents indica-
tors defined in international standards (EN 50160). Weak points can be reliably and quickly identified due to
its high degree of functionality. In the event of a fault, all relevant signals are recorded with pre-event history,
defect trend and post-event behavior and transmitted for valuation and archiving – via Ethernet or a remote
data transmission system. This makes quick decisions possible and errors can be remedied in a timely
manner.
SIMEAS R-PMU
SIMEAS R-PMU is a device that contains triggered fault recorders and continuous recorders as well as an
integrated Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). The PMU measures phasors and makes them available in a
database. This is a high-precision measurement of the vector quantities of voltage and current in terms of
amplitude, phase angle, and time synchronization.
Simple Network Management Protocol

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet standard protocol and serves for the
administration of nodes in an IP network.
Simple Network Time Protocol

The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is a protocol for the synchronization of clocks via the Internet.
With SNTP, client computers can synchronize their clocks via the Internet with a time server.
Single command
Single commands (EB) are process outputs which visualize 2 process states (for example, On/Off) at an
output.
Single-point indication
Single-point indications (SI) are process indications which visualize 2 process states (for example, On/Off) at
an input.
SIPROTEC
The registered trademark SIPROTEC designates the product family of protection devices and fault recorders.
SIPROTEC 5 device
This object type represents a real SIPROTEC device with all the contained setting values and process data.
SIPROTEC 5 variant
This object type represents a variant of an object of the SIPROTEC device type. The device data of this
variant can differ from the device data of the original object. However, all variants derived from the original
object have its VD addresses. Therefore they always correspond to the same real SIPROTEC device as the
original object. In order to document different working states during parameterization of a SIPROTEC device,
you can use objects of the type SIPROTEC variant, for example.
Slave Device
A slave may only exchange data with a master after its has been requested to do so by this master.
SIPROTEC devices work as slaves. A master computer controls a slave computer. A master computer can
also control a peripheral device.
Slow-Scan Recorder
The Slow-scan recorder is, just like the Fast-scan recorder, a triggered recorder. It records measured values
with the set averaging time. SPS indications can still be recorded. Longer record times are possible using the
Slow-scan recorder.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNTP
See Simple Network Time Protocol.
SOE
See Sequence of Events.
SP
See Single-Point Indication.
SPC
IEC 61850 data type: Single Point Control
SPS
IEC 61850 data type: Single point status
SST
See System Interface.
Station Description
A station description is an IEC 61850-compliant file for data exchange between the system configurator and
the IED configurator. The station description contains information on the network structure of a substation.
The station description contains for example, information on the assignment of the devices to the primary
equipment, as well as on the station-internal communication.
System Interface
Device interface for linking to the control and protection system via various communication protocols
TC
Tap-position command – see Transformer Tap Position Command
TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol.
Telephone Book
Participant addresses for the modem connection are saved in this object type.
Time jump
A step change in the device clock due to user action (setting the time) or automatically (GPS time synchroni-
zation unit). A time jump may occur, for example, in the event of a failure when changing the time synchroni-
zation source.
Time stamp
A time stamp is a value in a defined format. The time stamp assigns a point in time to an event, for example,
in a log file. Time stamps ensure that events can be found again.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Topological view
The Topological View is oriented to the objects of a system (for example, switchgear) and their relation to one
another. The Topological View describes the structured layout of the system in hierarchical form.
Transmission Control Protocol

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a transmission protocol for transport services in the Internet. TCP
is based on IP and ensures connection of the participants during the data transmission. TCP ensures the
correctness of the data and the correct sequence of the data packets.
Tree view
The left area of the project window visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a hierarchical tree structure. This area is referred to as a tree view.
Trend recorder
Trend recorders are used for long-term recording and monitoring of the process of voltage change within
settable tolerance ranges. The flicker measurement can also be determined and stored in the trend recorder.
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol.
Unbuffered Report Control Block

Unbuffered Report Control Block (URCB) is a form of report controlling. Internal events trigger the immediate
sending of reports based on best effort. If no association exists or if the transport data flow is not fast enough,
events can be lost.
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

UDP is a protocol. The protocol is based on IP as TCP. In contrast to this, however, UDP works without a
connection and does not have any safety mechanisms. The advantage of UDP in comparison to IP is the
higher transmission rate.
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
Value Indication
Value indications are single-point indications in which a further value is transferred in addition to the actual
indication (example: Fault locator : Here, the distance to the fault location is also indicated in addition to the
fault statement Yes/No.)
Virtual Bay Device

A virtual bay device comprises all communication objects, as well as their properties and states, which a
communication user can utilize in the form of services.
Virtual Device
A VD (virtual device) comprises all communication objects, as well as their properties and states, which a
communication user can utilize in the form of services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device
or a software module.

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Index
A DPC 85
DPS 85
ACD 86
ACT 86
Application Examples 415
E
Application Templates
Function Key 101
ENC 86
Averaging Time 228, 232, 236
B F
Fast-Scan Recorder 220
Binary Signals: 386
Fault record 215
Broken-wire detection
Recordings 209
Application and setting notes 332
SICAM PQS 212
Broken-wire check 331
SIGRA 211
Broken-wire suspected 330
Fault recorder
Function structure 329
Continuous recorder 231
Overview of functions 329
Fault Recorder
Protection blocking 331
Fast-Scan Recorder 220
Busbar 418
Slow-scan Recorder 225
Trend Recorder 234
Fault recording 228
C FG Analog Transformers
Application and Setting Notes for the 20-mA Unit.
Channel-name length 205 Ether. 160
CMV 86 Application and Setting Notes for the 20-mA Unit.
Communication Log 56 Serial 165
COMTRADE 205 Overview 20-mA Unit Serial 165
COMTRADE format 209, 214 FG analog unit
Continuous recorder 231 Overview 156
Control Functions FG analog units
User-Defined Objects 83 Temperature sensor 184
FG Analog units
Application and setting notes for the RTD unit
serial 188
D Application and setting notes for the RTD-Unit
Ether. 183
DEL 86 Application and Setting Notes MT fast input 175
Deleting Recorders 222, 228, 233, 236 Communication with 20-mA Unit. Ether. 159
Device Driver 198 Communication with an RTD unit 182
Device-Diagnosis Log 59 Function Group Structure 157
Dimensions 380, 382 Measuring transducer with fast inputs 173
Disconnection and Recovery of Supply Voltage 222, Overview 20-mA Unit Ether. 158
227, 232, 235 Overview of RTD Unit Ether. 181
DNP 212 Overview RTD unit serial 188

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Index
Flash Memory O
Memory capacity 218
Flash Memory Capacity 228 Online access 250
Flash-Memory Capacity 218, 233 Operation Mode 206
Flash-Memory Size 222 Operational Log 47
Flicker 297 Operational measured values 298, 362
Function Group VI 3-phase Other Functions
Overview 132 Acquisition blocking 87
Structure of the Function Group 133 Chatter blocking 87
Function key 251 Manual updating 87
Function Key 103 Persistent command 87
Function-Group Connections 205 Saved outputs 87
I P
IEC 60529 381 Post-trigger Time 222, 228
IEC 61850 212 PQ 10/12 Cycles 297
INC 85 PQ trend 297
Indications 42 PQDIF 205
Displays 45 PQDIF Format 212
Reading 42 Pre-trigger Time 222, 228
INS 85, 85 Protective-conductor carrier rail 418
Instantiate Function Group 203 Protective-conductor terminal 418
Introduction to DIGSI
Creating a New Project 198
Recorder Interaction 208
Routing 201 R
IO212 173, 175
Record Time 222, 228
Recorder routing 304, 306
Recorder Routing 209, 297
L Indications 303
Recorder routing VI 303
LiYCY 418 Recorder Routing VI 306
Log Retrigger Blocking Time 222, 228
Delete 60 Ring Buffer 231, 234
Save 60 Route Measuring Points 202
Logs 46 Routing the Signals 209
Administering 46
Configuring 46
S
M Sampled Values (SAV) 220, 297
Sampling Frequency 222, 228
Manual Record Time 222, 228 SAV 85
Maximum record time 222 SDHC memory card
Maximum Record Time 228 Correction of defects 421
Measurands 297, 297 Data 382
Measured Values 386 Replacement 419
Memory capacity 222, 228, 232, 236 Secure Digital High Capacity 419
Memory size 236 Security Log 57
Mode 37 Select the Application Template 200
MV 85 SEQ 86
Sequence of events 52
Sequence of Events 237
Setting the Threshold Value 90

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
Index
Setting-history Log 54 W
Shield Terminal 418, 418
Shielding WYE 86
Shielded lines 418
SIPROTEC 5 device
Function control 37
Reference number for parameters and indica-
tions 39
SIPROTEC 5 Device
Adjustment application templates/functional
scope 35
Function Embedding 32
Slow-scan Recorder 225
SPC 85, 85
Special characters 205
SPS 84
SPS Unsaved 84
State control 37
State Control 206
Stored Indications 62
Synchronization 78
T
T103 212
T104 212
Test flag 246
Time jump 219
Tolerance rrend 306
Tolerance Trend 304
Transformer Ratios 90
Trend Recorder 234
Trigger 247
Binary trigger 249
CFC Chart 253
Current trigger 268
External Trigger 252
Fault record sequence control 237
Fault Record Sequence Control 238, 239
Frequency trigger 282
GOOSE Trigger 252
Gradient trigger 248
Level trigger 247
Manual trigger 249
Power trigger 287
Voltage trigger 255
Triggers on Indications
SPS messages 253
Troubleshooting 421
U
Umlauts 205
User-defined log 49
UTC 232

C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015
C53000-G5040-C018-4, Edition 11.2015

7KE85 V07.00 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7KE85 V07.00 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Open Source Software

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of the Manual

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 3

• Communication protocol manual

• DIGSI 5 online help

• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

• Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

4 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

IND. CONT. EQ.

Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 5

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

• Proper operation and maintenance

6 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

• Select online in the menu bar.

• Click Show Open source information.

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 7

Open Source Software........................................................................................................................................7

2 Basic Structure of the Function.........................................................................................................................31

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 9

3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts.................................................70

5 Power-System Data........................................................................................................................................ 105

6 Function-Group Types.................................................................................................................................... 127

10 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

6.3 Function-Group Type Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)....................................................139

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 11

6.4.9 Communication with the RTD Unit................................................................................191

7 Fault Recorder................................................................................................................................................ 197

12 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

7.3 Function Description of the Analog and Binary Triggers.................................................... 246

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 13

7.5.1.3 Information List........................................................................................................301

14 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

8.3.5.3 Function Description................................................................................................330

9 Measured and Energy Values.........................................................................................................................359

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 15

9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values.................................................................................................368

11 Technical Data................................................................................................................................................ 375

16 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 17

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 19

20 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5

• Continuous calculation and presentation of measured values on the front display

• Storage of min/max measured values and storage of long-term average values

• Battery-buffered, synchronizable clock

• Monitoring of the trigger conditions for the individual functions

• Querying of limiting values and time-outs

• Controlling of signals for the logic functions

• External distribution of information

• Ability to upgrade with innovations possible at all times through libraries

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 21

• Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions

• Multi-layered security mechanisms in all links of the security chain

• Self-monitoring routines for reliable localization and indication of device faults

Binary Inputs and Outputs

USB Interface and Serial Interfaces

• Redundant time synchronization (such as IRIG-B and SNTP)

22 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

1.3 Properties of the Fault Recorder

• PMU communication acc. to IEEE C37.118 standard